JP7357342B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Suggestion that foretells the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance (foretells that it may be executed) by inciting whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop, and suggests the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance by temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous pattern. There are gaming machines that perform performances.

JP 2017-18653 Publication

However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine has a lack of variation in suggestive effects, the effects may become repetitive and the player may not be able to sufficiently increase the player's interest.
In one aspect, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine includes a preview performance means capable of executing a first preview performance that foretells the progress of the game, a second preview performance that foretells the result of the game, and a suggestive performance that suggests execution of the first preview performance. and a specific presentation means capable of executing a specific presentation for presenting the process of deriving the result of the game after the execution of the second notice presentation. The suggestion performance means is capable of suggesting the execution of the first preview performance depending on the success or failure of the suggestion performance, and the suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance and success probability whose first probability is the success probability of success or failure of the suggestion performance. It is possible to execute a second suggestion performance with a second probability of , and a specific failure performance among the failure performances that produce failure in the success or failure of the suggestion performance is included in the second suggestion performance without being included in the first suggestion performance. . The preview performance means includes, in the second preview performance, a confirmed preview performance that definitively foretells that the result of the game is a special result, and an unconfirmed preview performance that foretells with a predetermined reliability that the result of the game is a special result. and is executable. The specific performance means is capable of performing a first specific performance in which the derivation process is performed in a first period, and a second specific performance in which the derivation process is performed in a second period that is larger than the first period. , the preview performance means executes the unconfirmed preview performance at a rate higher than the first ratio at which the second specific performance is selected from the first specific performance and the second specific performance when the confirmed preview performance is executed; In this case, a second ratio at which the second specific performance is selected from the first specific performance and the second specific performance is increased.

According to one aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of a game in a gaming machine.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to a first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of the composition of the production control device of a 1st embodiment. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a batch display device according to a first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of main processing in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of main processing in the first embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram (Part 3) showing a flowchart of main processing in the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram (part 4) showing a flowchart of main processing in the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram (part 5) illustrating a flowchart of main processing in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the production control device of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative pattern of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decorative pattern of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocking|fluctuation of the background part of the decorative pattern A during temporary stop display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating highlighted display and ambiguous (non-emphasized) display of the outline of a symbol according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of highlighting and ambiguous (non-emphasizing) display of the outline of a symbol according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of the highlighted display of the outline of a design, and ambiguous (non-emphasized) display in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decorative pattern of the modification of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a message display effect according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline display of the small pattern group of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern of the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline display switching target part during temporary stop display of the decorative pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of a third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a gaming machine of a third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of gaming performance of a gaming machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of game state transition of a game machine of a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable display pattern selection table of the special figure 2 game of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of a display device according to a third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline of the pattern display area of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern displayed in a pattern display area in the special pattern game of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline of the reservation display area of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of an animation of occurrence of a hold display according to the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a symbol loss effect according to the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a symbol loss effect according to the third embodiment; It is a figure (part 3) which shows an example of a pattern loss effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern loss effect of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a loss effect when a hold display occurs in the third embodiment; FIG. 9 is a diagram (Part 2) showing an example of a loss effect when a hold display occurs in the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display aspect of the hold display part of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing highlighted display and ambiguous (non-emphasized) display of the outline of a symbol during a loss effect in a modified example of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decorative pattern during the loss effect of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern during the loss production of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command A of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command B of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command C of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure (part 3) which shows an example of the display screen during the game of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure (part 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a preview performance pattern selection table and a preview performance pattern reliability of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of specific performance pattern selection probability of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of specific pattern selection rate (hit) by preview performance of a 4th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of specific pattern selection ratios (hits) for each preview performance in a modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of specific pattern selection ratios (hits) for each preview performance in a modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command B1 of a modified example of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command B2 of a modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance timing of the definite notice performance of the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the game of the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen during a game of a 5th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a double structure of a hold icon according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the display mode of the inner core icon and the expectation level according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode that provides unclear guidance on the expectation level of the inner core icon according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the display mode and changeability of the outer shell icon according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a change pattern of a hold icon according to a fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a change pattern of a hold icon according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a double structure of a hold icon according to a modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a pending standby display, a pending completion display, and an inner core icon row in a modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a pending expiry icon and a pending change in the pending icon in a modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a pending icon after a pending icon roulette performance according to a modified example of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure (part 1) which shows an example of the reservation pedestal display of the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (part 2) which shows an example of the reservation pedestal display of the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (part 3) which shows an example of the reservation pedestal display of the modification of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the derivation ratio of each suggestion content in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (part 3) showing an example of a display screen during a game of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (part 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game of a 6th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the execution rate of preview effects according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a performance configuration in a case where a plurality of suggestive performances are performed within one change in the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of a second modification of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the execution rate of preview effects in Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the execution rate of preview effects in Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of modification 4 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command of the seventh embodiment (part 1); FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the seventh embodiment (part 3); FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the seventh embodiment (Part 4); It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate of the preview effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (part 1) of the execution rate of the preview performance pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific performance of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (part 2) of the execution rate of the preview performance pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific performance of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (part 3) of the execution rate of the preview performance pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific performance of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (4) of the execution rate of the preview effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (part 5) of the execution rate of the preview performance pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific performance of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the pseudo-connection effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example (1) of a display of the timer effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example (part 2) of a display of the timer effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of temporary stop at the time of reach of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of SP reach effect of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 1) showing a display example of production stock according to the seventh embodiment. It is a figure (part 2) which shows the example of a display of production stock of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure (part 3) which shows the example of a display of the production stock of 7th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
11 so that it can be rotated to open and close. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 including a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration, presentation, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, if a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. A frame decoration device 18 that emits light to illuminate (blink) in a notification color (for example, red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided at the bottom of the front frame 12. Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. Note that a lamp for reporting an abnormality in dispensing may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball firing device (not shown), and a game ball put out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls put out when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operating section 24 of the batted ball firing device are provided.

Furthermore, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is a performance button 25 used for intervention operations in game performance, etc.
is provided. The performance button 25 functions as a performance operation reception unit that accepts intervention operations for game performance, and also functions as a performance unit that can perform performance in a required manner (for example, light emission mode, operation mode such as vibration or protrusion, etc.). Function. Further, on the left edge of the upper tray 21, an option setting section 29 is provided where the player can set various options. The option setting section 29 includes a cross cursor switch that can accept input operations in four directions, a central switch located in the center of the cross cursor switch that can accept decision operations, etc., and a center switch located at the periphery of the cross cursor switch that can accept input operations such as volume control. There are two attached switches used for this purpose. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15.

Note that the gaming machine 10 is operated by the operation (for example, pressing operation) of the production button 25 (push button).
Based on the player's operation received from the effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 4) that detects the effect, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation intervenes. For example, an effect in which a player's operation intervenes is an effect in a variable display game (ornamental special figure variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 The character displayed on the display device 41 can be made to move, or the identification information displayed on the display device 41 in the decorative special figure variable display game can be stopped. It should be noted that such operational intervention by the player requires not only the effect button 25 but also the switches (cross cursor switch, cross cursor switch,
A configuration may be used in which one or more of the following (central switch, attached switch) is used. In FIG. 4, which will be described later, each switch of the option setting section 29 is collectively referred to as a setting switch 29a.
It is expressed as

Further, to the right of the production button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that the player operates to receive a ball from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button 27 that is operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation section 24, the ball launcher sends game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. (See Figure 2). Furthermore, when the player operates one or more of the aforementioned setting switches 29a (cross cursor switch, center switch, attached switch) of the option setting section 29, the output from the speakers 19a, 19b can be emitted. It is possible to set the volume of the playback and the brightness of the game board 30.

Next, the game board 30 will be explained using FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 includes resin side cases 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game performance structure) 40 is arranged which is provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 approximately in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is configured of a device having a display screen, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where images can be displayed on the display screen, information related to the game is displayed, such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters that produce the special symbol variation display game, and background images that enhance the production effect. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game is played. Also, on the display screen, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, jackpot display images,
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board performance device 44 that performs a game performance by operating. This board presentation device 44 changes from the state shown in FIG. 2 to the display device 4.
It is possible to move toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, a normal symbol starting gate (common symbol starting gate) 34 is provided which provides a starting condition for the common symbol variation display game. The game ball that has entered the normal pattern starting gate 34 (game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, there are two general winning openings 3.
5 is arranged, and one general winning hole 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of a special variable winning device 38 which will be described later. The game balls that have won in these general winning holes 35 are detected by the winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, there is a starting winning hole 36 that forms a first starting winning hole (starting winning area) that provides the starting conditions for the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). (starting port 1) is provided. A game ball that has won a prize in the starting prize opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won the winning opening or the like.
In addition, at a lower position than the general figure starting gate 34 and on the right side of the center case 40,
A normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) is provided that provides starting conditions for the second special figure variable display game (special drawing 2 variable display game). The normal variable prize winning device 37 (starting port 2) is equipped with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right and can be converted into a state where game balls can easily flow in. 37b is normally vertical and maintains a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter.
When the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is rotated so as to fall to the right by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) serving as a driving device, and the normal figure fluctuation display mode is changed. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow into the winning device 37. The winning game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that it is possible to make it possible to win even when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, and it is possible to make it harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable prize winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electricity).

A flow path 91 through which game balls can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and game balls that do not win in the normal variable winning device 37 flow downward through the flowing path 91. A guide portion 93 is provided below this flow path 91 . The guiding part 93 has an upper surface 94 which is a sloped surface downward to the left, and the upper surface 94 receives the game ball flowing downward and guides it to the left where a special variable prize winning device 38, which will be described later, is present. .

In addition, a special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 is arranged at the lower right of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, which can be changed between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. It is set up. The special variable prize winning device 38 includes an opening/closing member (opening/closing door) 3
8c, and depending on the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game, the opening/closing member 3
The opening/closing member 38c retracts from the closed state where the big prize opening is closed (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) and changes to the open state (advantageous state for the player) in which the opening/closing member 38c can accept the game balls flowing down the gaming area 32. Convert. In other words, the special variable winning device 38 operates a big winning hole (
During the jackpot game state (first special game state) based on the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the small win game state ( During the second special game state), the grand prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the flow of game balls into the grand prize opening, and the player receives a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). is now granted. In addition, inside the big winning opening (winning area), a big winning opening switch (counting switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the big winning opening. .

Further, the special variable winning device 38 includes a guiding channel for guiding the winning game ball into the winning opening, and a V channel formed by branching from the guiding channel. The special variable prize winning device 38 is provided with a V door at a position that is the inflow portion of the V channel. The V-door slides back and forth by the specific area solenoid 38d (see Figure 3) to prevent game balls from flowing into the V flow path, and in a blocking state where it retreats backwards to prevent game balls from flowing into the V flow path. It can be changed to a permissive state that allows inflow. Further, the special variable prize winning device 38 is provided with a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 3) that detects the game ball that has flowed into the V channel.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the game ball flows into the V channel in the special gaming state and the specific area switch is determined. The state is set to a high probability state based on the detection at 38e.

Further, the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) big winning opening switches 38a. Further, the number of special variable winning devices 38 is not limited to one, but two may be provided, and when there are a plurality of big winning openings, the number of special variable winning openings 38a is approximately one or two for each. , a total of x (see FIG. 3) may be provided.

Further, a warp port (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage inside the center case 40, and a part of it is guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting prize opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is placed directly above the starting winning opening 36.
It will be easier to win.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the area to the left of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 where the game ball flows down is the left gaming area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the firing force and fires the game ball to the left side gaming area (so-called left-handed hitting), thereby opening the starting prize opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (the general winning opening located on the right side of the special variable winning device 38). You can aim to win a prize (excluding 35), and by firing a game ball into the right side gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting), you can enter the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37,
It is now possible to aim to win a prize in the special variable prize winning device 38 or the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), there are a first special pattern fluctuation display game, a second special pattern fluctuation display game, which constitute a special pattern fluctuation display game, and a general pattern starting gate 34. A collective display device 50 that displays a general pattern fluctuation display game triggered by winning a prize and displays various information.
is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display section 51 composed of LEDs etc., a special symbol 1 pending display section 52, a special symbol 1 symbol display section 53, a special symbol 2 symbol display section 54, and a general symbol symbol display section. 55, a general figure reservation display section 56, and a status display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be explained using FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, which is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. a CPU (Central Processing Unit) section 110 having a CPU, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc.;
The data bus 140 connects the section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as an operating clock for the gaming microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt, and a standard for a random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit that generates a clock (
crystal oscillator) 113, etc. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are powered by DC (Di) generated by the power supply device 400.
DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as 32 V (rect Current), 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc., is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC (
Alternating Current) - DC12V, DC5V from DC converter or DC32V voltage
A normal power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter etc. that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
10, a backup power supply section 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM (Random Access Memory) of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power outage, and a power outage monitoring circuit to monitor the occurrence and recovery of a power outage in the gaming control device 100. It includes a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal for notification.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are configured on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, , it may be configured to be provided on the main board. Game board 30
Since the gaming control device 100 is subject to replacement when changing the model, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a separate board from the power supply device 400 or the main board, as in the first embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to remove it from replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is provided by the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the 32V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power outage when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. is carried out. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is read from the gaming microcontroller 1.
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch, and detects a push operation. The setting key switch 127 enables switching between an ON state and an OFF state by inserting a setting key. The gaming control device 100 can change settings related to gaming performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during or after a power outage. For example, the game control device 100 allows the winning probability of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game to be changed according to six levels of settings.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 127 in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 in the ON state, the gaming control device 100 changes the control state to a setting change mode in which the settings of the gaming machine 10 can be changed. For example, the gaming control device 100 allows setting 1 to setting 6 to be changed cyclically by detecting a press operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability setting value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying a setting value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LE.
D and is mounted on the board.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 127 in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 in the OFF state, the gaming control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting confirmation mode in which the settings of the gaming machine 10 can be confirmed. . For example, the gaming control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
Equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.), and the RAM 111C serves as a work area for the CPU 111A or a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. used as. ROM111B or R
As the AM111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the performance, the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table refers to the fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3 stored as starting memory, which are stored in the CPU 111A.
This is a table for reference to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a loss fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.)
, tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining the first half variation pattern which is the variation pattern before reaching the reach state are included.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) refers to a display device that has a display state that can change, and that display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and that the multiple display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when a special result mode is reached, some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the display result being derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, the reach state also includes a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result format is complete (so-called full rotation reach). Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variable display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the order of left, right, and center to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state that meets the conditions for the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for special result mode (for example, when the same The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be displayed in a variable manner from this ready-to-reach state.

This reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the reach performances with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values) include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. Note that the expected values increase in the order of "No reach"<"Normalreach"<"Special 1 reach"<"Special 2 reach"<"Special 3 reach"<"Premierreach". Moreover, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a higher possibility of a jackpot than a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the production control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device, and operates the game machine. Controls the entire 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses a jackpot random number for determining the hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variable pattern random numbers for determining the reach (including the execution time of the variable display game in variable display without reach and non-reach), random number for determining the hit of the regular figure variable display game, etc. and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113
The CPU 111A is provided with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) and a clock that provides update timing for the random number generation circuit based on the CPU 111A.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special pattern fluctuation display game, and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special pattern fluctuation display game as the current gaming state. one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected based on the operating state (time-saving operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories, etc. and obtain it. Here, C.P.
U111A constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and controls the payout motor of the payout unit provided in the gaming machine 10 according to the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100. Control is performed to drive the ball and pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10,
Performs control for discharging rental balls.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36.
a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in the normal figure starting gate 34, winning port switch 35a, big winning port switch 38 of the special variable winning device 38
a. It is connected to the specific area switch 38e of the special variable winning device 38, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and the signal is 0.
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that converts into a positive logic signal of V-5V is provided. A detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 is also input to this proximity I/F 121. Also, the input range of the proximity I/F 121 is 7V-11
By setting it to V, it is possible to detect abnormal conditions such as when the lead wire of a sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, when the sensor or switch is removed from the connector, or when the lead wire is disconnected and becomes floating. It is configured to output an abnormality detection signal.

In addition, when explaining the prize opening switch 35a, in FIG. 3, the prize opening switch 35a is 1.
Although shown as blocks, in reality, a plurality (n) of winning slot switches 35a (three in this embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and each signal is connected to the other by a different signal line. I
/F121 is input. Also, in FIG. 3, the big winning opening switch 38a is shown as one block, but in reality, there are a plurality of (x) big winning opening switches 38a (in this embodiment, 3 big winning opening switches 38a).
) are provided on the game board 30. And, these plurality of big prize opening switches 38a,
For example, the switch and the gaming control device 10 may be connected to each other by different signal lines.
0 (main board) and is connected to the gaming control device 100 by a method called wired OR on a relay board (not shown) that exists between the two main boards. The board radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 which will be described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, the proximity I/F
Among the 121 outputs, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, big winning port switch 38a, and specific area switch 3
The detection signal 8e is input to the second input port 123. In addition, the signal output (proximity I/F 12
1) is shown as one signal line in FIG. 3, but in reality there are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . The third input port 124 also includes a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10, detection signal of the setting value change switch 126, detection signal of the setting key switch 127, payout control A touch switch signal from the device 200 (a signal based on an input from a touch switch provided on the operating section 24) is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the gaming control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is determined by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 and asserting a chip enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) (valid level It can be read by changing the The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 includes a detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 and a detection signal of the payout control device 20.
Frame radio wave fraud signal from 0 (signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting radio waves), payout busy signal (whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands or not) ), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout)
, Shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), Overflow switch signal (indicates that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (it is full)
A first input port 122 takes in an out ball detection switch signal (a signal output when an out ball is detected) and an out ball detection switch signal (a signal output when an out ball is detected) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. is provided.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor (not shown) every time the out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in a discharge channel (not shown) between a discharge port (not shown) for discharging game balls (out balls) from the gaming machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out ball detection switch signal is determined based on the gaming performance (for example,
The calculated gaming performance is displayed on the performance display device 135. Note that the out ball detection switch signal may be input to the production control device 300.
In that case, the out ball detection switch signal may be used to determine the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to a game production or customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit, 7-segment LED, and can display gaming performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch that detects vibrations, and a detection signal from the vibration sensor switch may be input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc. It has the function of removing noise from the signal. A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
The signal is input directly to the reset terminal provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130. In addition, the reset signal RESET is outputted directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the sight-fire test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test equipment. is configured to do so. Also,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input section 120. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Incidentally, the serial communication from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a probability state of a jackpot, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, outputted from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating an uncontrollable state is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. ing. The gaming microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE (not shown) outputted from the chip enable signal CE is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE are supplied to the sight test equipment.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and includes opening/closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b that opens and closes the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening), and the V door of the special variable winning device 38. A first output port 134a is provided for outputting opening/closing data of the specific area solenoid 38d to be opened/closed, opening/closing data of the normal electric solenoid 37c to open/close the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and display data of the performance display device 135. It is being

The output unit 130 is also provided with a second output port 134b for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 136. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 134c for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; 4th output port 1 for outputting on/off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
34d is provided.

The output unit 130 also transmits information regarding the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 134e is provided for outputting to. On the external information terminal board 71,
A photorelay is provided, which can be connected to an external device installed at a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and information regarding the game machine 10 can be transmitted to the external device via the photorelay. It is now possible to supply Note that part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a first driver that receives the opening/closing data signals of the big prize opening solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 38d, and the general voltage solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. (Drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the display device 50 outputted from the third output port 134c, a batch outputted from the fourth output port 134d A third driver 138c outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the display device 50, and an external information signal is externally supplied from the fifth output port 134e and the fourth output port 134d to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d outputs to the information terminal board 71, and a fifth driver 138e receives the display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a, generates and outputs a drive signal for the performance display device 135. It is being

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the segment line, thereby creating a dynamic drive system. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, first output port 134a, first driver 138a, etc.
It may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of on the main board. Further, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135 may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) instead of the main board. .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490. Photo coupler 139
The gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with the inspection device 490 so that data can be transmitted and received through serial communication. Please note that the transmission and reception of such data is
Since the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 is used like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control device of the first embodiment.
The production control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC).
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 31 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It is equipped with 4.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
PROM321 consists of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), RAM322 provides a work area, and FeRAM (FeRAM), which can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power outage.
An RTC (real-time clock) 338, which serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), is connected. Note that a RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands (performance commands) from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the content of the production, and instructs the VDP 312 to output video content, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, and issues decorative lamps. lighting, motor and solenoid drive control,
Performs processing such as managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325.
is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and wait signals to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signals WAIT and the like are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. From the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSY
NC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the video generated by VDP 312 is displayed on display device 41 via signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the audio source LSI 314 .
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Additionally, an interrupt signal I is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is now input. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 consisting of an audio power amplifier and the like that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F 331, a production control command signal (production command ). Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the production control device 300 includes a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) etc. provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18, etc.) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided in the glass frame 15, A board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the board performance device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that cooperates with the performance display on the display device 41 to enhance the performance effect) provided in the board performance display device 44 (including the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device equipped with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates a device for effect), and a frame effect movable body control circuit is provided to drive and control the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 includes a performance button switch 25a of the performance button 25, a setting switch 29a of the option setting section 29, and a performance accessory switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects the initial position of the motor in the board performance device 44. A function that detects the on/off state of the switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a function that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and sends the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a signal is provided. In addition, in FIG. 4, the option setting section 29
For convenience, the switches are collectively referred to as the setting switch 29a, but in detail, the state of each of the switches (cross cursor switch, center switch, attached switch) is individually detected by the switch input circuit 336. , and a detection signal indicating each state of each switch is input to the main control microcomputer 311, respectively.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC3.3V is based on DC5V.
The production control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 1.2V and 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
The signal is also supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., thereby setting them in a reset state. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the production control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on. Moreover, the circuit board that constitutes the production control device 300 corresponds to a sub-control board (also referred to as a sub-board).

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be explained.
In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100, the normal figure starting gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random value for determining the hit of the regular figure is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the random value for determining the hit of the regular figure is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. Performs processing to determine hit or miss. Then, after displaying identification symbols (identification information) in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time on the common symbol display section 55 of the collective display device 50, a process is performed to display a common symbol variation display game in which the identification symbols (identification information) are stopped and displayed. If the result of this normal pattern fluctuation display game is a win, special result modes corresponding to each of the first to third winning stop symbols are displayed on the normal pattern display section 55, and the general pattern solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for controlling the conversion of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result pattern of the loss on the general pattern display section 55.

In addition, the starting prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display game is started. A random number value for determining a jackpot is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B to perform a process of determining whether the first special symbol fluctuation display game is a hit or a miss. In addition, a starting memory is stored based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, the jackpot determination of the second special figure variable display game is performed. The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to perform a process of determining whether the second special symbol fluctuation display game is successful or not.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the production control device 300 a control signal (production control command, production command) including the determination results of the first special symbol variation display game and the second special symbol variation display game. do. Then, a process of displaying a special pattern variation display game in which the identification pattern (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time on the special pattern 1 pattern display section 53 and the special pattern 2 pattern display section 54 of the batch display device 50, and then stopped. will be carried out. That is, the game control device 100 controls the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the gaming area 32.
The game control means controls the progress of the variable display game based on winnings.

In addition, the performance control device 300 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 performs processing such as setting the performance state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs, based on control signals from the game control device 100. That is, the performance control device 300 constitutes a performance control means that controls the performance related to games (variable display games, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game is a jackpot or small win, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode and small hit result mode in the special pattern 1 symbol display section 53 and the special symbol 2 symbol display section 54. is displayed, and a process for generating a special game state or a small win game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small win game) is performed. In the process of generating a special game state when the result of the first special figure variable display game or the second special figure variable display game becomes a jackpot, the CPU 111A controls the special variable winning device 38 by using the big winning opening solenoid 38b, for example. Control is performed to open the opening/closing member 38c and allow the game ball to flow into the grand prize opening. In this special game state, the CPU 111A determines whether a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) enter the grand prize opening, or a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the opening of the grand prize opening. One round is defined as opening the big prize opening until the big prize is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, a small hit game state is generated when the result of the first special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern 1 fluctuation display game) or the second special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern 2 fluctuation display game) is a small win. In the process, the CPU 111A controls, for example, to open the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the big winning hole solenoid 38b, and to enable the game ball to flow into the big winning hole.

The opening/closing operation pattern (opening/closing operation mode) of the big prize opening performed in these small winning game states is, for example, an operation of maintaining the opening/closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes a big winning opening/closing control means that controls opening/closing of the big winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special pattern variation display game is a loss, the CPU 111A performs control to display the result pattern of the loss on the special pattern 1 pattern display section 53 and the special pattern 2 pattern display section 54 of the batch display device 50.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. This high probability state is
The probability of a winning result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability state.
In addition, even if a high probability state is achieved based on the result of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a time saving state (specific game state, normal pattern high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. In this time saving state, the probability of a winning result in the general pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state) of 0. is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the normal pattern low probability state. Here, in the normal variable prize winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal winning probability is set to "0" so as not to release the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the general pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the general pattern stop time for displaying the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec, When the normal variable prize display game results in a winning result and the normal variable winning device 37 is released, the opening time of the first winning stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of openings (for example,
500ms x 1 time), the opening time of the 2nd winning stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of openings (for example, 1700ms x 2 times), the opening time of the 3rd winning stop symbol (normal power opening time) and opening Number of times (
For example, it is possible to set it to 1700 msec x 3 times).

In addition, in order to control the general figure fluctuation display game and the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state, the execution time of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game, the ordinary figure stop time, the number of times the ordinary electric current is opened, and the ordinary electric current opening time are set as appropriate. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general pattern fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned general pattern fluctuation display game to become a second variable display time that is shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time that is shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec is shorter than the first stop time). 70
4ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal variable winning device 37 is opened due to a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is changed to the normal state (normal pattern low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, from 100 msec to 1352 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal power is opened) is greater than the first number of times the variable prize winning device 37 is opened (for example, two times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number to a number of times (for example, four times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of a winning result in the general pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is changed from the normal probability in the normal operating state (in the normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/
251) (original high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is brought into the open state by changing one or more of the normal figure fluctuation time, the normal figure stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power open time, and the common figure probability. Allow more time to convert than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states in which different things are changed. Furthermore, when a win occurs, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities for the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the general power support state (during general power support or power support)
It can also be called.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be explained using FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the batch display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1, a 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
Equipped with D. The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d.
2, and various status displays are performed by the lighting manner of LED_d3 to LED_d18.

The collective display device 50 distributes various status display functions to the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, thereby displaying a round display section 51, a special figure 1 pending display section 52, and a special figure 1 symbol display section 53. , a special symbol 2 symbol display section 54, a regular symbol symbol display section 55, a regular symbol reservation display section 56, a status display section 57, and a special symbol 2 reservation display section 58. The round display section 51 has four LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special figure game is displayed depending on the lighting mode. The special figure 1 reservation display section 52 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display section 53 has 8 L of 7 segment LED_d1.
The symbols in the special figure 1 game are displayed by the lighting mode of the ED (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display section 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by the lighting manner of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the 7 segment LED_d2. The common pattern symbol display section 55 displays the symbols in the common pattern game by the lighting modes of three LEDs, LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The standard figure reservation display section 56 displays the number of pending figures in the standard figure game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display section 57 includes LED_d7, LE
The gaming state in the special figure game is displayed by the lighting manner of the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 reservation display section 58 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d13 and LED_d14.

The control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of a main processing and a timer interrupt processing performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the game control device of the first embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 6 to 10. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment.
FIG. 8 is a diagram (Part 3) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. Figure 9
FIG. 4 is a diagram (part 4) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 5) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment.

The main process is started by the control unit (gaming microcomputer 111) when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack pointer setting process is performed for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area where the values of registers etc. are saved when an interrupt occurs. (Step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step S4). RAM11
The address range of 1C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper one is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h at the beginning of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5).
. The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and firing of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of input port 1 (first input port 122) is read into the first register (for example, B register) (step S6), and then the state of input port 3 (third input port 124) is read into the second register (for example, C register) (step S7).

Here, a predetermined bit of the first register is masked and other bits are cleared (step S8). For example, only the second bit of the B register corresponding to the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 is held, and the 0th bit, the 1st bit, and the 3rd to 7th bits are cleared. Then, a predetermined bit of the second register is masked and other bits are cleared (step S9). For example, only the fourth bit of the C register corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 is held, and the 0th to 3rd bits and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared.

The information in the first register is integrated into the second register, and the information held in the second register is transferred to RAM1.
The information is retained as reference information that does not rely on 11C (step S10). For example, the logical sum of the B register and the C register is stored in the C register, and the C register is held as a status reference register.

For example, the value "00000000B" of the status reference register (C register) is "0" with the 0th bit, 1st bit, 3rd bit, 5th bit to 7th bit cleared, and the 2nd bit is cleared. It is “0” corresponding to the ON detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112, and indicates that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the ON detection signal from the setting key switch 127. That is, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register indicates a setting change state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is on (ON).

In addition, the value “00010000B” of the status reference register is the 0th bit and 1st bit,
The 3rd bit, 5th bit to 7th bit are cleared and are “0”, and the 2nd bit is RA
The fourth bit is "0" corresponding to the ON detection signal from the M initialization switch 112, and the fourth bit is "1" corresponding to the detection signal OFF from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "00010000B" of the state reference register indicates a RAM initialization state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is off (OFF).

In addition, the value "00000100B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and 1st bit,
The 3rd bit, 5th bit to 7th bit are cleared and are “0”, and the 2nd bit is RA
It is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "00000100B" of the state reference register indicates a setting confirmation state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is on (ON).

In addition, the value “00010100B” of the status reference register is the 0th bit, the 1st bit,
The 3rd bit, 5th bit to 7th bit are cleared and are "0", and the 2nd bit is RA
It is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and indicates that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "00010100B" of the status reference register indicates a power recovery (recovery from power outage) state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is off (OFF).

As a result, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are held in the C register. Note that the storage position (second bit) of the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 in the B register and the storage position (fourth bit) of the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 in the C register are different. Even with the logical sum of the registers, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are saved without being lost.

Thereafter, a process of setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S11). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200, the production control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100, which is the main control device A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for the program of the slave control device to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the gaming control device 10
0 rises first and sends the command to the slave control means before the slave control means starts up, thereby making it possible to avoid the slave control means from failing to receive the command. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a standby means that sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control means when the power is turned on.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is used to determine the validity of data held in the RAM area (
This is performed using a storage area that is not subject to checksum calculation (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). Thereby, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Note that the second register (C register) is designed to store the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112, but by storing it before the start of the waiting time, the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is Operations can be saved reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is possible to wait for the standby time to elapse before operating the RAM initialization switch 112, or to operate the RAM initialization switch 112 from power-on to the elapse of the standby time. It is necessary to continue operating 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it is possible to detect the operation immediately after the power is turned on without having to perform such troublesome operations. It is possible to prevent situations in which the customer's request is not accepted.

Furthermore, the second register (C register) is designed to store the detection signal of the setting key switch 127, and by storing it before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 127 can be performed. Can be detected reliably. That is, after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 12
7, the setting key switch 127 is loaded after waiting for the waiting time to elapse.
It is necessary to continue operating the setting key switch 127 from the time the power is turned on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without having to perform such troublesome operations, and the settings change operation or It is possible to prevent a situation where a setting confirmation operation is not accepted.

Next, a process of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S11)
), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power outages during the standby time (
Steps S12 to S16) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S12), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on or not. A determination is made (step S13).

If the power outage monitoring signal is on (step S13; Y), it is determined whether the power outage monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in step S12 (step S1
4). If the power failure monitoring signal does not remain on for the number of checks (step S14; N), the process returns to step S13 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of times of checks (step S14;
Y), that is, if it is determined that a power outage has occurred, wait until the power to the gaming machine 10 is shut off. In this way, by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power outage due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power-off are retained.
When a power outage occurs here, there is no need to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring signal is not on (step S13; N), that is, if a power outage has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by "-1" (step S15), and the timer value is set to "0". ” (step S16). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S16; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S12). Also, the timer value is “0”.
” (step S16; Y), that is, when the standby time has ended, the RAM 11
Access is permitted to read/write RWM (Read Write Memory) such as 1C and EEPROM (step S17), and off data is output to all output ports (set to no output state).
(Step S18).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111),
(used for communication with the production control device 300 and payout control device 200) (step S19
).

In step S20, processing is performed to activate a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).

In step S21, processing is performed to set a RAM abnormality flag. Note that the RAM abnormality flag set is provisional and may be updated in a process to check for abnormalities in the RAM that is executed later.

In step S22, it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If the value of the power failure test area 1 is normal (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S23), power outage inspection area 2
If the value is normal (step S23; Y), a checksum calculation process (step S24) is performed to calculate a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM.

In addition, in the checksum calculation process, the checksum may be calculated by adding the data of the work area for game control and the data of the work area for status display, or the data of the work area for game control and the data of the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of each area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control out of the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area of the storage area in the RWM that is used for status display.

Next, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S24 and the checksum at power-off match (step S25), and if it is determined that the checksums match (normal) (step S25; Y) clears the RAM abnormality flag provisionally set in step S21 (step S26).

Note that if it is determined that the checksums do not match (not normal) (step S25;
In case N), the RAM abnormality flag provisionally set in step S21 becomes definitive by passing step S26 and proceeding to step S27. Even if it is determined that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (step S22; N or step S23; N), the temporary setting is performed in step S21 by passing step S26 and proceeding to step S27. The RAM abnormality flag becomes deterministic.

In step S27, with reference to the second register (C register), the setting key switch 12 is
It is determined whether the detection signal No. 7 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the process advances to step S33, when the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If not on, step S
Proceed to step 28.

In addition, since the gaming control device 100 holds the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the second register (C register), the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch The detection signal of the switching switch 112 can be determined at the same time. In addition, the gaming control device 100 uses the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM.
Since the detection signal of the initialization switch 112 is held in the second register (C register),
The detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 before the validity determination of the RAM can be determined.

In step S28, the control unit determines whether the RAM abnormality flag is on. If the RAM abnormality flag is on (that is, the RAM abnormality flag is set), the control unit proceeds to step S30, and if the RAM abnormality flag is not on (that is, the RAM
If the abnormality flag is cleared), the process advances to step S29.

In step S29, the control unit determines whether the setting change mode flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S48 when the setting change mode flag is on, and proceeds to step S30 when the setting change mode flag is not on.

Steps S30 to S32 are processes that are executed when the RAM is abnormal or when the power is cut off during setting and the RAM is not cleared and the system is restarted. Step S3
0, the control unit transmits a main abnormal error notification command to the production control device 300.
Thereby, the production control device 300 performs production control corresponding to the main abnormal error notification command. For example, the production control device 300 receives a main abnormality error notification command and causes the display device 41 to display a message guiding restart with RAM clearing, or causes the speakers 19a and 19b to output sound. Further, the production control device 300 receives a main abnormal error notification command, and notifies the main abnormal error using the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board presentation device 44.

In step S31, the control unit transmits the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped to the performance display device 135.
Output to. At this time, the control unit can display the status corresponding to the main abnormal error on the performance display device 135. Further, the control unit outputs 7-segment display data when the game is stopped to the probability setting value display device 136. At this time, the control unit can display numerical values and characters that are not included in the probability setting value on the probability setting value display device 136. In addition, the control unit controls L when the game is stopped.
7 segment display data including ED display data may be output to the collective display device 50. At this time, the control unit may turn off or turn on all the lights of the collective display device 50.

In step S32, the control unit transmits the ON data of the security signal to the external information terminal board 71.
Output from. At this time, the control section turns off the output data of other signals output from the external information terminal board 71. The control unit repeatedly executes step S31 and step S32 and waits for the power to be shut off. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs the security signal from the external information terminal board 71 until the power is turned off. Furthermore, while the gaming machine 10 waits for the power to be shut off,
No signals other than security signals are output from the external information terminal board 71.

Note that the control unit does not prohibit access to the RAM in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is turned off. As a result, the gaming machine 10 receives an NMI (No.
When an n-Maskable Interrupt occurs, the return address can be stored in RAM to reduce the risk of program runaway. In this way, the control unit performs step S31 until waiting for power cutoff.
The content stored in the RAM during the repeated execution of step S32 is not protected by RAM access prohibition, but since clearing the RAM at the time of restart is a condition for starting game control, the risk of the content stored in the RAM not being protected is limited. There is. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the effect of reducing the risk of program runaway while limiting the risk that the stored contents of the RAM will not be protected. In addition, the control unit does not prohibit access to the RAM in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is turned off.
It is possible to improve program efficiency by making subroutines callable.

Steps S33 to S36 are processes related to setting change preparation, and step S
27, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the RAM initialization switch 11 is turned on.
This process is executed when the second detection signal is on.

In step S33, the control unit determines whether the RAM abnormality flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S34 when the RAM abnormality flag is on, and proceeds to step S35 when the RAM abnormality flag is not on.

In step S34, the control unit clears the set value since the RAM abnormality flag is on. Note that the setting value may be cleared by setting an invalid value as the setting value, or by setting a value that is most disadvantageous for the player from the perspective of fraud prevention.

In step S35, the control unit performs a process of setting a setting change mode flag. The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 10 is changing the settings. The setting change mode flag is set when the settings are being changed, and the setting change mode flag is set when the settings are not being changed. The flag is cleared (reset).

In step S36, the control unit transmits a command for changing settings to the production control device 300. Thereby, the production control device 300 performs production control corresponding to the command whose settings are being changed. For example, the production control device 300 receives a command that the settings are being changed, and causes the display device 41 to display a message informing that the settings are being changed, or causes the speakers 19a, 1
I want to output sound from 9b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives a command indicating that the setting is being changed, and notifies the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44 that the setting is being changed.

Step S37 is a process executed after setting change preparation (steps S33 to step S36) or after setting confirmation preparation (step S49, step S50). In step S37, the control unit sets the security signal control timer to 128 ms. As a result, the gaming machine 10 outputs the security signal at least until the security signal control timer times out.

Steps S38 to S40 are processes related to waiting for the completion of setting changes or waiting for the completion of setting confirmation. The gaming machine 10 outputs and sets the security signal in step S37, so that execution of processing related to waiting for the completion of setting change or waiting for completion of setting confirmation can be ascertained from the outside.

After allowing the interrupt (step S38), the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off (step S38).
39). The control unit performs step S5 when the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off.
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not off, the process advances to step S40.

In step S40, the control unit determines whether a power outage has occurred. In addition, the control unit is
The occurrence of a power outage can be determined by continuously detecting the power outage monitoring signal for a predetermined period of time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power outage has occurred, and proceeds to step S41 when a power outage has not occurred.
Proceed to step 39. That is, the control unit waits for the setting key to be turned off until the power outage occurs, with interrupts permitted in step S38.

When the control unit determines that a power outage has occurred, the control unit performs a process of prohibiting interrupts (step S4).
1) A process of outputting off data to all output ports (step S42) is performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S43).
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S44).
Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S45) that calculates the checksum when the RWM power is turned off, and a process that saves the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S46).
), a process for prohibiting access to the RAM (step S47) is performed, and the game machine waits for the power to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power failure has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when the power is turned on again.

Step S48 is executed when it is determined in step S29 that the setting change mode flag is on. In step S48, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on. The control section is
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, the process proceeds to step S49, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the process proceeds to step S51.

Steps S49 and S50 are processes related to setting confirmation preparation. Step S4
In step 9, the control unit performs processing to set a setting confirmation mode flag. The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 10 is checking the settings. The setting confirmation mode flag is set when the gaming machine 10 is checking the settings, and the setting confirmation mode flag is set when the gaming machine 10 is checking the settings. The flag is cleared (reset). In step S50, the control unit transmits a setting confirmation command to the production control device 300. Thereby, the production control device 300 performs production control corresponding to the command during setting confirmation. For example, the production control device 300 receives a command indicating that the setting is being confirmed, and causes the display device 41 to display a message informing that the setting is being confirmed, or causes the speakers 19a and 19b to output sound. In addition, the production control device 3
00 receives a command indicating that settings are being confirmed, and uses the frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, and board presentation device 44 to notify that settings are being confirmed. After this, the control section proceeds to step S37.

On the other hand, if the control unit determines in step S48 that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, it executes step S51. In step S51, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. The control unit proceeds to step S52 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, and proceeds to step S58 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on. That is, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to execute processing related to RAM initialization (RAM clear) upon activation detection accompanied by a pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112, and R
Upon detection of activation without pressing the AM initialization switch 112, execution of processing related to power outage recovery proceeds.

Next, the processing related to RAM initialization performed after step S52 will be described. R
In the process related to AM initialization, the control unit clears the RAM area other than the set value to 0 (step S52), and saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step S52).
Step S53). For example, the control unit sets the RAM clear start address 2 as the start address when clearing the RAM, and sets the area to be cleared (gaming control work Clear the data in area) to zero.

Note that since the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag are included in the data in the area to be cleared, they are cleared by zero-clearing the data in the area to be cleared.

In step S54, the control unit transmits a command for initializing the RAM to the production control device 300. Thereby, the effect control device 300 performs effect control corresponding to the command at the time of RAM initialization. For example, the production control device 300 receives a command when initializing the RAM, and causes the display device 41 to display a message informing that the RAM has been initialized, or causes the speakers 19a and 19b to output sound. In addition, the production control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and informs the frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 4 that the RAM has been initialized.
6. Notification is made by the board presentation device 44.

Furthermore, if the control unit detects that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off after executing the process related to waiting for the completion of setting change or waiting for the completion of setting confirmation (steps S38 to S40), the control unit executes step S55. Execute. After prohibiting interruptions (step S55), the control unit transmits a notification end command to the production control device 300 (step S55).
56).

As a result, the production control device 300 ends the notification that the settings are being changed, which was started by receiving the setting change command, or the notification that the settings are being confirmed, which was started by receiving the settings confirmation command. .

Next, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and determines whether the setting change mode is in progress (step S57). When the control unit is in the setting change mode, the control unit performs step S5.
Proceed to step 2 to execute processing related to RAM initialization. On the other hand, if the control unit is not in the setting change mode, the control unit proceeds to step S58 and executes processing related to power outage recovery.

In step S58, the control unit executes power failure recovery processing. The power outage recovery process saves the initial value at the time of power outage recovery in the area that should be initialized, refers to the special figure status, determines whether the special figure game is in high probability, and determines whether the special figure game is in high probability or not. In this case, the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area, and the on data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area.

Note that the areas to be initialized in the power outage recovery process are the power outage inspection area, checksum area, setting change mode flag, setting confirmation mode flag, and area related to error and fraud monitoring. In addition, in the power outage recovery process, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is determined. It is said to be in an undefined state indicating that the Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

Next, the control unit transmits a power restoration command corresponding to the special figure game processing number to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S59), and proceeds to step S60. In addition, in step S59, a model specification command, a special figure 1 reserved number command, a special figure 2 reserved number command,
A plurality of commands such as a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, and a screen specification command are sent. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of performances or high probability number information is transmitted. In addition, the command for specifying the screen means that the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both in normal processing (during variation, during jackpot (first special game state),
If the small win is in progress (none of the second special game states), this is a command to display the customer waiting demo screen; otherwise, it commands the display of the recovery screen. This is the command to do this.

In step S60, the control unit performs a process of activating and setting the random number generation circuit. After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on are extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (jackpot initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, initial hit initial value random number, etc. After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) of the value random number, winning symbol initial value random number (step S61), interrupt is permitted (step S62).

Subsequently, the control unit performs an initial value random number update process (step S63) to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number updating process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this manner, the gaming machine 10 continues to update the initial value random number as long as time allows during the main processing, thereby increasing the randomness of the random number.

Here, the control unit once prohibits interrupts (step S64), executes performance display editing processing (step S65), and after executing the performance display editing processing, allows interrupts (step S66). The performance display editing process is a process related to base calculation and display. Since the processing load of the performance display editing process is relatively high, the control unit disables interrupts in order to derive processing results more quickly. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 ensures that the processing results of the performance display editing processing are derived before the gaming state is updated by the timer interrupt.

In step S67, the control unit determines whether a power outage has occurred. In addition, the control unit is
The occurrence of a power outage can be determined by continuously detecting the power outage monitoring signal for a predetermined period of time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power outage has occurred, and proceeds to step S41 when a power outage has not occurred.
Proceed to step 63.

That is, the control unit repeatedly executes the processes from step S63 to step S67 unless a power outage occurs. Specifically, if a power outage has not occurred, the control unit repeatedly performs initial value random number updating processing, performance display editing processing, and checking of the power outage monitoring signal (loop processing).

Then, before the initial value random number update process (step S63), interrupts are permitted (step S63).
66) As a result, when a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the interrupt process is put under pressure because the timer interrupt is made to wait for the initial value random number update process. can be avoided.

Similarly, interrupts are prohibited (step S6) before the performance display editing process (step S65).
4) As a result, performance display editing processing is executed with priority over timer interrupts.
It is possible to avoid stressing the performance display editing process.

From the above, the main control means (gaming control device 100) that controls games in an integrated manner, and the slave control means (payout control device 200,
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control device 300, etc.), the main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying activation of the main control means and waiting for activation of the slave control means when the power is turned on. means (gaming control device 100), and a power outage monitoring device (gaming control device 100) that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

Furthermore, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power outage monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power outage, and the power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) , it is determined that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) includes a RAM 111C that can store data,
An initialization operation section (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and initialization means (gaming control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation section. This means that the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Note that the gaming control device 100 has a function (first initialization process) that distinguishes and executes initialization processing when data is abnormal (first initialization processing) and initialization processing during initialization operation (second initialization processing). 1 initialization means and second initialization means), it is possible to realize optimal and efficient initialization processing according to the situation.

In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) includes a RAM 111C that can store data,
Setting operation unit that can be operated from the outside (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12
7) and a setting change means (gaming control device 100) that changes the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation section. By providing a probability setting value display device 136), settings (setting values) can be confirmed. In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100)
This means that access to 111C is permitted.

In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) prohibits access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S47) and waits for the execution of all processes to stop (power outage occurrence standby process).
a loop after step S47), and a RAM abnormality standby process (loop of steps S31 and S32) that waits for execution of all processes to stop while allowing access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S17). making it executable.

Here, the standby process when a power outage occurs and the standby process when a RAM abnormality occurs will be explained. The power outage standby process is a loop process that is executed after access to the RAM is prohibited in step S47 of the main process and waits for all processes to stop. Furthermore, since the power failure standby process is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S41 of the main process, interrupts other than NMI interrupts (timer interrupts) are prohibited. Note that standby processing when a power outage occurs is performed by NMI.
Regarding interrupts, NMI interrupts may occur because interrupts cannot be prohibited. However, since the power outage standby process is a process that is executed when a power outage occurs, there is little risk that an NMI interrupt will occur during execution of the process. Further, the standby process when a power outage occurs is a standby process that does not involve abnormality notification. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the power until the power is shut off to processing the power outage. Note that the gaming machine 10 reduces the risk of the stored contents of the RAM changing due to unstable voltage by prohibiting access to the RAM during standby processing when a power outage occurs.

The RAM abnormality standby process is a loop process that is executed after access to the RAM (RWM) is permitted in step S17 of the main process, and waits for execution of all processes to stop.
Further, since the RAM abnormality standby process is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S1 of the main process, interrupts other than NMI interrupts (timer interrupts) are prohibited. Note that the standby processing when a power outage occurs is NMI interrupts because it is not possible to prohibit interrupts.
MI interrupts may occur. Since the RAM abnormality standby process is a process that waits for the power to be cut off, there is a greater risk that an NMI interrupt will occur during execution of the process than in the power outage standby process.
However, in the RAM abnormality standby process, even if an NMI interrupt occurs, access to the RAM is permitted, so the return address can be stored in the RAM, and there is little risk of program runaway due to the occurrence of an NMI interrupt. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 transmits a main abnormality error notification command to the production control device 300 in step S30, the production control device 300 can perform abnormality notification in parallel while the RAM abnormality standby process is being executed. I can do it. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be expected to restart quickly.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the gaming control device 100 will be explained using FIG. 11. Figure 1
1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt processing is performed in the above-mentioned main processing from when the interrupt is enabled until the interrupt is disabled (from step S38 to step S41, from step S38 to step S55, from step S66 to step S64, and from step S66). to step S41)
This is the interrupt processing that occurs. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing starts, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S7).
1). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register saving processing in which the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) is transferred to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S72). In step S72, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different.

Next, input processing (step S73) is performed to receive inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, to read the status of each input port. In step S74, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag, and determines whether the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is in progress. If the control unit is in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the control unit proceeds to step S75, executes the setting change/confirmation process, and ends the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the control unit is neither in the setting change mode nor in the setting confirmation mode, the process proceeds to step S76.

In step S76, the control unit executes output processing for controlling the drive of actuators such as solenoids (big prize opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c), etc., based on the output data set in various processing.

Note that when a firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the dispensing control device. At this time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the firing permission signal is transmitted to the game control device 1.
The second signal (launch permission signal) is also generated within the payout control device 200, and is the first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the payout control device 200. Output to the control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device,
The game ball is configured to be in a state where it can be fired when both are allowed to fire.

Next, the control unit transmits the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 20.
0 (step S77), random number update process 1 (step S7)
8), execute random number update processing 2 (step S79). Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the jackpot symbol random number, small win symbol random number, hit random number, and win symbol random number that are subject to the initial value random number update process. . In addition, random number update processing 2 is
This is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and special figure 2. Note that the random number update process 1, or in addition to the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

Next, the control unit includes the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the regular gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, and the specific area switch 38.
A prize opening switch/state monitoring process (step S80) is performed to monitor whether a normal signal is input from e and to monitor errors (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.). In addition, a starting port switch monitoring process (step S81) is performed to monitor winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a. In addition, in the starting hole switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the starting winning hole 36 which is the first starting winning hole or the normal variable winning device 37 which is the second starting winning hole, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are generated. A game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on the prize winning in advance at a stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game.

Next, the control unit performs a special pattern 1 game process (step S82) that performs processing related to the special pattern 1 variable display game, a special pattern 2 game process (step S83) that performs processing related to the special pattern 2 variable display game, and a special pattern 2 game process (step S83) that performs processing related to the special pattern 1 variable display game. Puzzle game processing (step S) that performs processing related to the display game
84).

Next, segment LEDs (for example, LEDs such as the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 of the batch display device 50
D) Segment LED editing processing (step S85) to drive the segment LED to display desired content
), a magnet fraud monitoring process (step S86) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. A panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S87) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S88) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and performance display device control processing (step S89) are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is ended.

In the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (i.e., the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (i.e., the process of designating register bank 0) are This is automatically performed upon return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines may require an instruction to execute a process for restoring an interrupt-disabled state or a process for restoring register bank designation.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the production control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the performance control device 300 at the time when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit initializes the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit initializes the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit allows an interrupt.

[Step D15] The control unit permits generation of display data. That is, the control section
The display circuit (not shown) in the DP 312 is permitted to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument to be given to the srand function, or may use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU, etc., so that it differs for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit uses the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the production control device 300.
The initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (for example, a production flag area (a storage area used as various flags to be described later in the control processing of the production control device 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes production button input processing. The production button input process is a process for editing when the production button 25 (production button switch 25a) is operated when it is enabled. Note that since the production button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the production button input within the production button input process, or may perform it within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes hall/player setting mode processing. The hall/player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and display device 41,
This is a process of accepting operations such as changing the brightness of the LED or the display device 41, the volume, etc., by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes random number update processing. For example, the random number update process is r
This is a process in which pseudo-random numbers are updated at least once every control cycle of the main process using an and function. Since the rand function generates random numbers based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain random numbers simply by executing the rand function. Note that a counter that increments by "1" like the main board (gaming control device 100) may be used as the random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check process is a process that analyzes commands received from the gaming control device 100 in units of a predetermined number.

[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The production display editing process is
This is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table form in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end settings. The drawing command preparation completion setting is a process for setting that preparation for all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process has been completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is frame switching timing. If it is frame switching timing, the process proceeds to step D26, and if it is not frame switching timing, it waits for frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is determined by the V blank interrupt (
This is a timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second≈33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of a V-sync interrupt. Note that the V blank interrupt occurs every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. The generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second, as described above. In the case of this embodiment, frame switching is performed when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, and the cycle of frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 second ≒ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the frame switching timing is not limited to this mode, and can be changed arbitrarily as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image updating) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 seconds or more, or at a cycle of less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

By the frame switching timing determination process, subsequent processes (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed in each of the processing cycles at this frame switching timing. Note that time management that needs to be synchronized with the presentation content is performed in units of this frame (ie, in units of the above-mentioned processing cycle). If the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames will take 100 ms. This is similar to the main board (gaming control device) managing time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit controls the VDP3 according to the command set in step D23.
12 to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table to instruct the VDP 312 to draw the screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes sound control processing. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, the board presentation device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes firing information control processing. The firing information control process sets firing related information based on the firing status flag, and also performs production according to the special figure rotation status (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (i.e., a predetermined number of rental balls)). This process performs mode correction.

[Step D31] The control unit executes information disclosure processing. The information disclosure process is a process for disclosing performance information regarding gaming performance to the player.
After executing step D31, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter executes step D1.
8 to step D31 are repeatedly executed. That is, step D18 to step D
31 is a loop process (
(Sometimes called main loop processing).

Note that the control unit executes the processes from step D27 to step D29 within the main loop process in order to match the effects on the screen, but the control unit executes the processes from step D27 to step D29 in the main loop process, and the control unit executes the processes from step D27 to step D29 in the main loop process. The process of actually outputting a drive control signal, etc.) to a port is performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, if an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, instructions may only be given via serial communication or the like, and no signals or the like may be output using timer interrupts.

Next, the display executed by the production control device 300 during a game on the gaming machine 10 will be explained using FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the first embodiment. Here, the display screen (sometimes simply referred to as "screen") is a screen consisting of one or more images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and as a general rule, different symbols are used for different display contents. is attached.

The display screen 500 shown in FIG. 13(1) is a display screen when the symbols are stopped, and after the variable display in the variable display game ends (before the start of the next variable display game), the symbol that is the result of the variable display game is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is displayed for a period of time. The display screen 500 includes a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special pattern 1 pending number display 503, a special pattern 2 pending number display 504, and a pending display 505.
and a pending consumption display 506 are displayed.

The large symbol group 501 is in charge of game presentation for the purpose of increasing interest. Therefore, large pattern group 5
01 is displayed in a large size with a variable display area set approximately in the center of the display device 41. The large symbol group 501 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

On the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol is
It shows that the symbol has stopped at "5", and the right symbol shows that the symbol has stopped at "7". That is, on the display screen 500, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the fluctuating display state for the purpose of making it easier for the player to grasp the game state. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large symbol group 501. The small pattern group 502 is
It includes a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern. On the display screen 500, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol constituting the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can greatly change its display mode. On the contrary, the small symbol group 502 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 501, and has a lower degree of freedom in display position (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 pending number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories for the special figure 1 game is "3".
The special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 2 pending number display 504 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "0".

The hold display 505 shows how the number of hold icons 507 corresponding to the number of hold times of the special figure 1 game is displayed in accordance with the current game state (for example, normal game state). Hold icon 5
07 has a spherical shape, for example, and the hold icon 507 can also be displayed with movement through animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.). Further, the pending consumption display 506 shows how a pending consumption icon 508 corresponding to the pending consumption of the special figure game is displayed. The pending consumption icon 508 has a spherical shape, for example, and the pending consumption icon 50
8 can also produce a display with movement through animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.).

For example, as shown in the display screen 500, when the special drawing 1 pending number display 503 displays "3" and the special drawing 2 pending number display 504 displays "0", the pending display 505 displays three pending memory displays. indicates that the number of reserved memories is "3". In addition, the pending number or the pending memory number means the number of starting memories in which the special figure variable display game has not been executed.

The hold display 505 has different display formats (hold memory display displayed in the hold display 505).
The number of reserved memories of the special figure variable display game can be clearly indicated, and the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved memory can be reported.

Depending on its display mode, the pending consumption display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state, and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result. On the display screen 500, the pending expiry display 506 makes the frame blank (blank) to indicate that the special figure fluctuation display game is in a stopped state. After this, the gaming machine 10 starts variable display.

In addition, in the reservation display 505, the number of reservations of either the number of reservations for the special figure 1 game or the number of reservations of the special figure 2 game is displayed by the reservation icon 507 according to the gaming state.
The total number of pending games, including the number of pending games and the number of pending special figures 2 games, may be displayed by the pending icon 507.

A display screen 510 shown in FIG. 13(2) is a display screen after the start of variable display. The display screen 510 is a screen after the display screen 500, and shows a screen in which a variable display is being performed (three symbols are changing). On the display screen 510, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol fluctuating display game is being fluctuated. In addition, on the display screen 510, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are changing, indicating that the special symbol variable display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

On the display screen 510, the special figure 1 pending number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories for the special figure 1 game is "2".
, the special figure 2 pending number display 504 indicates that the number of pending memories for the special figure 2 game is "0", and the pending display 505 indicates the game state indicating the pending number of the special figure 1 game. This indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game) is "2". Further, on the display screen 510, the pending consumption display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being consumed, indicating that the special figure variable display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

Note that the display screen 500 and the display screen 510 may include effect display elements such as a background display, a character display, and a text display (not shown), and the effect display elements may also produce a display with movement using animation or the like. It may be possible.

Here, the decorative pattern (ornamental pattern) will be explained using FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern according to the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 consists of decorative symbols (large symbol group), which will be described later, consisting of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol, and stops the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol in the order of symbol variation. The gaming machine 10 can display a decorative pattern A and a decorative pattern B as decorative patterns.

For example, the gaming machine 10 may use decorative pattern A for the left and right symbols that can form a symbol combination that becomes a reach, and use decorative pattern B for the middle symbol that can form a symbol combination that results in a jackpot after forming a reach. can. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 can use the decorative pattern A in the normal game state and use the decorative pattern B in the high probability game state or the electric support game state.

Decorative pattern A includes patterns 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, and 527. The symbols 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, and 527 can be distinguished from other symbols by their different display modes. The decorative pattern A includes two or more pattern components, and at least one of the pattern components has a distinguishing power that allows it to be distinguished from other patterns. Decorative pattern A is a decorative pattern that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a design component having discriminative power.

The symbol 521 is a symbol that displays the number "1". The pattern 521 includes a background part 521d and a number part 521n. The background portion 521d has a rectangular outer shape and has a distinctive design (for example, a white round shape). The number part 521n has distinctiveness as a pattern.

The symbol 522 is a symbol that displays the number "2". The pattern 522 includes a background part 522d and a number part 522n. The background portion 522d has a rectangular outer shape and has a distinctive design (for example, a white cross shape). The number part 522n has distinctiveness as a pattern.

The symbol 523 is a symbol that displays the number "3". The pattern 523 includes a background part 523d and a number part 523n. The background portion 523d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white square shape). The number part 523n has distinctiveness as a pattern.

The symbol 524 is a symbol that displays the number "4". The pattern 524 includes a background part 524d and a number part 524n. The background portion 524d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white double circle shape). The number part 524n has distinctiveness as a pattern.

The symbol 525 is a symbol that displays the number "5". The pattern 525 includes a background part 525d and a number part 525n. The background portion 525d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white triangular shape). The number part 525n has distinctiveness as a pattern.

The symbol 526 is a symbol that displays the number "6". The pattern 526 includes a background part 526d and a number part 526n. The background portion 526d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white diamond shape). The number part 526n has distinctiveness as a pattern.

The symbol 527 is a symbol that displays the number "7". The pattern 527 includes a background part 527d and a number part 527n. The background portion 527d has a rectangular outer shape and has a distinctive design (for example, a white star shape). The number part 527n has distinctiveness as a pattern.

Decorative pattern B includes patterns 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, and 537. The symbols 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, and 537 can be distinguished from other symbols by their different display modes. The decorative pattern B includes one pattern component, and the one pattern component has distinctiveness that allows it to be distinguished from other patterns. Decorative pattern B is a decorative pattern that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a design component having discriminative power.

The symbol 531 is a symbol that displays the number "1". The symbol 532 is a symbol that displays the number "2". The symbol 533 is a symbol that displays the number "3". The pattern 534 is the number “
This is a pattern that displays "4". The symbol 535 is a symbol that displays the number "5". Pattern 53
6 is a symbol that displays the number "6". The symbol 537 is a symbol that displays the number "7".

Next, a variable display example using decorative pattern A and a variable display example using decorative pattern B will be described using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game in the first embodiment (
Part 2).

A display screen 512 shown in FIG. 15(1) shows a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern A. On the display screen 512, the large symbol group 501 swings the symbols 523 (left), 525 (middle), and 527 (right) to display the left symbol "3," the middle symbol "5," and the right symbol "7." ” to display a temporary stop.

In addition, the display screen 512 shows that the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, and the special symbol fluctuating display game is being fluctuated. In addition, on the display screen 512, a special figure 1 pending number display 503 indicates that the number of pending memories for the special figure 1 game is "2", and a special figure 2 pending number display 504 indicates a pending memory number of the special figure 2 game. Indicates that the number is "0", and the pending display 50
5 is a game state that guides the number of reservations for the special figure 1 game, and indicates that the number of reservations stored in the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game) is "2". Further, on the display screen 512, the pending consumption display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being consumed, indicating that the special figure variable display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

A display screen 514 shown in FIG. 15(2) shows a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern B. On the display screen 514, the large symbol group 501 swings the symbols 533 (left), 535 (center), and 537 (right) to display the left symbol "3," the middle symbol "5," and the right symbol "7." ” to display a temporary stop.

In addition, the display screen 514 shows that the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, and the special symbol fluctuating display game is being fluctuated. In addition, on the display screen 514, a special figure 1 pending number display 503 indicates that the number of pending memories for the special figure 1 game is "0", and a special figure 2 pending number display 504 indicates a pending memory number of the special figure 2 game. Indicates that the number is "2", and the pending display 50
5 is a game state that guides the number of reservations of the special figure 2 game, and indicates that the number of reservations stored in the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 game) is "2". In addition, on the display screen 514, the pending consumption display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being consumed, indicating that the special figure variable display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display using the decorative pattern A or a temporary stop display using the decorative pattern B. Next, a more detailed display mode of the decorative patterns A and B during temporary stop display will be described using FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop display using decorative patterns according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 16(1) shows a temporary stop display mode of a pattern 527 as an example of the decorative pattern A being displayed in a temporary stop state. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d).

In the pattern 527 during the temporary stop display, the background part 527d is fixed, and the number part 527n, which has the distinctiveness as the pattern 527, swings in the left-right direction. Note that the background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may display an animation with movement.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the fluctuation of the number part by contrasting it with the background part, and realizes a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to grasp. Note that the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the outline of the numeral part in order to facilitate the comparison between the background part and the numeral part.

FIG. 16(2) shows a temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 as an example of the decorative pattern B during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d).

The symbol 537 during the temporary stop display swings the entire symbol 537 in the left and right direction (first temporary stop operation)
At the same time, the vertical axis is rotated within a predetermined angle range (second temporary stopping operation). In other words, the pattern 537
The temporary stop display mode is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the temporary stopping operation of the entire symbol, and can make it easier for the player to understand the temporary stopping state while suppressing interference with the game production. Note that the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the symbol vaguely (non-emphasized) in order to emphasize the temporary stopping motion of the entire symbol.

In addition, although the temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 is a combination of two types of temporary stop movements, it may also be a combination of three types of temporary stop movements including a deformation movement, etc., or a combination of four or more types of temporary stop movements. good.

Note that the entire design (for example, the design 537) or the design components (for example, the number part 5
The rocking motion in 27n) is not limited to rocking motion in a narrow sense, but includes periodic motion that can be sensed as a temporary stop motion. For example, vertical axis rotation performed within a predetermined angle range, deformation motion that repeats a predetermined pattern, etc. are included in the rocking motion in the temporary stop motion.

In addition, the temporary stop motion of the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display is a temporary stop motion in which the number part 527n swings in the left and right direction, but there are two types of temporary stop motion of the symbol 537 during the temporary stop display. One of the stopping operations may be a temporary stopping operation in which the vertical axis is rotated within a predetermined angle range.

In addition, the decorative pattern B (for example, pattern 537) that is being displayed as a temporary stop is rotated on the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range (second temporary stop operation) while swinging the entire pattern in the left and right direction (first temporary stop operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as it includes a temporary stop action in a manner different from the pattern constituent elements (for example, the numeral portion 527n) of the decorative pattern A (for example, the pattern 527) during the temporary stop display.
For example, when the temporary stop motion of the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display is a temporary stop motion of swinging the number part 527n in the left-right direction, the temporary stop motion of the symbol 537 during the temporary stop display is a temporary stop motion of swinging the number part 527n in the left-right direction. It is sufficient that the movement includes a temporary stopping operation in which the vertical axis rotates within a predetermined angle range, which is different from the temporary stopping operation. At this time, the temporary stop motion of the symbol 537 during the temporary stop display may include only a temporary stop motion in which the symbol 537 rotates on the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range, or may additionally include a temporary stop motion in which it swings in the left and right direction. or may include other temporary stopping operations. Even in this case, the gaming machine 10 clearly distinguishes between the temporary stopping motion of the decorative pattern A and the temporary stopping motion of the decorative pattern B, and provides a temporary stopping motion that is easy for the player to understand even if the modes of the decorative patterns are diverse. Realizes stopping operation.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display, and makes the outline display of the decorative pattern B during the temporary stop display ambiguous. Decorative pattern A
This can be achieved by making the outline of the numeral part thicker than the outline of the decorative pattern B during temporary stop display. Furthermore, the emphasis or non-emphasis of the outline display is not limited to the thickness of the outline display, but may also be realized by the saturation or brightness, or by a combination of the thickness of the outline display and the saturation or brightness. There may be. In addition, the thickness of the outline display is not limited to the absolute thickness;
Alternatively, it may be defined by the proportion of the width of the numerical part.

In addition, regarding the decorative pattern A during temporary stop display, the background part is fixed and the number part swings in the left and right direction, but the background part may swing. Next, the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display
An example of the shaking of the background part will be explained using FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of the swinging of the background portion of the decorative pattern A during temporary stop display according to the first embodiment. Note that the rocking described below is not limited to a rocking motion in one direction, but may also be shaft rotation, deformation, or the like.

The pattern 527 shown in FIG.
7b and a symbol portion 527s having distinctiveness as a pattern 527.
d. The pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(1) includes a base portion 527b, a symbol portion 527
s and the number part 527n integrally swing in the left-right direction with the same period, the same phase, and the same displacement.

The pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(2) has a fixed base portion 527b and a symbol portion 527s.
and the numeral section 527n swings in the left-right direction. That is, the pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(2) is
The symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n swing in the left-right direction with the same period, the same phase, and the same displacement.
Note that although the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n both swing in the left-right direction, they may not be limited to the same period, the same phase, and the same displacement. For example, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may both swing in the left-right direction, but may have different periods, different phases, or different displacement amounts. Furthermore, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may differ in two or more of the period, phase, and displacement. Further, the base portion 527b is not limited to displaying a still image, but may display an animation with movement. Furthermore, the base portion 527b may swing independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

The pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(3) has a fixed base portion 527b and a symbol portion 527s.
swings in the vertical direction, and the numeral section 527n swings in the left-right direction. That is, in the pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(3), the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n swing in different manners. Note that the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may be oscillated in different manners, but may have the same period and the same phase, or may have different periods and different phases. In addition, the base portion 527b
The display is not limited to a still image, but may display an animation with movement.
Furthermore, the base portion 527b may swing independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

Here, the temporary stopping mode of the decorative pattern A will be illustrated using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A of the first embodiment. In the temporary stop mode of decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18(1), the displacement direction of the number part is the left-right direction, the displacement period is 500 ms,
The amount of displacement is set to 10% of the symbol width (for example, 80 pixels when the symbol width is 800 pixels). Moreover, the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18(1) fixes the base part and the symbol part. The amount of displacement of the number part was set to 10% of the pattern width, but the amount of displacement of the number part was 10% of the width of the number part (for example, if the width of the number part was 200 pixels, 20 pixels) It is also possible to do so.

Another example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18(2) is that the direction of variation for the number part, base part, and symbol part is the left-right direction, the displacement period is 500 ms, and the amount of displacement is 1 with respect to the pattern width.
0% (for example, 80 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels).

Another example of the temporary stop mode of decorative pattern A shown in FIG. (80 pixels in the case of 800 pixels). In addition, the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18(3)
Another example of the temporary stop mode is that the displacement direction of the base part and symbol part is the same horizontal direction as the number part, the displacement period is 1000 ms different from the number part (larger than the number part), and the displacement amount is different from the number part (larger than the number part). 15% of the pattern width (for example, 120 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels).

Another example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. (80 pixels in the case of 800 pixels). In addition, the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18 (4)
Another example of the temporary stop mode is that the displacement direction of the base part is the same horizontal direction as the numbered part, the displacement period is 1000 ms different from the numbered part (larger than the numbered part), and the displacement amount is different from the numbered part (larger than the numbered part). ) 15% of the pattern width (for example, if the pattern width is 800 pixels, 15%
20 pixels). In addition, another example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18 (4) is that the displacement direction of the symbol part is a vertical direction different from that of the numeral part, and the displacement period is 400 ms, which is different from the numeral part (smaller than the numeral part). The amount of displacement is set to 10% with respect to the same pattern width as the number part.

Next, highlighting and ambiguous (non-emphasizing) display of the outline of a pattern will be explained using FIG. 19.
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing highlighted display and ambiguous (non-emphasized) display of the outline of a symbol according to the first embodiment.

The pattern widths and outlines of decorative patterns A and B are shown in FIG. 19(1), and a comparison of the thicknesses of the outlines of decorative patterns A and B is shown in FIG. 19(2). The decorative pattern A has a pattern width w1, a width of the number part w2 (<w1), and a width (thickness) of the outline of the number part w3 (<w2).
The decorative pattern B has a pattern width of w4 and a width (thickness) of the contour line of the pattern of w5 (<w4).

The gaming machine 10 emphasizes the display of the outline of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A by making the width w3 of the outline of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A larger than the width w5 of the outline of the numeral part of the decorative pattern B. The player can feel that the outline of the symbol B is displayed vaguely.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may realize emphasizing and non-emphasizing the outline display based on the ratio of the symbol width to the outline thickness (outline ratio). For example, the gaming machine 10 also makes the outline ratio w3/w2 of the decorative design A larger than the outline ratio w5/w4 of the decorative design B, thereby emphasizing the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A, and The player can feel that the outline of the symbol B is displayed vaguely.

Emphasizing the outline display of the number part of decorative pattern A and de-emphasizing the outline display of the decorative pattern B are as follows:
It may be fixed at all times, but it may be switchable depending on the fluctuating display state. Next, switching of the emphasis state of outline display according to the variable display state will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of highlighting and ambiguous (non-emphasizing) display of the outline of a symbol according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 20(1) shows a comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire decorative pattern B depending on the variable display state. During fluctuating display (non-temporary stop state), fluctuating display (temporary stop state), and stop display, the number part of decorative pattern A is the same as decorative pattern B.
The outline display of the entire decorative pattern B is emphasized compared to the entire pattern, and the outline display of the entire decorative pattern B is made vague (non-emphasized) compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A.

FIG. 20(2) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire decorative pattern B depending on the variable display state. During fluctuation display (non-temporary stop state)
During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline display of the number part of decorative pattern A is emphasized compared to the entire design of decorative pattern B, and the entire design of decorative pattern B is different from the number part of decorative pattern A. In comparison, the outline display is made vague (non-emphasized). In addition, during the stop display, the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is not emphasized compared to the entire design of the decorative pattern B, and the outline display of the entire design of the decorative pattern B is not emphasized compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A. The outline display is not made ambiguous (de-emphasized). In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate highlighting or non-emphasis display according to the fluctuating display state by switching the highlighting state of the outline display according to the fluctuating display state. Moreover, the gaming machine 10 is
By switching the emphasis state of the outline display according to the fluctuating display state, the player can easily sense the change in the emphasis state of the outline display. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make it easier to understand the temporary stop state while suppressing interference with game performance, and can improve visibility during stop display.

FIG. 20(3) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire decorative pattern B depending on the variable display state. During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is emphasized compared to the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B,
The outline of the entire decorative pattern B is made vague (non-emphasized) compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A. In addition, during fluctuating display (non-temporary stop state) and stationary display, the outline display of the number part of decorative pattern A is not emphasized compared to the entire pattern of decorative pattern B, and the entire pattern of decorative pattern B is The outline display is not made vague (non-emphasized) compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A. In this way, the game machine 10 makes it possible to easily understand the temporary stop state while suppressing interference with game performance by emphasizing the outline display only during the variable display (temporary stop state). .

Next, as a modification of the first embodiment, the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is de-emphasized,
A game machine 10 that emphasizes the outline display of a decorative pattern B will be described. Such a gaming machine 10 can make the temporary stop action of the decorative pattern B more appealing to the player.
In addition, such a gaming machine 10 prevents the number part of the decorative pattern A from being emphasized more than the base part and the symbol part, and allows the number part of the decorative pattern A to have a sense of unity with the base part and the symbol part. The stop action can be more strongly appealed to players.

De-emphasizing the outline display of the number part of decorative pattern A and emphasizing the outline display of the decorative pattern B are as follows:
It may be fixed at all times, but it may be switchable depending on the fluctuating display state. Next, switching of the emphasis state of outline display according to the variable display state will be explained using FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of highlighting and ambiguous (non-emphasizing) display of the outline of a symbol in a modified example of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21(1) shows a comparison between the thickness of the outline of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline of the entire decorative pattern B depending on the variable display state. During fluctuating display (non-temporary stop state), fluctuating display (temporary stop state), and stop display, the number part of decorative pattern A is the same as decorative pattern B.
The outline display of the entire decorative pattern B is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the entire pattern, and the outline display of the entire decorative pattern B is emphasized compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A.

FIG. 21(2) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire decorative pattern B depending on the variable display state. During fluctuation display (non-temporary stop state)
During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline display of the number part of decorative pattern A is made vague (non-emphasized) compared to the entire pattern of decorative pattern B, and the entire pattern of decorative pattern B is displayed as a decorative pattern. The outline display is emphasized compared to the number part of A. In addition, during the stop display, the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A is not made vague (non-emphasized) compared to the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B, and the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B is the number part of the decorative pattern A. Outline display is not emphasized compared to other parts. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate highlighting or non-emphasis display according to the fluctuating display state by switching the highlighting state of the outline display according to the fluctuating display state. Moreover, the gaming machine 10 is
By switching the emphasis state of the outline display according to the fluctuating display state, the player can easily sense the change in the emphasis state of the outline display. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make it easier to understand the temporary stop state while suppressing interference with game performance, and can improve visibility during stop display.

FIG. 21(3) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire decorative pattern B depending on the variable display state. During the fluctuating display (temporary stop state), the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A is made vague (non-emphasized) compared to the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B, and the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B is The outline display is emphasized compared to the numeric part. In addition, during fluctuating display (non-temporary stop state) and stationary display, the outline of the number part of decorative pattern A is not made vague (non-emphasized) compared to the entire pattern of decorative pattern B, and the number part of decorative pattern A is not The outline of the entire pattern is not emphasized compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A. In this way, the game machine 10 makes it possible to easily understand the temporary stop state while suppressing interference with game performance by emphasizing the outline display only during the variable display (temporary stop state). .

Here, FIG. 22 shows a modification example of a more detailed display mode of decorative patterns A and B during temporary stop display.
Explain using. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop display using a decorative pattern according to a modification of the first embodiment.

FIG. 22(1) shows a temporary stop display mode of a pattern 527 as an example of the decorative pattern A being displayed in a temporary stop state. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d).

The pattern 527 during temporary stop display has a fixed background part 527d, and a number part 527n, which is distinguishable as the pattern 527, swings left and right (first temporary stop operation) while expanding and contracting in the vertical direction ( (second temporary stop operation). That is, the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations in the number part. Note that the background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may display an animation with movement.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the temporary stop operation of the number part, and make it easier for the player to understand the temporary stop state while preventing it from interfering with the game performance. Note that the gaming machine 10 is
In order to emphasize the temporary stop operation of the number part, the outline display of the number part is made ambiguous (non-emphasized).

Note that the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop actions in the number part, but it may also be a combination of three types of temporary stop actions including deformation actions, etc., or a combination of four or more types of temporary stop actions. A combination may also be used.

FIG. 22(2) shows a temporary stop display mode of a pattern 537 as an example of the decorative pattern B being displayed in a temporary stop state. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d). The entire pattern 537 during the temporary stop display swings in the vertical direction. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the swing of the entire symbol by emphasizing the contour display of the entire symbol, thereby realizing a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 vaguely displays (de-emphasizes) the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display.
, the outline of the decorative pattern B during the temporary stop display is emphasized, but the outline of the decorative pattern B during the temporary stop display is higher than the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display. This can be achieved by making it thicker.

Furthermore, the emphasis or non-emphasis of the outline display is not limited to the thickness of the outline display, but may also be realized by the saturation or brightness, or by a combination of the thickness of the outline display and the saturation or brightness. There may be. Further, the thickness of the outline display is not limited to the absolute thickness, but may be defined by the proportion of the symbol width (or the width of the number part). Further, the outline display may be emphasized or de-emphasized by making one outline display of the decorative patterns to be compared thicker and the other thinner, or by changing the thickness of the outline display of one of the decorative designs to be compared. It is also possible to change only the other without changing the other. Further, the emphasis on the outline display may be such that an outline display is set on an object that does not originally have an outline display. Further, the de-emphasis of the outline display may be such that the outline display is not originally set.

In addition, regarding the decorative pattern A during temporary stop display, the background part is fixed and the number part swings in the left and right direction, but the background part may swing. Further, the emphasis on the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the non-emphasis of the outline display of the decorative pattern B may be fixed at all times, but may be switchable depending on the fluctuating display state. Even in the modified example, the emphasis state of the outline display can be switched as described using FIGS. 20 and 21.

Next, message production in the variable display game will be explained using FIG. 23. Figure 2
3 is a diagram showing an example of a message display effect according to the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 enhances the perceptual effect of the message for the player by controlling the thickness of the outline display part of the message display in the message presentation in the variable display game.

A display screen 600 shown in FIG. 23(1) shows a state in which the large symbol group 501 is in a ready-to-win mode. On the display screen 590, in the large pattern group 501, the large pattern (left) and large pattern (right) are pattern "3".
It is shown that the large symbol (medium) is oscillated and temporarily stopped, and the large pattern (medium) is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In addition, the display screen 59
0 indicates that the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, and the special symbol fluctuating display game is in the midst of fluctuating display.

Further, the display screen 590 shows a state in which a message display effect is being executed in relation to the large symbol group 501 being in the ready-to-reach mode. The display screen 590 displays a message display effect 593. The message display effect 593 includes a background section 594 and a message section 595. The background section 594 is a display that serves as the background of the message section 595, and makes it easy to distinguish it from other display sections. The background portion 594 is, for example, in the shape of a speech bubble, and has a different color from other display portions to facilitate differentiation between the background portion 594 and the other display portions. The message section 595 displays a required message (for example, "Chance!") to make the player feel a predetermined sense of anticipation.

A display screen 592 shown in FIG. 23(2) is a display screen following the display screen 590. The message display effect 593 is a dynamically changing display, and compared to the display screen 590, the background part 5
The position and size of 94 are the same. On the other hand, the message display effect 593 displays the message section 595 in an enlarged manner compared to the display screen 590. The message display effect 593 thickens the outline of the message section 595 as the message section 595 is enlarged. That is, the message display effect 593 fixes the position and size of the background section 594 and displays the message section 595 in an enlarged manner, thereby enhancing the perceived effect of the message for the player. Furthermore, the message display effect 593 expands the thickness of the outline display of the message section 595 while fixing the thickness of the outline display of the background section 594, thereby further enhancing the perceived effect of the message for the player. . Note that the enlargement of the thickness of the outline display of the message section 595 may be the same as the enlargement ratio of the enlarged display of the message section 595, but by making it larger than the enlargement ratio of the enlarged display of the message section 595, the player The perceived effect of the message can be further enhanced. Although the case has been described in which the thickness of the outline display of the message part 595 is made larger than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message part 595, the expansion ratio is not limited to this. In this way, the player may be alerted and the perceived effect of the message may be enhanced.

Regarding the switching of the outline display of the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 501 and the message display effect 593 have been described, but the gaming machine 10 may also switch the outline display of the small symbol group 502. Here, switching of the outline display of the small pattern group 502 will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of an outline display of a group of small symbols according to the first embodiment.

First, the normal display position of the small symbol (any symbol from the small symbol group 502) (during stop display)
is shown in Figure 24(1). The small symbol group 502 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, all of which have the same variable display. The variable display of small symbols is a switching variation in which symbols are sequentially switched according to the symbol arrangement. Since there is no offset setting for the small symbols viewed from the display area 540, they are always displayed at the normal display position where the entire symbol can be observed. For example, pattern 5
44 is in the normal display position. The symbol 544 that is being displayed in a static manner is displayed with the outline of the entire symbol being emphasized compared to the symbol 544 that is being displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the switching fluctuation of the small design is performed in frame units (display switching time units) on the display device 41.
It is expressed by rewriting the small design. Here, the symbol display for each frame is shown in FIG. 24(2).

For example, when a small pattern is displayed in the display area 540 at the normal display position in a certain frame, the pattern 544 (symbol 4) is displayed in the normal display position in the display area 540 in the next frame. Display in . Similarly, for the small symbols, a symbol 545 (design "5") is displayed in the display area 540 at the normal display position in the next frame. Designs 543 and 54 in the normal display position
4 and 545, the entire pattern can be observed from the display area 511 and has sufficient discrimination power. The symbol 544 that is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed with the outline of the entire symbol being emphasized compared to the symbol 544 that is being displayed in a static manner. The same applies to other small patterns including the pattern 543 and the pattern 545.

In this way, the variable display of the small symbol group 502 cyclically switches the symbol to "3", "4", "5", etc. every frame time (33.3 ms). Therefore, small pattern group 5
In the variable display of 02, the display time per symbol is 33.3 ms, and the display time at the normal display position per symbol is 33.3 ms. In this way, since the variable display of the small symbol group 502 is always displayed at the normal display position even during variable display, the outline display of the entire symbol is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) so that the player can This helps to make it easier to understand when the group 502 is being displayed as a variable. Note that the ambiguous display during the variable display of the small symbol group 502 is limited to the outline, and by making the other parts the same as the display mode during the static display, it is possible to ensure a certain level of discernment for the entire symbol.

The gaming machine 10 (including the modified example) of the first embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, display device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral part 527n)) having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a text attribute, and a second identification component having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a non-text attribute. A first type pattern (e.g., decorative pattern A) that includes a component (e.g., symbol part 527s) and a first type identification component (e.g., number (design 537)
)) and constitutes a pattern excluding the second identification component (e.g., decorative pattern B), a control means (e.g., game control device 10
0, production control device 300), the control means displays the outline of the first identification component in a first mode (for example, non-highlighted display) when temporarily stopping displaying the first type symbol, The first identification component is swung in one of a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotational direction) and a second direction different from the first direction (e.g., left-right direction). When the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline of the first identification component is displayed in a second mode (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first mode, and the first identification component is displayed in the first mode. and a second direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 20).

(2) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, display device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral part 527n)) having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a text attribute, and a second identification component having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a non-text attribute. A first type pattern (e.g., decorative pattern A) that includes a component (e.g., symbol part 527s) and a first type identification component (e.g., number (design 537)
)) and constitutes a pattern excluding the second identification component (e.g., decorative pattern B), a control means (e.g., game control device 10
0, production control device 300), the control means displays the outline of the first identification component in a first mode (for example, non-highlighted display) when displaying the second type symbol temporarily, The first identification component is oscillated in both a first direction (e.g., a longitudinal rotational direction) and a second direction (e.g., a left-right direction) different from the first direction (e.g., a longitudinal rotational direction and a left-right direction). When the first type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline of the first identification component is displayed in a second mode (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first mode, and the first identification component is displayed in the first mode. and the second direction (for example, the left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 21).

(3) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, display device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral part 527n)) having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a text attribute, and a second identification component having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a non-text attribute. A first type pattern (e.g., decorative pattern A) that includes a component (e.g., symbol part 527s) and a first type identification component (e.g., number (design 537)
)) and constitutes a pattern excluding the second identification component (e.g., decorative pattern B), a control means (e.g., game control device 10
0, production control device 300), the control means displays the outline of the first identification component in a first mode (for example, non-highlighted display) when temporarily stopping displaying the first type symbol, The first identification component is oscillated in both a first direction (e.g., a longitudinal rotational direction) and a second direction (e.g., a left-right direction) different from the first direction (e.g., a longitudinal rotational direction and a left-right direction). When the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline of the first identification component is displayed in a second mode (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first mode, and the first identification component is displayed in the first mode. and the second direction (for example, the left-right direction) (see FIGS. 19, 20, and 22).

(4) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, display device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral part 527n)) having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a text attribute, and a second identification component having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a non-text attribute. A first type pattern (e.g., decorative pattern A) that includes a component (e.g., symbol part 527s) and a first type identification component (e.g., number (design 537)
)) and constitutes a pattern excluding the second identification component (e.g., decorative pattern B), a control means (e.g., game control device 10
0, production control device 300), the control means displays the outline of the first identification component in a first mode (for example, non-highlighted display) when displaying the second type symbol temporarily, The first identification component is swung in one of a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotational direction) and a second direction different from the first direction (e.g., left-right direction). When temporarily stopping and displaying the first type symbol, the outline of the first identification component is displayed in a second mode (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first mode, and the first identification component is displayed in the first mode. and a second direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) (see FIGS. 19, 21, and 22).

(5) The gaming machine 10 has a first display area (for example, the display area of the large symbol group 501) and a second display area (for example, , a display area 540 of the small symbol group 502) (for example, the display device 41), and a control unit that can independently derive the result form of the variable display game in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, game control device 100, production control device 300), the control means includes:
A first symbol group (e.g., large symbol group 501) is variably displayed in the first display area, and a second symbol group (for example, small symbol group 502) smaller than the first symbol group is variably displayed in the first display area. At this time, the thickness of the contour display during the variable display for each symbol in the second symbol group is made thinner by comparing with the thickness of the contour display while the variation is stopped (see FIG. 24).

(6) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., display device 41) capable of displaying effects related to variable display games (e.g., special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game), and a message display (message display effect 593) as an effect. ), the message display is configured to include a text part (message part 595) and a background part (background part 594) that is the background of the text part, and the text part is enlarged while the size of the background part is fixed. a control unit (for example, game control device 100, production control device 300) that changes the outline display of the character portion from a first thickness to a second thickness different from the first thickness. (See Figure 23).

(7) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, display device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral part 527n)) having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a text attribute, and a second identification component having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a non-text attribute. A first type pattern (e.g., decorative pattern A) that includes a component (e.g., symbol part 527s) and a first type identification component (e.g., number (design 537)
)) and constitutes a pattern excluding the second identification component (e.g., decorative pattern B), a control means (e.g., game control device 10
0, production control device 300), the control means displays the outline of the first identification component in a first mode (for example, non-highlighted display) when temporarily stopping displaying the first type symbol, The first identification component is swung in one of a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotational direction) and a second direction different from the first direction (e.g., left-right direction). When the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline of the first identification component is displayed in a second mode (for example, non-highlighted display) which is thinner than the first mode, and the first identification component is displayed in the first mode. and a second direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 21).
.

(8) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, a display) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game) in which symbols (for example, a decorative figure A, a decorative figure B) are displayed in a variable manner. device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral part 527n)) having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a text attribute, and a second identification component having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a non-text attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that includes a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component, but excludes a second identification component to constitute a design. a second type symbol (for example, decorative symbol B) to be displayed on the display means; When displaying the seed pattern temporarily, the outline of the first identification component is displayed in the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), and the first identification component is displayed in the first direction (for example, vertical axis rotation direction). and a second direction different from the first direction (for example, the left-right direction), when the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
The outline of the first identification component is displayed in a second manner (for example, highlighted) that is thicker than the first aspect, and the first identification component is displayed in at least one direction of the first direction and the second direction. (for example, the direction of rotation of the vertical axis) (Figs. 17, 19, 20)
reference).

(9) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, a display) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game) in which symbols (for example, a decorative figure A, a decorative figure B) are displayed in a variable manner. device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral part 527n)) having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a text attribute, and a second identification component having a discriminating power that allows the design to be identified by a non-text attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that includes a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component, but excludes a second identification component to constitute a design. a second type symbol (for example, decorative symbol B) to be displayed on the display means; When displaying the seed pattern temporarily, the outline of the first identification component is displayed in the first mode (e.g., highlighted display), and the first identification component is displayed in the first direction (e.g.,
When the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed by swinging in one of the directions (vertical axis rotational direction) and a second direction (for example, left and right direction) different from the first direction (for example, left and right direction). , the outline of the first identification component is displayed in a second manner (e.g., non-highlighted) that is thinner than the first aspect, and the first identification component is displayed in at least one of the first direction and the second direction. (for example, the direction of rotation of the vertical axis) (Figs. 17, 19, 21)
reference).

[Second embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a second embodiment in which the thickness of the outline of the decorative pattern can be varied for each part will be described. First, switching of the outline display of a decorative pattern during temporary stop display by rotating the vertical axis will be explained using FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern according to the second embodiment.

This figure shows how "7" (pattern 537) of the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. 25(1) is rotated on the vertical axis and temporarily stopped. The pattern 550 shows how the decorative pattern B "7" is rotated to the left on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. The pattern 551 shows the decorative pattern B "7" viewed from the front. The pattern 552 is
It shows how the decorative pattern B "7" is rotated to the right on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display by switching from the symbol 550 to the symbol 552 via the symbol 551, and from the symbol 552 to the symbol 550 via the symbol 551.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the outline display for each switching target outline display part (left half of the symbol, right half of the symbol), as shown in FIG. 25(2). .
The gaming machine 10 has a left half of the symbol 550 as a left portion 550L, and a right half of the symbol 550 as a right portion 55.
When set to 0R, the outline of the left part 550L, which appears to move away, is made thinner (
The outline of the right portion 550R, which appears to move in the approaching direction, is displayed thickly (highlighted). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the left part 550L, which appears farther away than the right part 550R, thinner than the outline of the right part 550R, and
The outline of the right part 550R, which appears closer than 0L, is displayed thicker than the outline of the left part 550L.

Furthermore, when the left half of the symbol 551 is the left portion 551L and the right half of the symbol 551 is the right portion 551R, the gaming machine 10 makes the outline display of the left part 551L and the outline display of the right part 551R of standard thickness. (Standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline display of the left part 551L and the outline display of the right part 551R, which appear at approximately the same depth position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Furthermore, when the left half of the symbol 552 is defined as the left portion 552L, and the right half of the symbol 552 is defined as the right portion 552R, the gaming machine 10 thickens (emphasizes) the outline of the left portion 552L that appears to move in the approaching direction. ), and the outline of the right portion 552R, which appears to be moving away, is displayed in a thinner (non-emphasized, ambiguous) manner. In other words, the gaming machine 10 has a left portion 552L.
Displaying the outline of the right part 552R that looks farther away is thinner than the outline display of the left part 552L,
The outline of the left part 552L, which appears closer than the right part 552R, is displayed thicker than the outline of the right part 552R.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols. Note that the left or right part of the design may be uniformly highlighted or non-emphasized, but the degree of emphasis or non-emphasis may be varied depending on the distance from the vertical axis (center axis). You can do it like this. For example, when highlighting the outline display of the right part 550R of the symbol 550, the gaming machine 10 can make the outline display thicker (the rate of change or amount of change becomes larger) as the position is farther from the vertical axis (center axis). , when displaying the outline of the left part 550L of the pattern 550 in a non-highlighted manner, the outline can be made thinner (the rate of change or the amount of change becomes larger) as the position is farther from the vertical axis (center axis).

Next, as another example of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, switching of the outline display of a decorative pattern during temporary stop display by swinging in the left-right direction will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop mode of a decorative pattern according to a modification of the second embodiment.

This figure shows how "7" (pattern 537) of the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. 26(1) swings in the left-right direction and is temporarily stopped. The pattern 560 shows that the decorative pattern B "7" has been moved by a predetermined amount to the left from its normal position. The pattern 561 shows that "7" of the decorative pattern B is in the correct position. The pattern 562 shows that the decorative pattern B "7" has been moved by a predetermined amount to the right from its normal position. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display by switching from the symbol 560 to the symbol 562 via the symbol 561, and from the symbol 562 to the symbol 560 via the symbol 561.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the outline display, as shown in FIG. 26(2). In the gaming machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 560 is defined as a left section 560L, and the right half of the symbol 560 is defined as a right section 560R, the left section 560L appears to move away from the center of the display position (broken line shown). The outline of the right portion 560R, which appears to be moving in a direction approaching the center of the display position, is displayed thick (highlighted). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the left part 560L, which appears farther from the center of the display position than the right part 560R, thinner than the outline of the right part 560R, and the right part, which appears closer to the center of the display position than the left part 560L. The outline of the portion 560R is displayed thicker than the outline of the left portion 560L.

Furthermore, when the left half of the symbol 561 is the left portion 561L and the right half of the symbol 561 is the right portion 561R, the gaming machine 10 sets the outline display of the left portion 561L and the outline display of the right portion 561R to standard thickness. (Standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline display of the left part 561L and the outline display of the right part 561R, which appear at approximately the same position from the center of the display position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 562 is defined as a left portion 562L and the right half of the symbol 562 is defined as a right portion 562R, the left portion 562 appears to move in a direction approaching the center of the display position.
The outline of L is displayed thickly (highlighted), and the outline of right portion 562R, which appears to move away from the center of the display position, is displayed thinly (non-highlighted, ambiguous). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the right part 562R, which appears farther from the center of the display position than the left part 562L, thinner than the outline of the left part 562L, and the left part, which appears closer to the center of the display position than the right part 562R. The outline of the portion 562L is displayed thicker than the outline of the right portion 562R.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols. Note that the left or right part of the design may be uniformly highlighted or non-emphasized, but the degree of emphasis or non-emphasis may be varied depending on the distance from the vertical axis (center axis). You can do it like this. For example, when highlighting the outline display of the left part 560L of the symbol 560, the gaming machine 10 can make the outline display thicker as the position is farther from the vertical axis (center axis), and the outline display of the right part 560R of the symbol 560 can be made thicker. When displaying the outline in a non-highlighted manner, the farther from the vertical axis (center axis) the outline can be displayed.

Next, as another example of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the outline display switching target portion of the symbol will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of an outline display switching target portion during temporary stop display of a decorative pattern according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the gaming machine 10 can divide the symbol into a left half and a right half along the vertical center line, and use the two parts as switching target outline display parts. for example,
The pattern 570 shown in FIG. 27(1) is divided into a left part 570a and a right part 570b, and each of the left part 570a and the right part 570b is used as an outline display switching target part for highlighting and non-emphasizing the outline display. You can switch to

In addition, the gaming machine 10 uses a part on one side of the symbol (one side part) and a part on the other side (other side part) as target areas for switching the outline display of the symbol, and displays the remaining part as the outline of the symbol. It may not be the part to be switched. For example, in the pattern 571 shown in FIG. 27(2), one side part 571a and the other side part 571b are set, and the outline display is highlighted with each of the one side part 571a and the other side part 571b as the part to be changed to the outline display. and unhighlight.
Further, in the pattern 571 shown in FIG. 27(2), the remaining portions that are not set as the one side portion 571a and the other side portion 571b are not targeted for outline display switching.

Note that, although it is desirable that the one side portion and the other side portion of the symbol have a symmetrical positional relationship with respect to the center of the symbol, the positional relationship is not limited to this and may be any arbitrary positional relationship. In addition, it is desirable that one side part and the other side part of the symbol are set in relation to the swinging behavior of the symbol when the symbol is temporarily stopped, but they may be set in any positional relationship. It's okay.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be such that only a part of the symbol is the object of the outline display switching of the symbol, and the remaining part is not the object of the outline display of the symbol switching. For example, in Figure 27 (3
In the pattern 572 shown in ), a part 572a is set, and the outline display can be switched between highlighted display and non-highlighted display using the part 572a as the outline display switching target part. Further, in the pattern 572 shown in FIG. 27(3), the remaining portion that is not set as the portion 572a is not the outline display switching target portion.

Note that the outline display switching target portion of the symbol is not limited to one, but two, three or more may be set, and may be set in any positional relationship that contributes to the perception of the temporary stop display. It may be something that

The gaming machine 10 (including the modified example) of the second embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (for example, a display device) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game) in which symbols (for example, symbols 570, 571, 572) are displayed in a variable manner. 41), a first state in which the outline of the symbol is displayed at the first thickness (for example, standard thickness), and a first portion of the symbol (for example, the left portion 570a,
and control means for causing the display means to display the one side portion 571a and the one side portion 572a) with a second thickness thicker than the first thickness (for example, highlighted display) (see FIGS. 25 to 27).

(2) The control means in (1) controls the remaining second
The display means displays the portions (for example, the right portion 570b and the other side portion 571b) as a second state (for example, non-highlighted display) in which the third thickness is thinner than the first thickness (FIGS. 25 to 2
(see 7).

[Third embodiment]
In the explanation of the gaming machine of the first embodiment, it was explained as a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board 30, but in the third embodiment, it is explained as a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board 800 (see FIG. 28) which is different from the gaming board 30. . FIG. 28 is a front view showing an example of a game board according to the third embodiment. In addition, the first
Components similar to those in the embodiment may be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 800. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 800. In the game area 32, a center case (game presentation structure) 820 is arranged which is provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 approximately in the center. The display device 830 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 820 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 820. That is, center case 8
20 surrounds the display area of the display device 830, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 830, and is formed to make it difficult for game balls to jump in from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 830 is constituted by a device having a display screen capable of displaying a dot matrix using LEDs. Note that the display device 830 is, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), a CRT (
It may be constructed of a device having a display screen, such as a cathode ray tube. In the area (display area) where images can be displayed on the display screen, information related to the game is displayed, such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters that produce the special symbol variation display game, and background images that enhance the production effect. . On the display screen of the display device 830, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game is played. Furthermore, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, the upper part of the center case 820 is provided with a board performance device 44 that performs a game performance by operating. This board presentation device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 830 from the state shown in FIG.

On the lower right side of the center case 820 in the gaming area 32, a normal symbol starting gate (common symbol starting gate) 34 is provided which provides a starting condition for the common symbol variation display game. The game ball that has entered the normal pattern starting gate 34 (game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, the general winning hole 35 is arranged on the lower left side of the center case 820 in the gaming area 32, and the general winning hole 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 820 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 95, which will be described later. It is located. The game balls that entered these general prize openings 35 are
It is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, below the center case 820 in the game area 32, there is a starting prize opening 36 that forms a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that provides the starting conditions for the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). (starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the starting prize opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 29).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won the winning opening or the like.
In addition, at a lower position than the center case 820 and on the left side of the regular figure starting gate 34, there is a regular variable prize winning device 37 (which provides the starting conditions for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game)). A second starting prize opening, a starting winning area) are provided. The normal variable prize winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b at a position that is an inflow portion. The movable member 37b slides back and forth by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 29) to prevent the game balls from flowing into the inflow portion, and to move backward to prevent the game balls from flowing into the inflow portion. It is designed so that it can be changed to a permissible state that allows. The movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player). Then, when the result of the general figure variable display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the display is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). The winning game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is placed in the starting port 2 switch 37a (
(see FIG. 29). It should be noted that it is also possible to make it possible to win even when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, and to make it harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. Normal variable prize winning device 37
corresponds to ordinary electric accessories (common electricity).

In addition, on the right side of the center case 820 in the gaming area 32, there is a special figure fluctuation display game (
A special variable prize winning device (big prize opening 1) 38 is provided which can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. . The special variable prize winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (movable piece) 38c, and depending on the result of the special symbol variable display game as an auxiliary game, the opening/closing member 38c is in a closed state where the big prize opening is closed (disadvantageous for the player). The opening/closing member 38c retracts from the closed state (closed state) to convert it into an open state (advantageous state for the player) in which it can accept the game balls flowing down the gaming area 32. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a big winning hole (big winning hole 1) that is opened and closed by an opening/closing member 38c driven by a big winning hole 1 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 29) as a driving device,
During the jackpot game state (special game state) due to the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the jackpot game state (special game state) due to winning in the specific area 96 described later
Inside, by converting the grand prize opening from a closed state to an open state, it becomes easier for game balls to flow into the grand prize opening, and a predetermined gaming value (prize balls) is given to the player. ing. In addition, inside the big winning hole (winning area), a big winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the big winning hole. .

In addition, on the lower right side of the center case 820 in the gaming area 32, there is a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the results of the special figure variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game). A special variable winning device (big winning opening 2) 95 that can be converted into The special variable prize winning device 95 has an opening/closing member (opening/closing door) 95c, and depending on the result of the special symbol variable display game as an auxiliary game, the opening/closing member 95c is in a closed state where the big prize opening is closed (disadvantageous for the player). The opening/closing member 95c retreats from the closed state) to an open state (advantageous state for the player) in which it can accept the game balls flowing down the gaming area 32. That is, the special variable winning device 95 includes a large winning hole (big winning hole 2) that is opened and closed by an opening/closing member 95c driven by a large winning hole 2 solenoid 95b (see FIG. 29) serving as a driving device, and special winning hole 2. During the small winning game state based on the results of the display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the game ball is easily flowed into the grand prize opening by converting the grand prize opening from the closed state to the open state, and the game A predetermined gaming value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the big winning hole (winning area), a big winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the big winning hole. .

Further, the special variable winning device 95 includes a V flow path that guides the game balls that have won into the winning opening to a specific area 96. The special variable prize winning device 95 is provided with a specific area switch 95e (see FIG. 29) that detects game balls flowing into a specific area 96. Note that the specific area switch 95e
Detection of the game ball (winning in the specific area 96) is performed using the special variable winning device (big winning opening 1) 3.
This is one of the conditions for generating a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) in which the 8 is changed from a closed state to an open state.

Further, although the center case 820 does not include a warp flow path, it may be provided with a warp flow path. For example, a warp port (warp entrance) is provided on the left side of the center case 820, and game balls that flow into the warp flow path from the warp port are rolled on a stage inside the center case 820, and a part of them is sent to the warp exit. You may also provide guidance. In that case, the warp exit may be located directly above the starting winning hole 36, so that the game ball guided to the warp exit can easily win a prize in the starting winning hole 36.

In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the area to the left of the center case 820 is the left gaming area, and the area to the right of the center case 820 is the right gaming area in the gaming area 32 where the game ball flows down. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots the game ball to the left side gaming area (so-called left-handed hitting), aiming to win the starting prize opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (located in the left side gaming area). By firing the game ball into the right side gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting), the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38, 95 are activated.
, and the general winning slot 35 (located in the right side gaming area).

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 800), there are a first special pattern fluctuation display game, a second special pattern fluctuation display game, which constitute a special pattern fluctuation display game, and a map to the regular pattern starting gate 34. A collective display device 5 that displays a general pattern fluctuation display game triggered by winning a prize and displays various information.
0 is set.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display section 51 composed of LEDs etc., a special symbol 1 pending display section 52, a special symbol 1 symbol display section 53, a special symbol 2 symbol display section 54, and a general symbol symbol display section. 55, a general figure reservation display section 56, and a status display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

The gaming machine 10 includes a right-handed guide display device 91 on the right side near the special variable winning device (big winning hole 1) 38. The right-handed playing guidance display device 91 lights up when guiding the player to play right-handed, and turns off in other situations. Note that the right-handed play guide display device 91 is included in the board decoration device 46.

The gaming machine 10 includes a winning opportunity guidance display device 92 located above and near a special variable winning device (big winning opening 2) 95. The winning opportunity guide display device 92 guides the player to winning opportunities in a lighting manner. For example, the winning opportunity guidance display device 92 lights up the LED corresponding to the message "2 more chances" when there are two winning chances, and turns off the remaining lights. Furthermore, the winning opportunity guide display device 92 lights up the LED corresponding to the message "One more chance" when there is one winning chance, and turns off the remaining lights. The winning opportunity guidance display device 92 lights up the LED corresponding to the message "in bloom" during the winning period when there is a next winning chance and turns off the remaining lights. Note that the winning opportunity guide display device 92 is included in the board decoration device 46.

The gaming machine 10 includes a special figure game variable display state display device 98 at the lower right of the center case 50 in the gaming area 32. The special figure game variable display state display device 98 is a so-called fourth symbol display device, and is composed of two LEDs. The special figure game variable display state display device 98 displays the variable display state of the special figure 1 variable display game with the left LED, and displays the variable display state of the special figure 2 variable display game with the right LED. For example, the special symbol game variable display state display device 98 notifies the symbol stop state of the special symbol variable display game by lighting, and notifies the symbol variable state of the special symbol variable display game by blinking. The special figure game variable display state display device 98 is included in the board decoration device 46.

The gaming machine 10 has a general figure fluctuation display device 9 on the right side of the center case 50 in the gaming area 32.
3 and a general drawing reservation display device 94. The general figure fluctuation display device 93 is composed of two LEDs, and notifies the variable display state of the general figure game by blinking alternately, and notifies the variable display result of the general figure game by the combination mode of turning on or off. In addition, the general figure reservation display device 94 has two LEDs.
The number of reserved ordinary cards from 0 to 4 is notified by the combination of turning off, lighting, and blinking. Note that the ordinary figure fluctuation display device 93 and the ordinary figure pending display device 94 are included in the board decoration device 46.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be explained using FIG. 29. In addition, in the explanation of the gaming machine of the first embodiment, it was explained as a gaming machine equipped with the gaming control device 100, but the third embodiment is equipped with a gaming controlling device 100a (see FIG. 29) different from the gaming controlling device 100. This will be explained as a gaming machine. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Note that configurations similar to those in the first embodiment may be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100a, and the game control device 100a is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. a CPU section 110 having an input port, and an input section 120 having an input port.
, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 that connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36.
a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in the normal figure starting gate 34, winning port switch 35a, big winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, 95, special variable winning device 95 An interface chip (nearby) is connected to the specific region switch 38e of I/F) 121 is provided.

The output unit 130 also includes opening/closing data of the special variable winning hole 1 solenoid 38b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens and closes the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (big winning hole 1), and the opening/closing data of the special variable winning device 95 (big winning hole 1). Big winning opening 2 solenoid 9 that opens and closes the opening/closing member 95c of the winning opening 2)
A first output port 134a is provided for outputting opening/closing data of the normal variable winning device 5b, opening/closing data of the normal solenoid 37c that opens and closes the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and display data of the performance display device 135.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the gaming control device 100a will be explained using FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the third embodiment. The timer interrupt processing of the third embodiment includes step S830 between step S83 and step S84.
This is different from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment in that the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment is executed.

The control unit performs special figure 1 game processing (step S82) that performs processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, and special figure 2 game processing (step S82) that performs processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game.
83), a two-type game process (step S830) is executed to perform a process related to a so-called two-type game, and then a general pattern game process (step S84) is executed to perform a process related to a general pattern variable display game.

Next, the gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be explained using FIG. 31. Figure 3
1 is a diagram showing an example of gaming performance of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment. The gaming machine 10 has a so-called type 1 + type 2 game. The game feature called type 1 is such that a jackpot can be derived as a result of a random number lottery in a special figure game (variable display game), and the result of the random number lottery is announced by the fluctuating display of symbols. The game feature called 2nd type allows a jackpot to be derived by detecting winning in a specific area 96 at a predetermined timing.

Note that the gaming machine 10 is capable of executing a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game as special figure games. In the special figure 1 game, one variable display can be executed in response to one winning in the starting winning hole 36, and up to four (maximum pending number) of execution rights for the variable display can be stored. Special map 1
In the game, the jackpot probability is 1/199, the small probability is 0/199, and the remaining 198
/199 is taken as an outlier. In the special map 1 game, 1/3 of the jackpots will be supported by public electricity, and 2/3 of the jackpots will be without support.

In the special figure 2 game, it is possible to execute one variable display based on one winning in the normal variable winning device 37, and it is possible to store up to one variable display execution right (maximum number of reservations). . In the special figure 2 game, the jackpot probability is 1/199, the small hit probability is 198/199, and the loss is 0/199. Special figure 2 game is 1/3 of the jackpot (probability of support when hitting the jackpot)
It is assumed that there is Fuden support, and 2/3 of the jackpot (probability of no support at the time of jackpot) is assumed to be without Fuden support. Although the game machine 10 has the same jackpot probability for the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, they may be different.

Due to the nature of the game, type 2 games do not have settings for the maximum number of holds, jackpot probability, or small win probability.
In the 2nd type game, 1/3 of the jackpots are with power supply support, and 2/3 of the jackpots are without power supply support. In addition, although the game machine 10 has the same probability of having support at the time of a jackpot and the probability of no support at the time of a jackpot for the special map 1 game, the special map 2 game, and the type 2 game, they may be different for all games. However, it may be different for some games.

Next, the game performance of the gaming machine 10 having such gaming performance will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the gaming state transition of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 can be controlled by switching between a support state where there is general power support and a no support state where there is no general power support. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can control the lottery probability of the special symbol game by fixing it to a low probability. In other words, the gaming machine 10 is in a "no support/low certainty" state where there is no support for regular electricity and the lottery probability of the special symbol game is low, and a state where there is regular electricity support and the lottery probability of the special symbol game is low. Control can be performed by switching between a certain "supported/low certainty" state.

The "no support/low probability" state includes a "normal mode" and a "chance mode." The "normal mode" in the "no support/low certainty" state is a gaming state in which the special map 1 game is executed. "
The "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 game is executed. The “with support/low certainty” state includes “normal mode”. The "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game is executed.

In the gaming machine 10, the "normal mode" in the "no support/low certainty" state is the initial state when the player starts playing the game. The gaming machine 10 transits from the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state to the "with support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition A" is established. The transition condition "state transition A" is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 1 game. Note that the gaming machine 10 remains in the "no support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition B" is satisfied from the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state. Transition condition “state transition B
” is the end of the no-support jackpot derived in the special map 1 game.

The gaming machine 10 remains in the "support available/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition C" is satisfied from the "normal mode" in the "support available/low probability" state. Transition condition “state transition C”
is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game (including the 2nd type game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). The gaming machine 10 transits from the "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state to the "no support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition D" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition D" is the end of general electricity support.

Fuden Support has set the termination condition to be the end of one execution of the variable display in the special map 2 game (condition 1)
shall be. In addition to Condition 1, Fuden Support also applies N times of fluctuation display in the special map 1 game (
For example, the end condition (condition 2) is the end of execution (4 times, which is greater than the end condition in the special figure 2 game). Furthermore, in addition to Conditions 1 and 2, Fuden Support sets one occurrence of a small win as an end condition (Condition 3).
In addition, when a jackpot without support is derived in a special map 2 game (including a 2-type game that is executed in relation to the result of the special map 2 game), the end of the support-free jackpot is determined by the transition condition "state transition D".
” is established.

The gaming machine 10 transitions from the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state to the "with support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition E" is established. The transition condition "state transition E" is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 2 game (including the 2-type game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). Note that the gaming machine 10 remains in the "no support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition F" is satisfied from the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state. However, the "chance mode" becomes the "normal mode" when the transition condition "state transition F" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition F" is the end of the unsupported jackpot derived in the special figure 2 game (including the 2-type game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).

The game progress in such a gaming machine 10 will be explained using FIG. 33. Figure 33 shows
FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Game machine 1
0 can be expected to win in the starting winning slot 36 in the "no support/low probability" state, but cannot expect to win in the normal variable winning device 37, so it guides the game progress with left-handed games instead of right-handed games. do. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, in the "no support/low probability" state, it is possible to expect that special drawing 1 will be held, but it cannot be expected that special drawing 2 will be held. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 is
It is usually the "normal mode" in which the variable display of the special map 1 game is executed in the "no support/low accuracy" state.

Sequence 1 indicates that the game state is "Jackpot (with general electricity support)" derived as a result of the variable display in the special figure 1 game. Game status: “Jackpot (with electric power support)”
is in the jackpot operation, general power support is "none", probability fluctuation is "low probability", and the number of special drawings 1 pending is "
4", and the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "0". The gaming state ``Jackpot (with electric power support)'' becomes ``with electric power support'' after the jackpot ends. The gaming machine 10 guides the game progress in a right-handed game since a winning can be expected in the special variable winning device (big winning opening 1) 38 during a jackpot. In addition, the gaming machine 10 guides the game progress in a right-handed game since a winning can be expected in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "with support/low probability" state after the end of the jackpot.

Sequence 2 shows the game state "special pattern 1 symbol variation" after the end of the jackpot. The gaming machine 10 is
The special map 2 game is executed in priority to the special map 1 game, but since the number of special map 2 reservations is still "0", the number of special map 1 reservations "4" is changed to "3" and the special map 1 game is executed. Execute.

Sequence 3 indicates the game state "Special figure 1 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 changes the special figure 2 pending number "0" to "1" when a winning occurs in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special figure 1 game. In addition, even if two or more winnings occur in the normal variable winning device 37, the gaming machine 10 does not play the special drawing 2.
According to the maximum number of reservations, the upper limit of the number of reservations for special drawing 2 is "1".

Sequence 4 indicates the game state "Special figure 1 symbol stopped (missing)". Sequence 5 shows the game state "Special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the gaming machine 10 has a special drawing 2 reservation number of “1”,
The special figure 2 reservation number "1" is set to "0" and the special figure 2 game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 6 shows the game state "Special figure 2 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 changes the special figure 2 pending number ``0'' to ``1'' when a winning occurs in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special figure 2 game.

Sequence 7 indicates the game state "Special figure 2 symbol stop (small hit/jackpot)". Game machine 10
If a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display in the special figure 2 game, it will directly shift to the jackpot operation (type 1 game jackpot operation), and if a small hit is derived as a result of the variable display in the special figure 2 game, it will be special. The variable winning device (big winning opening 2) 95 is opened, and a transition is made to a jackpot operation (second type game jackpot operation) with winning in the specific area 96 as a condition (second type game).

Sequence 8 indicates that the game state is "Jackpot (no public power support)" derived as a result of the special map 2 game (including the 2nd type game executed in relation to the result of the special map 2 game). . The gaming state "Jackpot (No public power support)" means that the jackpot is in operation, public power support is "None", probability fluctuation is "low probability", number of special drawings 1 pending is "3", number of special drawings 2 pending is "1" It is. After the jackpot ends, the gaming state "Jackpot (No power supply support)" continues to become "No power supply support." In the gaming machine 10, in the "no support/low probability" state, you cannot expect to win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37, but there is an opportunity to execute the special map 2 game (the number of reservations for the special chart 2 is "1"), and the special chart 2 Since the occurrence of a jackpot can be expected as a result of the game (including the 2nd type game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

Sequence 9 shows the game state "Special figure 2 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 has the number of reserved special drawings 2 “
1", so the special map 2 reservation number "1" is set to "0" and the special map 2 game is given priority over the special map 1 game.
Run the game.

Sequence 10 indicates the game state "Special 2 symbols stop (small hit/big hit)". Game machine 1
0, if a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display in the special figure 2 game, it will directly shift to the jackpot operation (type 1 game jackpot operation), and if a small hit is derived as the result of the variable display in the special figure 2 game, The special variable winning device (big winning opening 2) 95 is opened, and a transition to a jackpot operation (second type game jackpot operation) is made with winning in the specific area 96 as a condition (second type game).

Sequence 11 indicates that the game state is "Jackpot (no public power support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the 2nd type game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). . The gaming state "Jackpot (No public power support)" means that the jackpot is in operation, public power support is "None", probability fluctuation is "low probability", number of special drawings 1 pending is "3", number of special drawings 2 pending is "0" It is. After the jackpot ends, the gaming state "Jackpot (No power supply support)" continues to become "No power supply support." In the "no support/low probability" state, the gaming machine 10 cannot expect to win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37, and there is no opportunity to play the special chart 2 game (the number of special drawings 2 pending is "0"), and the special drawing 2 game cannot be expected to win. Since the occurrence of a jackpot cannot be expected as a result of the game (including the 2nd type game executed in connection with the result of the special figure 2 game), the game progress by the left-handed game is guided.

Sequence 12 shows the game state "special pattern 1 symbol variation" after the end of the jackpot. The gaming machine 10 executes the special map 2 game with priority over the special map 1 game, but since the number of special map 2 reservations is "0", the special map 1 reservation number "3" is changed to "2". Figure 1: Run the game. After this, the gaming machine 10 proceeds with the game by executing the special figure 1 game unless a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display in the special figure 1 game.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 has a gaming feature in which when a jackpot (with general power support) is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game, two more jackpot opportunities are obtained. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 derives a further jackpot (with general electricity support) out of the remaining two jackpot chances, it obtains two more jackpot chances from the jackpot.

Here, in the case where a further jackpot (with Fuden support) is derived from the next two jackpot occurrence opportunities, the game progresses as if the jackpot without Fuden support in sequence 11 was with Fuden support. This will be explained using FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Sequence 11a is the game state "Small hit/Jackpot (with public power support)" derived as a result of the special map 2 game (including the 2nd type game executed in relation to the result of the special map 2 game).
. Game state "Small hit / Jackpot (with public power support)" means that the jackpot is in operation, public power support is "none", probability fluctuation is "low probability", number of special drawings 1 reserved is "3", number of special symbols 2 reservation is It is "0". The gaming state ``Jackpot (with electric power support)'' becomes ``with electric power support'' after the jackpot ends. The gaming machine 10 operates a special variable winning device (big winning opening 1) during a jackpot.
) Since you can expect to win a prize in 38, we will guide you through the game with the right-handed game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 guides the game progress in a right-handed game since a winning can be expected in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "with support/low probability" state after the end of the jackpot.

Sequence 12a shows the game state "special pattern 1 symbol variation" after the end of the jackpot. Game machine 10
executes the Tokuzu 2 game in priority to the Tokuzu 1 game, but since the number of Tokuzu 2 reservations is still "0", the Tokuzu 1 reservation number "3" is changed to "2" and the Tokuzu 1 Run the game.

Sequence 13a shows the game state "Special figure 1 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 changes the number of reserved special drawings 2 from ``0'' to ``1'' when a winning occurs in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special drawing 1 game.
”.

Sequence 14a shows the game state "Special figure 1 symbol stopped (missing)". sequence 15
A indicates the game state "Special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the number of reserved special figures 2 is "1", the gaming machine 10 sets the number of reserved special figures 2 "1" to "0" and executes the special figure 2 game in priority to the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 16a shows the game state "Special figure 2 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 changes the number of reserved special drawings 2 from "0" to "1" when a winning occurs in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special drawings 2 game.
”.

Sequence 17a shows the game state "Special 2 symbols stop (small hit/big hit)". When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot as a result of the variable display in the special figure 2 game, it directly shifts to the jackpot operation (type 1 game jackpot operation), and when it derives a small hit as a result of the variable display in the special figure 2 game. , the special variable prize winning device (big prize opening 2) 95 is opened, and the specific area 96 is opened.
The game shifts to a jackpot operation (type 2 game jackpot operation) with the condition of winning the prize (type 2 game).

Sequence 18a is the game state "Small hit/Jackpot (no public power support)" derived as a result of the special map 2 game (including the 2nd type game executed in relation to the result of the special map 2 game).
. The gaming state "Small hit / Jackpot (no public power support)" means that the jackpot is in operation, public power support is "none", probability fluctuation is "low probability", number of reserved special drawings 1 is "2", number of reserved special drawings 2 is It is "1". After the jackpot ends, the gaming state "Jackpot (No power supply support)" continues to become "No power supply support." The gaming machine 10 cannot expect to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support/low probability" state, but the opportunity to execute the special drawing 2 game (the number of reserved special drawings 2 "1")
''), and since a jackpot can be expected to occur as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the 2-type game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

Sequence 19a shows the game state "Special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the number of reserved special figures 2 is "1", the gaming machine 10 sets the number of reserved special figures 2 "1" to "0" and executes the special figure 2 game in priority to the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 20a shows the game state "Special 2 symbols stop (small hit/big hit)". When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot as a result of the variable display in the special figure 2 game, it directly shifts to the jackpot operation (type 1 game jackpot operation), and when it derives a small hit as a result of the variable display in the special figure 2 game. , the special variable prize winning device (big prize opening 2) 95 is opened, and the specific area 96 is opened.
The game shifts to a jackpot operation (type 2 game jackpot operation) with the condition of winning the prize (type 2 game).

Sequence 21a is the game state "Small hit/Jackpot (with public power support)" derived as a result of the special map 2 game (including the 2nd type game executed in relation to the result of the special map 2 game).
. Game status "Small hit / Jackpot (with public power support)" means that the jackpot is in operation, public power support is "none", probability fluctuation is "low probability", number of reserved special drawings 1 is "2", number of reserved special drawings 2 is It is "0". The gaming state ``Jackpot (with electric power support)'' becomes ``with electric power support'' after the jackpot ends. The gaming machine 10 guides the progress of the game in a right-handed game since a winning can be expected in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "with support/low probability" state.

Sequence 22a shows the game state "special pattern 1 symbol variation" after the end of the jackpot. Game machine 10
executes the special map 2 game in priority to the special map 1 game, but since the number of special map 2 reservations is "0", the number of special map 1 reservations "2" is changed to "1" and the special map 1 game is executed. Execute. After this, gaming machine 10
Unless a jackpot is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game, the game progresses by executing the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 23a shows the game state "Special figure 1 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 changes the number of reserved special drawings 2 from ``0'' to ``1'' when a winning occurs in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special drawing 1 game.
”.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a gaming feature in which it is possible to obtain a large number of jackpot occurrence opportunities by repeating the next two jackpot occurrence opportunities. At this time, the number of reserved special drawings 1 can be gradually decreased by repeatedly obtaining opportunities to generate jackpots. However, the number of special drawings 1 reserved is the starting prize opening 3
If there is a win in 6, the number can increase, but while the chance of winning a jackpot can be repeated, since the gaming machine 10 guides the game progress in a right-handed game, there is an opportunity to win in the starting prize opening 36 like a left-handed game. I can't expect that.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 that has had many opportunities to hit the jackpot, as shown in sequence m,
The number of special figure 1 reservations can converge to "0". Even in such a case, as shown in sequence m+1, it is possible to continue to generate a large number of jackpots while obtaining the opportunity to generate the number of reserved special drawings 2.

In addition, after the number of special drawings 1 reserved is "0", as shown in the sequence n to n+1, the jackpot continues to occur many times while obtaining the opportunity to generate the number of special drawings 2 without any change in the special drawing 1 symbol. can do.

Of the sequences shown in FIG. 33, sequence 12 corresponds to the "normal mode" in the "no support/low certainty" state shown in FIG. 32, and sequences 2 to 7 correspond to the "no support" state shown in FIG. This corresponds to the "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state, and sequences 9 and 10 correspond to the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state shown in FIG.

Also, among the sequences shown in FIG. 34, sequences 12a to 17a, 22a, 23
Sequences a, m, m+1, n to n+3 correspond to the "normal mode" in the "with support/low certainty" state shown in FIG. ”
Corresponds to "chance mode" in the state.

Next, the variable display pattern selection for the special figure 2 game will be explained using FIG. 35. Figure 35
This is a diagram showing an example of a variable display pattern selection table of the special figure 2 game of the third embodiment.

The special figure 2 game prepares a variable display pattern pt1 with a time value of 10,000 ms (variable time), a variable display pattern pt2 with a time value of 20,000 ms, a variable display pattern pt3 with a time value of 30,000 ms, and a variable display pattern pt4 with a time value of 50,000 ms. That is,
The fluctuation time increases in the order of fluctuation display patterns pt1, pt2, pt3, and pt4.

The gaming machine 10 refers to the total value of the number of reserved special figures 1 and the number of reserved special figures 2 in selecting the variable display pattern of the special figure 2 game. If the total value of the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 2 or less,
The variable display pattern pt1 is selected with probability pr1, and the variable display pattern pt2 is selected with probability pr1.
The variable display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr3 smaller than the probability pr2, and the variable display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr4 smaller than the probability pr3. Furthermore, when the total value of the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 3 or more, the variable display pattern pt1 is selected with a probability pr5, and the variable display pattern pt2 is selected with a probability p that is greater than the probability pr5.
The variable display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr7 greater than the probability pr6, and the variable display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr8 greater than the probability pr7.

As explained using FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, in the gaming machine 10, the number of reserved special drawings 2 can only take a value of "0" or "1", and the number of reserved special drawings 1 can only take a value of "0" or "1". It gradually decreases and converges to "0". That is, as for the total value of the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2, the larger the value, the higher the probability that the number of jackpot occurrences will be small, and the smaller the value, the higher the probability that the number of jackpot occurrences will be large.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 makes it easier for the player to select a variable display pattern with a longer variation time when the player is still feeling excited after winning the first time, thereby securing time for executing a highly interesting performance. gender. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 has a gaming feature that ensures rapid game progress by making it easier for the player to select a variable display pattern with a shorter variation time during a period when the player has repeatedly won the jackpot many times since the first time. shall be.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can appropriately divide execution of highly interesting performances and rapid game progress according to the timing. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can both suppress a decline in the desire to play when a large number of jackpot opportunities occur and increase interest through various performances.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 differs in the selection probability of the variable display pattern when the total value of the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 2 or less and when it is 3 or more. The larger the total value of the number of reserved special figures 2, the easier it is to select a variable display pattern with a longer variation time. It is not limited to this as long as it is easily selected.

Note that the ease with which a fluctuation display pattern with a small fluctuation time is selected or the ease with which a fluctuation display pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected can be defined by comparing the expected values of the fluctuation times.

In addition, when selecting the variable display pattern of the special figure 1 game, the gaming machine 10 refers only to the number of special figure 1 reservations, and the larger the number of special figure 1 reserves, the easier it is to select a variable display pattern with a smaller fluctuation time. .

Note that the gaming machine 10 performs four temporary stop displays due to four pseudo fluctuations and one actual stop display in the fluctuation display pattern pt1 with a time value of 10,000 ms, and the time value is 20,000 m.
In the variable display pattern pt2 of s, 14 temporary stop displays due to 14 pseudo fluctuations and one actual stop display are performed, and in the variable display pattern pt3 with a time value of 30000 ms, 2
The temporary stop display is performed 24 times due to four pseudo fluctuations and the actual stop display is performed once, and the time value is 50.
In the fluctuation display pattern pt4 of 000 ms, 34 temporary stop displays due to 34 pseudo fluctuations and 1 actual stop display are performed. The gaming machine 10 creates a sense of anticipation in the main stop display by the number of times a specific symbol (for example, symbol "3" and symbol "7") appears in the temporary stop display in each variable display pattern. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the greater the number of appearances of the symbol "3" and the symbol "7" in the temporary stop display in each variable display pattern, the more likely the combination of the symbol "3" will be a jackpot or the combination of the symbol "7" will be a jackpot. Create a sense of anticipation for winning the jackpot. In addition, the gaming machine 10
The expectation may be changed depending on the appearance position or display mode of a specific symbol (for example, a missing display, etc., which will be described later).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 considers a jackpot with a combination of symbols "3" and "7" as a jackpot (with Fuden support), and a jackpot with other symbol combinations as a jackpot (with Fuden support). (None) to create a sense of expectation. Note that the gaming machine 10 has a collective display device 50.
As long as it is possible to distinguish between a jackpot and a small win on the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, the same symbol combination may represent a jackpot and a small win in the decorative symbols.

Next, an overview of the display device 830 will be described using FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of the appearance of a display device according to the third embodiment. The display device 830 is located in the center case 820
It is provided in a concave chamber formed by a symbol display area 700, a reservation display area 701, and decoration display areas 702, 703.

The symbol display area 700 is located at the center of the display device 830. The symbol display area 700 is
It is possible to display the symbols in the special game. The symbol display area 700 can notify the occurrence of a hit or the like by a message, and has a message display area in addition to the symbol display area. In addition, the pattern display area 700 can display decorations such as a cherry blossom blizzard,
In addition to the aspect of the symbol display area, it has the aspect of the decoration display area. Details of the symbol display area 700 will be explained later using FIG. 37.

The pending display area 701 is located adjacent to the symbol display area 700 and below the symbol display area 700. The hold display area 701 can display a hold display in the special figure game. In addition,
The hold display area 701 is capable of displaying decorations such as a blizzard of cherry blossoms, and has an aspect called a decoration display area in addition to a side called a hold display area. Details of the hold display area 701 will be explained later using FIG. 39.

The decoration display area 702 is located adjacent to the hold display area 701 and below the hold display area 701. The decoration display area 702 can display decorations such as cherry blossoms and snowflakes. Decoration display area 703
is located adjacent to the symbol display area 700 and above the symbol display area 700. The decoration display area 703 can display decorations such as cherry blossoms and snowflakes. The decoration display areas 702 and 703 can perform decoration display in cooperation with the symbol display area 700 and the hold display area 701.

Next, the outline of the symbol display area 700 will be explained using FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the symbol display area of the third embodiment. In the symbol display area 700, a left symbol area 704, a middle symbol display area 705, and a right symbol display area 706 are arranged in the horizontal direction. The symbol display area 700 displays a symbol "7" in the left symbol region 704 and a symbol "7" in the middle symbol display region 705.
7” is displayed, and the symbol “7” is displayed in the right symbol display area 706.

In the left symbol region 704, the middle symbol display region 705, and the right symbol display region 706, segment display portions 707 and 708, each of which can independently control light emission, are arranged in a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. Note that the segment display sections 707 and 708 each have a shape like a cherry blossom petal, and can be lit in a cherry blossom color by controlling the light emission of the LED. The segment display portion 707 has a petal shape with its end facing toward the lower left, and the segment display portion 708 has a petal shape with its end facing toward the upper right. The left symbol area 704, middle symbol display area 705, and right symbol display area 706 are, respectively,
Segment display portions 707 and segment display portions 708 are arranged alternately in each of the row and column directions.

Next, the symbols of the special figure game that the gaming machine 10 displays in the symbol display area 700 will be explained using FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of symbols displayed in the symbol display area in the special pattern game of the third embodiment.

The symbol 711 indicates the symbol “1” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700.
The symbol 712 indicates the symbol “2” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 713 indicates the symbol “3” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 714 indicates the symbol “4” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. Pattern 7
15 indicates a symbol “5” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. Pattern 71
6 indicates a symbol “6” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. Pattern 717
indicates the symbol “7” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 718 indicates the symbol “8” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The pattern 719 is
The symbol “9” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700 is shown. The symbol 720 indicates the symbol “0” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 721 indicates the symbol “cherry blossom” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 722 indicates a symbol “flower” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 723 indicates a symbol "treasure" of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 724 indicates the symbol "moon" of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 725 indicates a symbol “light” of the special pattern game displayed in the symbol display area 700.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 is capable of displaying 15 types of symbols of the special pattern game in the symbol display area 700. These 15 kinds of symbols have different display modes so that they can be distinguished from other symbols even if the lighting mode of any one of the segment display sections 707 and 708 is different.

For example, when displaying a symbol on a 7-segment display that has 7 segments from the a segment to the g segment, the symbol "8" is displayed by lighting up all segments from the a segment to the g segment.
", and the symbol "0" can be represented by lighting from the a segment to the f segment, excluding the g segment (center horizontal), and the symbol "0" can be expressed by lighting up the a segment to the d segment, and the f segment, excluding the e segment (lower left vertical). , the symbol "9" can be represented by lighting up the g segments. On the other hand, if the e-segment is also used for decoration and is turned on or off in different ways, the distinctiveness of the design will be lost. However, the 15 displayed in the symbol display area 700
The seed design has a configuration in which one of the segment display parts 707 and 708 is lit in a different manner for decoration purposes, so that the identification ability is not lost. Among the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the most similar symbols are the symbol "8" and the symbol "0", and the specific five lighting modes of the segment display areas 707 and 708 are the symbol "8". ” and the pattern “
The difference is 0. Therefore, the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700 have a structure that does not easily lose their distinctiveness as symbols just by changing the lighting mode of some of the segment display sections, such as the 7-segment display section. There is.

Note that among the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the symbol "3" and the symbol "
7" is a specific symbol that results in a jackpot (with general electricity support) when a combination of symbols of the same type is used. In addition, among the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the symbols other than symbol "3" and symbol "7" are non-specific symbols that result in a jackpot (no general electricity support) when the same type of symbols are combined. .

Next, an overview of the hold display area 701 will be described using FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of the hold display area according to the third embodiment. The hold display area 701 includes a 1st hold display area 731 that can display a 1st hold display, a 2nd hold display area 732 that can display a 2nd hold display, and a 3rd hold display area that can display a 3rd hold display. It includes a number pending display section 733, a fourth pending display section 734 capable of displaying a fourth pending display, and decoration display sections 735, 736, and 737.

The No. 1 pending display section 731, the No. 2 pending display section 732, the No. 3 pending display section 733, and the No. 4 pending display section 734 are each centered around one flower core-shaped segment display section 731a and the segment display section 731a. It includes five petal-shaped segment display portions 731b arranged. The segment display section 731a and the segment display section 731b can be lit in cherry blossom color by controlling the light emission of the LEDs, and can each be controlled to emit light independently.

The hold display area 701 can display the special figure 1 game on hold or the special figure 2 game on hold depending on the gaming state. In addition, since the maximum number of reservations for the special map 1 game is "4", the reservation display area 701 displays the number 1 reservation display area 731, the number 2 reservation display area 732, and the number 3 reservation display when displaying the reservation of the special map 1 game. 733 and the No. 4 pending display section 734 are used to display the hold, but since the maximum number of holds for the special drawing 2 game is "1", only the No. 1 holding display section 731 is used to display the holding of the special drawing 2 game. Use to display a hold.

The decorative display parts 735, 736, and 737 are each shaped like a cherry blossom petal, and are equipped with LEDs.
It can be lit in a cherry blossom color using the light emission control. Decorative display areas 735, 736, and 737 each have a petal shape with their ends oriented in random directions, and are responsible for displaying the decoration of the hold display area 701, as well as cooperating with the pattern display area 700 and the decoration display areas 702, 703. Decorative display can be performed.

Next, the generation animation of a hold display that is performed when a hold memory occurs will be explained using FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of an animation in which a hold display occurs according to the third embodiment.

The first pending display section 731, the second pending display section 732, the third pending display section 733, and the fourth pending display section 734 sequentially switch the display states of the corresponding pending display sections using a predetermined time when a pending storage occurs. Performs an animation of the occurrence of a pending display.

The pending display section corresponding to the occurrence of pending storage changes the display state 738 to the initial state and the display state 739.
The display states are sequentially switched, with the display state 790 being an intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 790 being the final state following the display state 739.

The display state 738 is a display state (initial display state) in which the segment display section 731a and the segment display section 731b are turned off. The display state 739 is a display state (intermediate display state) in which the segment display section 731a is turned on and the segment display section 731b is turned off. The display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display section 731a and the segment display section 731b are lit.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform a display of a pending display when a pending storage occurs. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 not only clearly indicates to the player that the pending memory has occurred, but also aims to increase interest in the occurrence of the pending memory.

Next, as one of the display effects using the symbols of the special figure game displayed in the symbol display area 700, a symbol missing effect that can be executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. 41 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a symbol missing effect according to the third embodiment. Figure 42
FIG. 2 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a symbol loss effect according to the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a symbol missing effect according to the third embodiment.

The symbol missing effect is a display effect in which a part of the symbol of the special pattern game is displayed as being missing. As described above, the 15 types of symbols of the special pattern game have different display modes so that they can be distinguished from other symbols even if the lighting mode of any one of the segment display sections 707 and 708 is different. Note that the 15 types of symbols in the special figure game can be distinguished from other symbols even if any two of the segment display areas 707 and 708 have different lighting modes, and depending on the position, three or more lighting modes may be displayed. Even if they are different, they can be easily distinguished from other designs.

The symbol missing effect can give a sense of surprise to the player and can arouse attention to the symbols. Furthermore, compared to separately displaying decorative elements such as characters, the design missing effect does not require an excessive amount of display data to be prepared, and the burden of display control is light.

The symbol 713 shown in FIG. 41(1) is a display state in which there is no partial loss in symbol "3" of the special symbol game. The symbol 713 is suitable as a symbol "3" because all of the segment display sections 707 and 708 in the positions that should be lit are lit and all the segment display sections 707 and 708 that are in the positions that should be extinguished are turned off. Have discernment.

The symbol 713a shown in FIG. 41(2) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special pattern game is missing. The symbol 713a is the segment display section 707 in the position where it should be lit.
, 708 except for the segment display section 741 are turned on, and all of the segment display sections 707 and 708 at positions where they should be turned off are turned off. The segment display section 741 displays the pattern “
By extinguishing the light where it should be lit as "3", a partially missing display as the symbol "3" is produced. Although the pattern 713a has some defects as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishability as the pattern "3".

The symbol 713b shown in FIG. 41(3) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special pattern game is missing. The symbol 713b is the segment display section 707 in the position where it should be lit.
, 708 except for the segment display section 743 are turned on, and all of the segment display sections 707 and 708 at positions where they should be turned off are turned off. The segment display section 743 displays the pattern “
By extinguishing the light where it should be lit as "3", a partially missing display as the symbol "3" is produced. Although the pattern 713b has some defects as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishability as the pattern "3".

As shown in the symbols 713a and 713b, the gaming machine 10 can produce a partially missing display with different partially missing positions. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may create a sense of anticipation for the game depending on where the partially missing position is located. For example, the gaming machine 10 has 1
In a matrix arrangement of 0 rows and 7 columns, the more the missing position is located in the upper left, the higher the sense of expectation is produced, and the further the position is located in the lower right, the lower the sense of expectation may be produced. A variety of expectations regarding the game can be created, such as expectations for winning, expectations for the allocation of whether or not there will be general electricity support, expectations for reach performance, and the like.

The symbol 713c shown in FIG. 41(4) is a display state in which a plurality (for example, two) of symbols "3" of the special pattern game are partially missing. In the symbol 713c, all of the segment display parts 707, 708 at positions where they should be lit, except for the segment display parts 744, 745, are lit up, and all of the segment display parts 707, 708, which are at positions where they should be turned off, are turned off. The segment display portions 744 and 745 produce a partially missing display as the symbol "3" by turning off the light at a portion that should be lit as the symbol "3". Although the pattern 713c has some defects as a pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishability as a pattern "3".

As shown in the symbol 713c, the gaming machine 10 can produce a partially missing display with a different number of partially missing pieces. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may create a sense of anticipation for the game depending on the number of partial losses. For example, the gaming machine 10 may create a higher sense of expectation as the number of losses increases in a matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns, and create a sense of lower expectation as the number of losses decreases.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may create a sense of anticipation for the game based not only on the number of partial defects but also on the location of the partial defects. For example, in a matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns, the gaming machine 10 is arranged such that the more concentrated the defects are in a specific position, the higher the expectation is created, and the more scattered the defects are, the lower the expectation is created. You can also do this.

The pattern 713d shown in FIG. 41(5) is a display mode that is a modification of the third embodiment,
The segment display portions 744 and 745 are displayed in one of two states: a transparent state and an opaque state (cherry blossom color). The pattern 713d is a display mode that can be realized by using a transflective LCD display device or an LCD display device in place of the display device 830. The pattern 713d is arranged in front of the background display 746, and the background display 746 is made visible from the segment display sections 744 and 745 that are in a transparent state.

The symbol 713d is a display state in which there is no partial loss in symbol "3" of the special symbol game. The pattern 713d is the segment display portions 707 and 70 in positions that should be in an opaque state (cherry blossom color).
8 becomes opaque (cherry blossom color), and all of the segment display parts 707 and 708 in positions that should be transparent become transparent, so that the background display 746 is displayed transparently while the symbol "3" is displayed. Have good discernment.

The symbol 713e shown in FIG. 41(6) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" (design 713d) of the special pattern game is missing. The pattern 713e is a segment display part 707, 708 that is in a position that should be in an opaque state (cherry blossom color), except for the segment display part 747, which is in an opaque state (cherry blossom color), and a segment display in a position that should be in a transparent state. Section 707
, 708 are all in a transparent state. The segment display section 747 creates a partially missing display as the symbol "3" by making the part that should be in an opaque state (cherry blossom color) as the symbol "3" in a transparent state. The pattern 713e is a pattern “3” although there is a part missing as a pattern “3”
have sufficient discernment. Further, the pattern 713e expands the visibility range of the background display 746 through a partial loss of the pattern "3". Note that the symbol 713e may also have different positions and numbers of missing portions to create a sense of anticipation for the game. Further, the symbol 713e may create a sense of anticipation for the game by the display mode of the background display 746 viewed from the partially missing position. In such a case, the display mode of the background display 746 may be fixed or may change.

The pattern 713d shown in FIG. 41(5) is displayed when the segment display parts 744 and 745 are in one of three states: a transparent state, an opaque state (white), and an opaque state (cherry blossom color). It may be. The symbol 713f shown in FIG. 41 (7) is the symbol “3” of the special game.
” (pattern 713d) is in a display state where one part is missing. In the pattern 713f, all of the segment display parts 707 and 708, except for the segment display part 748, which are in positions that should be in an opaque state (cherry blossom color) are in an opaque state (cherry blossom color), and the segment display parts are in a position where they should be in a transparent state. All portions 707 and 708 become transparent. Segment display section 748
The part that should be in an opaque state (cherry blossom color) as a symbol "3" becomes an opaque state (white), thereby producing a partially missing display as a symbol "3". Although the pattern 713f has some defects as a pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishability as a pattern "3". Also, pattern 713f
This makes it easy to distinguish between the partial loss of the symbol "3" and the background display 746. In addition, the pattern 713f
Also, the position and number of partial defects may be varied to create a sense of anticipation for the game. Also,
In the case where there are two or more defects, the pattern 713f may include a mixture of defects due to an opaque state (white) and defects due to a transparent state. In such a case, the symbol 713f may create a sense of anticipation for the game by varying the mixed states of defects due to the opaque state (white) and defects due to the transparent state.

The symbol 713g shown in FIG. 41(8) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special pattern game is missing. In the pattern 713g, all of the segment display parts 707, 708 in positions where they should be lit in cherry blossom color, except for segment display part 749, are lit up in cherry color, and all of the segment display parts 707, 708 in positions where they should be turned off are turned off. . Segment display section 74
9 flashes in cherry blossom color where the symbol should be lit in cherry blossom color as symbol "3", thereby producing a partially missing display as symbol "3". Although the pattern 713g has some defects as a pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishability as a pattern "3". In addition, the segment display section 749 has a pattern "
Although it is assumed that the part that should be lit up in cherry blossom color as "3" flashes in cherry blossom color, it may be possible to create a partial defect as pattern "3" by flashing or lighting in a color different from cherry blossom color. In such a case, the symbol 713g may create a sense of anticipation for the game by changing the blinking mode (blinking pattern, period, etc.) or lighting color. Further, the symbol 713g may create a sense of anticipation for the game by combining the defect position and the number of defects in addition to the blinking mode and lighting color.

The symbol 713h shown in FIG. 42(1) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special pattern game is missing. The symbol 713h is the segment display section 707 in the position where it should be lit.
, 708 are all turned on, and all of the segment display sections 707 and 708, which are in positions that should be turned off, except for the segment display section 750 are turned off. The segment display section 750 displays the pattern “
By lighting up the part that should be turned off as "3", a partially missing display (margin missing display, base missing display) as the pattern "3" is produced. Although the pattern 713h has some defects as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishability as the pattern "3". According to another viewpoint, the symbol 713h has sufficient distinguishability as a symbol "3", although there is a partial redundant display as a symbol "3".

The symbol 713i shown in FIG. 42(2) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special pattern game is missing. In the pattern 713i, all of the segment display parts 707 and 708 in the position where they should be lit in cherry blossom color are lit in cherry blossom color, and the segment display part 707 in the position where they should be turned off.
, 708 except for the segment display section 751 are turned off. Segment display section 75
1, the part that should be turned off as the symbol "3" flashes in cherry blossom color, thereby producing a partially missing display (margin missing display, base missing display) as the symbol "3". The pattern 713i is the pattern “3
Although there is a part missing as "3", it has sufficient distinguishability as pattern "3". According to another point of view, the symbol 713i has sufficient distinguishability as a symbol "3", although there is a partial redundant display as a symbol "3". It should be noted that the segment display section 749 flashes in cherry blossom color when the symbol "3" should be lit in cherry blossom color, but by flashing or lighting in a color different from cherry blossom color, the symbol "3" is displayed.
” may be used to create a partial loss.

The symbol 713j shown in FIG. 42(3) is a display state in which a plurality (for example, two) of symbols "3" of the special pattern game are partially missing. In the pattern 713j, all of the segment display parts 707, 708 in positions where they should be lit, except for the segment display part 753, are lit, and all of the segment display parts 707, 708, which are in positions where they should be turned off, except for the segment display part 752 are lit. goes out. The segment display parts 752 and 753 turn on the part that should be turned off as the symbol "3" and turn off the part that should be lit, so that a partially missing display as the symbol "3" (
(Display of missing lit part, missing display of unlit part). Although the pattern 713j has some defects as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishability as the pattern "3". According to another point of view, pattern 71
3j is a symbol "3" with a mixture of lit part missing display and unlit part missing display as pattern "3".
” with sufficient discernment.

The symbol 713k shown in FIG. 42(4) is a display state in which a plurality (for example, two) of symbols "3" of the special pattern game are partially missing. In the pattern 713k, all of the segment display parts 707, 708, which are in positions where they should be lit in cherry blossom color, except for segment display part 755, are lit in cherry color, and segment display parts among the segment display parts 707, 708, which are in positions where they should be turned off. All except 754 go out. In the segment display parts 754 and 755, the part that should be turned off as the symbol "3" blinks, and the part that should be lit flashes, thereby displaying a partial defect as the symbol "3" (display of the lit part missing, display of the unlit part missing) to produce. The pattern 713k is the pattern “3
Although there is a part missing as "3", it has sufficient distinguishability as pattern "3". According to another viewpoint, the pattern 713k has sufficient discrimination power as the pattern "3" even though the pattern "3" includes a lighting part missing display and an unlit part missing display. In addition, although the segment display parts 754 and 755 are assumed to blink in cherry blossom color, they may be designed to produce a partial loss as the symbol "3" by blinking or lighting in a color different from cherry blossom color.

A pattern 713m shown in FIG. 42(5) is a modification of the pattern 713j shown in FIG. 42(3). In the symbol 713m, the position of the segment display section that lights up at the position where the light should be turned off can be changed. In the pattern 713m, the initial position of the segment display section that lights up at the position where the light should be turned off is the segment display section 752, but such a display mode is changed to the adjacent segment display section 707,
Switch to 708. As a result, the symbol 713m is displayed in such a way that the segment display section, which lights up at the position where it should be turned off, moves along the path 756. In the pattern 713m, by moving the segment display section that lights up at the position that should be turned off to the segment display section 753, the partial loss that lights up at the position that should be turned off and the partial loss that turns off the light at the position that should be turned off are offset. Pattern 713
(See FIG. 23(1)). In this way, the symbol 713m moves and displays within the symbol display area the position of the unlit part missing display that lights up at the position that should be turned off, or the position of the lit part missing display that goes out at the position that should be lit. In such a case, the symbol 713m may create a sense of anticipation for the game by a moving route with a lighted part missing display or a moving route with an unlit part missing display.

The pattern 713n shown in FIG. 42(6) is a modification of the pattern 713m shown in FIG. 42(5). The symbol 713n moves and displays the position of an unlit part missing display that lights up at a position that should be turned off, or the position of a lit part missing display that goes out at a position that should be lit, by moving beyond the symbol display area. Pattern 7
13n moves and displays the segment display part 752, which lights up at a position where it should be turned off, with a path 757, moves it outside the symbol display area, and performs an effect to correct the lighting mode of the segment display part 752 to turn off the light. In addition, the symbol 713n is displayed by moving the segment display section 753, which is turned off at the position where it should be lit, and the segment display section 758, which is lit outside the symbol display area, using a path 757, and moving into the symbol display area. , performs an effect in which the lighting mode of the segment display section 753 is corrected to lighting. In this manner, the symbol 713n moves and displays the position of the unlit part missing display that lights up at a position that should be turned off, or the position of the lit part missing display that goes out at a position that should be lit, moving beyond the symbol display area. In such a case, the symbol 713n may create a sense of anticipation for the game by a moving route with a lighted part missing display or a moving route with an unlit part missing display.

The pattern 713p shown in FIG. 42(7) and the pattern 713q shown in FIG. 42(8) are the same as the pattern 713(
This is the temporary stop display mode shown in FIG. 23(1)). The symbol 713p shows that the symbol 713 has moved upward by one line within the matrix-like symbol display area of 10 rows and 7 columns, and the symbol 713q is
A pattern 713 is shown moving downward by one line within the matrix pattern display area of 10 rows and 7 columns. The gaming machine 10 can produce a temporary stop motion in which the symbol "3" swings in the vertical direction by switching and displaying the symbol 713p, symbol 713, symbol 713q, symbol 713, . . . in this order.

At this time, in the symbol 713p, the segment display portion 762 is partially missing in the top row 760. Further, in the symbol 713q, the segment display portion 763 is partially displayed in the lowest row 761. That is, the gaming machine 10 switches and displays the symbol 713 with no partial loss and the symbols 713p and 713q with partial loss during the temporary stop operation of the symbol "3",
The distinctiveness of the symbol "3" is ensured by the symbol 713. As a result, the gaming machine 10
Even if the symbols 713p and 713q are partially missing until they lose some degree of discernment, a temporary stopping operation is realized that has the discriminative power as the symbol "3". Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can alert the player to the symbols during the temporary stop by performing a partial loss effect at a certain timing of the temporary stop operation. Although the gaming machine 10 attempts to perform a partial loss effect at a certain timing of the temporary stop operation, the present invention is not limited to this, and a partial loss effect may be performed at a certain timing of a moving display or a deformed display. It's okay.

Left symbol area 704, middle symbol display area 705, and right symbol display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(1)
shows a ready-to-reach display state in which the left and right symbols temporarily stop displaying the symbol "7" and the middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The symbol "7" displayed by the left symbol region 704 has a segment display section 765 partially missing, and the symbol "7" displayed by the right symbol region 706 has a segment display section 766 partially missing. The segment display section 765 and the segment display section 766 have the same positional relationship in the matrix pattern display area of 10 rows and 7 columns. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform a symbol loss effect in a plurality of symbol areas, and in that case, the position and number of corresponding partially defective displays can be made the same. Such a gaming machine 10 reduces the burden of control processing for symbol missing effects.

Left symbol area 704, middle symbol display area 705, and right symbol display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(2)
shows a ready-to-reach display state in which the left and right symbols temporarily stop displaying the symbol "7" and the middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The symbol "7" displayed by the left symbol region 704 is partially missing the segment display section 765, and the symbol "7" displayed by the right symbol region 706 is partially missing the segment display sections 766 and 767. The segment display section 765 and the segment display section 766 have the same positional relationship in the 10 rows and 7 columns matrix pattern display area, but the segment display section 765 and the segment display section 767 have the same positional relationship in the 10 rows and 7 columns matrix pattern display area. They are not in the same positional relationship in the display area. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the position and number of corresponding partially missing displays when performing a symbol missing effect in a plurality of symbol areas. In such a gaming machine 10, the symbols displayed in different symbol display areas can supplement mutual discrimination. In such a case, the gaming machine 10 may create a feeling of anticipation for the game by combining the missing patterns of a plurality of symbols.

Left symbol area 704, middle symbol display area 705, and right symbol display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(3)
This shows how the left symbol and the middle symbol temporarily stop display the symbol “7” and the right symbol temporarily stop display the symbol “3”. The symbol "7" displayed by the left symbol area 704 displays the segment display section 768 as a lighted section missing, the missing display section is moved and displayed by a path 769, and the segment display section 770 is displayed as an unlit section missing. The symbol "7" displayed by the middle symbol area 705 displays the segment display section 771 as a lighted section missing, the missing display section is moved and displayed with a path 772, and the segment display section 773 is displayed as an unlit section missing.

Note that since the segment display section 770 is outside the left symbol area 704, it can be used as the decoration display sections 735, 736, 737 in the reserved display area 701 or the segment display sections included in the decoration display areas 702, 703. can.

In this way, the left symbol display area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706 can move and display the missing display part within each display area, and can move and display the missing display part beyond each display area.

Left symbol area 704, middle symbol display area 705, and right symbol display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(4)
This shows how the left symbol and the middle symbol temporarily stop display the symbol “7” and the right symbol temporarily stop display the symbol “3”. The symbol "3" displayed by the right symbol display area 706 displays the segment display part 774 as a lighting part missing, and moves the missing display part to the segment display part 771 of the middle symbol display area 705 via a path 775. As a result, the segment display section 771 of the middle symbol display area 705
In this case, the lighting section missing display is restored to its normal display mode.

In addition, for the symbol "7" displayed in the middle symbol display area 705, the segment display section 773, which was displayed as a missing part in the unlit area, is restored to the normal display mode, and the missing display area is passed to the left symbol area 70 with a pass 778.
4 segment display section 768. As a result, the segment display section 773 of the middle symbol display area 705 restores the unlit part missing display to the normal display mode, and the left symbol display area 705
In the segment display section 768, the unlit section missing display is restored to a normal display mode.

In this way, the left symbol display region 704, the middle symbol display region 705, and the right symbol display region 706 can move and display the missing display portion between the respective display regions. In addition, the left symbol area 704 and the middle symbol display area 7
05 and the right symbol display area 706 are between symbols of the same type (for example, the left symbol "7" and the middle symbol "7").
), you can move and display the missing display area, and between different types of symbols (for example, the right symbol "3" and the middle symbol "3").
7) allows you to move and display the missing display area.

Next, in the pattern loss effect of the modified example of the third embodiment, the segment display of the regular shape is deleted by replacing the segment display that is part of the symbol with the regular shape display and displaying a different shape. A pattern loss effect of a modified example will be explained using FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern loss effect according to a modification of the third embodiment.

The display device 830a is, for example, an LCD display device, and displays symbols in segments on the LCD. The left symbol area 704a, the middle symbol display area 705a, and the right symbol display area 706a each display a symbol by a set of segment displays each having a regular petal shape.

In such a display device 830a, the shapes of the segment display parts 780 and 781 are changed so that a part of the symbol is missing. For example, the segment display section 780 changes the size and deletes one petal-shaped segment that is the normal size. In addition, the segment display section 781 changes the shape to a single flower shape and deletes one segment display having a petal shape, which is a regular shape.

The display device 830a can perform a loss effect of pending display in the pending display area 701a, similarly to the left symbol area 704a, the middle symbol display area 705a, and the right symbol display area 706a.

Next, the loss effect of the hold display will be explained. Since the reserved display is also displayed as a set of a plurality of segment displays like the symbols, it is possible to perform a deletion effect in which a part of the segment display is deleted. First, the loss effect when a hold display occurs will be explained using FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a loss effect when a hold display occurs in the third embodiment.

As explained using FIG. 40, the gaming machine 10 performs an animation of the occurrence of a pending display when a pending storage occurs. When a loss effect is not performed, the generation animation changes the display state 738 to the initial state, the display state 739 to the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 790 to the display state 739 for the pending display section corresponding to the pending memory occurrence. The display state is sequentially switched as the final state.

On the other hand, when performing a loss effect, the generation animation sets the display state 738 to the initial state, the display state 739 to the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 791 to the display state for the pending display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory. The display state is sequentially switched as the final state following 739. Alternatively, the occurrence animation sequentially displays the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 792 as the final state following the display state 739, for the pending display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory. Switch state.

The display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display section 731a and the segment display section 731b are lit, and is a display state without defects. The display state 791 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display section 731a is turned on and the segment display section 731b is turned off, and is a display state in which some parts are missing. The display state 792 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display section 731a is turned off and the segment display section 731b is turned on, and is a display state in which a portion is missing. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a loss effect when a hold display occurs. Furthermore, since the gaming machine 10 can perform different types of loss effects when the hold display occurs, a feeling of anticipation for the game may be created depending on the loss mode of the hold display.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 has three final states (display state 739) with display state 739 as an intermediate state.
0,791,792), but the display state up to display state 790 may be used as an intermediate state to branch to three final states (display state 790, 791, 792). In addition, the gaming machine 10
is the initial state (display state 738) by omitting the intermediate state to create three final states (display state 79).
0,791,792).

Here, different advanced forms of loss effects will be explained using FIG. 28. Figure 46 shows the third
FIG. 3 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a loss effect when a hold display occurs in the embodiment.
For example, the missing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 46(1) has the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 791 as the final state following the display state 739. Such a developed form (missing pattern 1) does not include the display state 790 with no missing display as an intermediate state, and therefore can create a strong sense of surprise.

Furthermore, the missing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 46(2) has the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, the display state 790 as the intermediate state following the display state 739, and the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 739. Let 791 be the final state following display state 790. In this developed form (missing pattern 2), the display state 790, which is an intermediate state, can be maintained for a predetermined period of time and a missing display can be performed with a time lag, so that it is possible to create a sense of surprise that is delayed. can.

For example, the missing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 46(3) has the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 792 as the final state following the display state 739. Such a developed form (missing pattern 3) does not include the display state 790 without missing display as an intermediate state, and therefore can create a strong sense of surprise.

Furthermore, the missing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 46(4) has the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, the display state 790 as the intermediate state following the display state 739, and the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 739. Let 792 be the final state following display state 790. In this developed form (missing pattern 4), the display state 790, which is an intermediate state, can be maintained for a predetermined period of time, and a time lag can be provided to create a missing display, so that it is possible to create a sense of surprise that is delayed. can.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a loss effect in different development forms when a hold display occurs, so that a feeling of anticipation for the game can be created depending on the form of development up to the loss form when a hold display occurs. Good too.

Next, the display mode of the hold display section will be explained using FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of the hold display section according to the third embodiment. FIG. 47(1) shows the pending display area 70.
1 shows how the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "0" (special figure 1 pending 0) when the reserved display of the special figure 1 game is performed. At this time, the hold display area 701 includes a No. 1 hold display area 731, a No. 2 hold display area 732, a No. 3 hold display area 733, and a No. 4 hold display area 7.
34 and decoration display sections 735, 736, and 737 are displayed in an off state.

FIG. 47(2) shows that when the special figure 1 game is displayed on hold in the hold display area 701, the number of held memories for the special figure 1 game is "3", and the third hold display is displayed as missing. (Special drawing 1 reservation 3 (number 3 missing)) is shown. At this time, the hold display area 701 displays the No. 1 hold display section 731 and the No. 2 hold display section 732 in a display state 790, and the No. 3 hold display section 7
33 is displayed in display state 791, No. 4 pending display section 734 and decoration display sections 735, 736, 7
37 is displayed in an off state.

A pending display area 701 in FIG. 47(3) shows a state in which the state in FIG. 47(2) is shifted to pending due to the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in FIG. 47 (3), the number of reserved memories for the special figure 1 game is "2".
This shows that the second reservation display is missing (special figure 1 reservation 2 (number 2 missing)). At this time, the hold display area 701 displays the No. 1 hold display section 731 in a display state 790,
The second pending display section 732 is displayed in a display state 791, and the third pending display section 733, the fourth pending display section 734, and the decoration display sections 736 and 737 are displayed in an off state. Note that the decoration display section 735
lights up in a display mode indicating that a variable display is in progress. In the hold display area 701, a decoration display section 735 also serves as a hold-out display, instead of providing a dedicated hold-out display indicating that the hold is being used.

A hold display area 701 in FIG. 47(4) shows how a hold has occurred from the state in FIG. 47(3). Therefore, in FIG. 47 (4), the number of pending memories for the first special drawing game is "3", the second pending display is showing a missing display, and the third pending display is displaying the occurrence animation. (Special figure 1 reservation 3 (2nd missing, 3rd occurrence animation)) is shown. At this time, the hold display area 701 displays the No. 1 hold display section 731 in a display state 790, and the No. 2 hold display section 7
No. 32 and No. 3 pending display section 733 are displayed in a display state 791, and No. 4 pending display section 734 and decoration display section 736 are displayed in an off state. Note that the decoration display section 735 lights up in a display mode that indicates that a variable display is in progress, and the decoration display section 737 lights up in a display mode that indicates that a hold has occurred. Hold display area 7
01 indicates that the decoration display section 737 indicates that a suspension has occurred, indicating that the No. 3 suspension display section 733 in which a suspension is occurring has not been confirmed as a missing display.

A hold display area 701 in FIG. 47(5) shows the completion of the occurrence animation that was being performed in the state in FIG. 47(4). Therefore, FIG. 47 (5) shows that the number of pending memories for the special figure 1 game is "3" and the second pending display is missing (special figure 1 pending 3 (second missing)). . At this time, the hold display area 701 displays the No. 1 hold display section 731 and the No. 3 hold display section 733 in a display state 790, displays the No. 2 hold display section 732 in a display state 791,
The No. 4 pending display section 734 and decoration display sections 736 and 737 are displayed in an off state. Note that the decoration display section 735 lights up in a display mode indicating that a variable display is in progress. The hold display area 701 provides guidance that the No. 3 hold display area 733, which has been placed on hold due to the decoration display area 737 being turned off, will not be displayed as missing. Note that the No. 3 pending display section 733 may display the missing information at a different time, such as during a shift.

FIG. 47(6) shows a state in which the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "1" (special figure 2 pending 1) when the reserved display area 701 is displaying the reserved display of the special figure 2 game. At this time, the hold display area 701 displays the No. 1 hold display section 731 in a display state 790, the No. 2 hold display section 732, the No. 3 hold display section 733, the No. 4 hold display section 734, and the decoration display sections 735, 73.
7 is displayed in an off state. Note that the decoration display section 736 lights up in a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 game is on hold. The hold display area 701 has a decorative display area 73 instead of providing a dedicated display for distinguishing between the hold display for the special figure 1 game and the hold display for the special figure 2 game.
6 also serves as a distinguishing mark.

It should be noted that when performing the loss effect of symbols or pending display, the gaming machine 10 can execute other effects (special effects) in addition to the loss effect. For example, the special effects include a moving display effect of the missing display part that is performed together with the effect of missing symbols, and a moving display effect of the missing display part that is carried out together with the effect of missing symbols, or a moving display effect of the missing display part 735 that is carried out together with the effect of missing symbols.
, 736, 737 perform decorative effects, etc. Further, the special performance includes a performance related to a pending display during a design deletion performance, a performance related to a symbol during a deletion performance of a pending display, and the like. In addition, special effects include a symbol display area 700, a pending display area 701, and a decoration display area 702.
, 703, a display in which petals are scattered and piled up by a segment display section imitating flower petals, and other effects. In addition to other display effects performed on the display device 830, etc., special effects include sound output effects performed using the sound output devices 19a, 19b, etc., operation effects performed using the push buttons 25, etc., the board decoration device 46, etc. There are light emitting effects performed using the frame decoration device 18 and the like, and movable effects performed using the board presentation device 44 and the like.

Next, as a modification of the third embodiment, a loss effect for a pattern in which outlines of the first embodiment are highlighted and ambiguously (non-emphasized) displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 48 shows
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing highlighted display and ambiguous (non-emphasized) display of the outline of a symbol during a loss effect in a modified example of the third embodiment.

Figure 48 (1) shows the pattern width and contour line of decorative pattern A and decorative pattern B during a loss effect, and the thickness of the contour line and the thickness of the missing part contour line of the decorative pattern A and decorative pattern B during a loss effect. For comparison, see Figure 48 (2)
Shown below.

The decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B can each perform a loss effect in which a part of the pattern is lost. For each of the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B, when a partial loss of the pattern causes a loss of the contour line, a defective part contour line is displayed corresponding to the partial loss of the pattern.

Decorative pattern A has a pattern width of w1, a number part width of w2 (<w1), a number part outline width (thickness) of w3 (<w2), and a missing part outline thickness of w10. do. In the decorative pattern B, the pattern width is w4, the width (thickness) of the pattern outline is w5 (<w4), and the thickness of the missing part outline is w11.

The gaming machine 10 emphasizes the display of the outline of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A by making the width w3 of the outline of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A larger than the width w5 of the outline of the numeral part of the decorative pattern B. The player can feel that the outline of the symbol B is displayed vaguely.

Moreover, the thickness of the outline of the missing part w10 is thinner than the width w3 of the outline of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A, so that it helps in sensing the thickness of the width w3 of the outline of the numeral part of the decorative pattern A. be able to. Moreover, the thickness w11 of the outline of the defective part is thinner than the width w5 of the outline of the decorative pattern B, so that the thickness of the outline of the decorative design B can be assisted. can.

In addition, the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing part is thicker than the width w3 of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A, so that it is possible to assist in sensing the loss of the number part of the decorative pattern A. Moreover, the thickness w11 of the defective part outline is thicker than the width w5 of the outline of the decorative pattern B, so that it can assist in sensing the defect in the decorative pattern B.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes the width of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A the same as the thickness of the missing part outline w10 of the decorative pattern A and the thickness w11 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern B. w3 or the width w5 of the outline of the decorative pattern B can be used as a reference when sensing.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may set the thickness w10 of the missing portion outline of the decorative pattern A to be different from the thickness w11 of the missing portion outline of the decorative pattern B. In this case, the gaming machine 10 changes the thickness w10 of the missing portion outline of the decorative pattern A to the pattern width w1, the width w2 of the number part, or the width w3 of the outline of the number part.
It may be determined according to the ratio or difference between the two. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a decorative pattern B.
The thickness w11 of the outline of the defective part may be determined according to the ratio or difference with the pattern width w4 or the width w5 of the pattern outline.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes the thickness of the missing part outline line thickness w10 of the decorative pattern A variable, and guides the anticipation of the game according to the size of the missing part outline line thickness w10 of the decorative pattern A. It may be something. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 makes the size of the missing portion outline thickness w11 of the decorative pattern B variable, and guides the anticipation of the game according to the size of the missing portion outline thickness w11 of the decorative pattern B. It may be something.

Furthermore, the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing part of the decorative pattern B may be fixed at all times, but may be switchable depending on the variable display state. It may be something. for example,
Emphasizing the outline display of the number part of decorative pattern A and de-emphasizing the outline display of the decorative pattern B are as follows:
It may be fixed at all times, but it may also be switchable depending on the fluctuating display state. In that case, the outline display of the number part of decorative pattern A may be emphasized and the pattern of decorative pattern B may be changed. It is desirable that the thickness w10 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern A and the thickness w11 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern B are fixed from the viewpoint of making it easier to understand that the outline display is not emphasized.

De-emphasizing the outline display of the number part of decorative pattern A and emphasizing the outline display of the decorative pattern B are as follows:
It may be fixed at all times, but it may also be switchable depending on the fluctuating display state. From the viewpoint of easily emphasizing the outline display of the pattern, it is desirable that the thickness w10 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern A and the thickness w11 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern B are fixed.

Next, a more detailed modification of the display mode of the decorative patterns A and B during temporary stop display will be described using FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop display using a decorative pattern during a loss effect according to a modification of the third embodiment. Note that configurations similar to those in the first embodiment may be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

FIG. 49(1) shows a temporary stop display mode of a pattern 527 as an example of the decorative pattern A that is being displayed temporarily while performing a loss effect. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 is (a), (b), (
Repeat c) and (d) periodically.

The pattern 527 during the temporary stop display has a fixed background part 527d, and the number part 527n, which has the distinctiveness as the pattern 527 even though a part of it is missing, swings in the left-right direction (first temporary stop operation). while expanding and contracting in the vertical direction (second temporary stopping operation).

Note that the numerical part 527n expands and contracts in the vertical direction while swinging in the left-right direction while fixing the relative position, relative size, and (relative) thickness w10 of the defective part contour line of the defective part. Further, the numerical part 527n indicates the absolute position, absolute size, and (absolute) thickness of the defective part outline w10.
While fixed, it expands and contracts vertically while swinging horizontally. Note that the term "relative" here refers to the relationship between the numerical part 527n and the missing part, and the term "absolute" refers to the relationship between the display area of the display device 830 and the display position of the missing part.

Further, the numerical part 527n may display a temporary stop by making at least one of the position, size, and thickness of the defective part outline w10 of the defective part variable (third temporary stop operation).
Moreover, instead of the number part 527n expanding and contracting in the vertical direction while swinging in the left-right direction,
The temporary stopping operation may be performed by making at least one of the position, size, and thickness of the defective portion outline w10 of the defective portion variable.

FIGS. 49(2) and 49(3) show a temporary stop display mode of a symbol 537 as an example of a decorative symbol B that is being displayed temporarily while performing a loss effect. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 is (a)
, (b), (c), and (d) are repeated periodically. The entire pattern 537 swings in the vertical direction while a part of the pattern 537 is being temporarily stopped and displayed.

The symbol 537 may display a temporary stop by changing at least one of the position, size, and thickness w11 of the defective portion outline. Moreover, instead of swinging in the vertical direction, the pattern 537 performs a temporary stopping operation by varying at least one of the position, size, and thickness of the defective part contour line w11 of the defective part. There may be.

Note that the decorative pattern B shown in FIG.
This is a display mode in which the relative position of the missing portion is fixed (not variable) with respect to the pattern 537, and the absolute position is variable (not fixed) with respect to the display area of the display device 830. In such a defect display, the symbol 537 and the defective portion can be displayed as one, and the display range of the rear side viewed from the defective portion can be enlarged by swinging the symbol 537.

In addition, the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. 49 (3), which is temporarily stopped and displayed while performing a loss effect, is
This is a display mode in which the relative position of the missing portion with respect to the pattern 537 is made variable (not fixed), and the absolute position is fixed (not made variable) with respect to the display area of the display device 830. Such a defect display can be displayed without a sense of unity between the symbol 537 and the defective portion, and even if the symbol 537 swings, the display range on the rear side facing from the defective portion can be fixed.

Next, as a modification of the third embodiment, using FIG. 50, we will explain the application of the loss effect to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in which the thickness of the outline display of the decorative pattern can be varied for each part. explain. FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop mode of decorative patterns during a loss effect according to a modification of the third embodiment.

This figure shows how the partially missing "7" (pattern 537) of the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. 50(1) is rotated on the vertical axis and temporarily stopped. The pattern 550 shows how the decorative pattern B "7" is rotated to the left on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. The pattern 551 shows the decorative pattern B "7" viewed from the front. The pattern 552 shows the decorative pattern B "7" rotated to the right on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. for example,
The gaming machine 10 can display a temporary stop by switching from the symbol 550 to the symbol 552 via the symbol 551, and from the symbol 552 to the symbol 550 via the symbol 551.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the outline display for each switching target outline display part (left half of the symbol, right half of the symbol), as shown in FIG. 50(2). .
Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can change the thickness (highlighting level) of the missing portion outline display, as shown in FIG. 50(2).

The gaming machine 10 has a left half of the symbol 550 as a left portion 550L, and a right half of the symbol 550 as a right portion 550L.
50R, the outline of the left part 550L that appears to be moving away is displayed thinly (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display), and the outline of the right part 550R that appears to be moving in the direction of approaching and the outline of the missing part are displayed. Make the display thicker (highlighted). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the left part 550L, which appears further away than the right part 550R, thinner than the outline of the right part 550R and the missing part outline, and displays the outline of the right part 550R, which appears closer than the left part 550L. The outline display and the missing part outline display are displayed thicker than the outline display of the left part 550L.

Furthermore, when the left half of the symbol 551 is the left portion 551L and the right half of the symbol 551 is the right portion 551R, the gaming machine 10 can display the outline of the left part 551L, the outline of the right part 551R, and the missing part outline. is the standard thickness (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 551L, the contour display of the right portion 551R, and the defective portion contour display with the same thickness (standard thickness) that appear at approximately the same depth position.

Furthermore, when the left half of the symbol 552 is defined as the left portion 552L, and the right half of the symbol 552 is defined as the right portion 552R, the gaming machine 10 thickens (emphasizes) the outline of the left portion 552L that appears to move in the approaching direction. ), and the outline of the right part 552R and the outline of the missing part, which appear to be moving away, are displayed thinly (non-highlighted, ambiguous). In other words, the gaming machine 10
The outline display of the right part 552R that appears further away than the left part 552L and the outline of the missing part are shown in the left part 55.
The outline of the left part 552L, which appears closer than the right part 552R and the missing part outline, is displayed thicker than the outline of the right part 552R.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols and the missing effect. Note that the left or right part of the design may be uniformly highlighted or non-emphasized, but the degree of emphasis or non-emphasis may be varied depending on the distance from the vertical axis (center axis). You can do it like this.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may divide one defect display into two regions in the temporary stop display state of the decorative pattern, and may control the thickness of the defect outline display in each region.
More than one defect display may be performed, and the thickness of the defect outline display may be controlled for each defect display. For example, the gaming machine 10 makes the missing part outline thinner (non-highlighted display, Ambiguous display) is displayed, and the outline of the defective part is displayed thickly (highlighted) for the right side defective part (the right area when one defective display is divided into two, or the right-hand defective display of two defective displays). Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 displays the outlines of the missing parts of the left missing part and the right missing part of the symbol 551 at a standard thickness (standard display). In addition, gaming machine 1
0 displays the defective part outline thickly (highlighted) for the left side defective part of the pattern 552, and makes the defective part outline thin (non-highlighted, vaguely displayed) for the right side defective part.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may display the missing portion outline as no outline in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display the defective part outline display with a thickness in the depth direction in the temporary stop display state of the decorative pattern, and in that case, one defective part outline is displayed at the front position and the depth position, respectively. The thickness of the defect outline display may be controlled. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays a thin (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display) the missing part outline for the front of the deep missing part of the pattern 550, and a thick (highlighted display) display for the back of the deep missing part. do. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the missing part at the standard thickness for the front side of the deep missing part and the rear side of the deep missing part of the pattern 551 (standard display). Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 displays a thicker (highlighted) display of the missing part outline for the front of the deep missing part of the pattern 552, and a thinner (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display) the missing part outline for the far side of the deep missing part. .

Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform a missing effect for the message effect in the variable display game described using FIG. It can be done. At this time, gaming machine 1
0 can control the position, number, size, and outline thickness of missing parts for message display.

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment described above (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first presentation means (for example, Game control device 100a, performance control device 300, display device 83 that performs loss performance
0), and a second performance means (for example, a game control device 100a that performs a special performance, a performance control device 300 that can perform a game in a different performance mode from the first performance means at the same time as the first performance means)
, display device 830), and the first presentation means, when displaying the display elements, displays a first state in which all of the display elements are displayed (for example, a display state 790 in which the symbol 713 and a pending display); It can be displayed in a second state (for example, the symbol 713a, the display state 791 of the pending display) in which a part of the image is missing (see FIGS. 41 and 47).

(2) The gaming machine 10 has a first presentation means (for example, Game control device 100a, performance control device 300, display device 83 that performs loss performance
0), and a second performance means (for example, a game control device 100a that performs a special performance, a performance control device 300 that can perform a game in a different performance mode from the first performance means at the same time as the first performance means)
, display device 830), and the first presentation means controls the display configuration when displaying the display element as an aggregate of two or more display components (for example, one of the segment display parts 707, 708 that lights up). A first state in which the display element is displayed by all of the elements (for example, the pattern 71
3. Display state 790 of pending display) and a second state (for example, symbol 713a, display state 791 of pending display) in which a display element is displayed by missing a part of the display component (
(See Figures 41 and 47).

(3) The display element in (1) or (2) is a symbol that is displayed variably in the game (
(See Figures 41 to 43).
(4) The display element (1) or (2) is a pending display that displays the right to execute the game in the game (see FIGS. 45 to 47).

(5) The gaming machine 10 exclusively plays the first game (for example, the special figure 1 game) and the second game (for example, the special figure 2 game) at a predetermined execution time (for example, a variable display time). An executable control unit (for example, game control device 100a, production control device 300) is provided. The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the total value of the stored number of execution rights for the first game and the stored number of execution rights for the second game (see FIG. 35).

(6) The control unit in (5) determines that the larger the total value of the stored number of execution rights of the first game and the number of stored execution rights of the second game, the longer the execution time of the first game. (See FIG. 35).

(7) The control unit in (5) determines that the larger the total value of the stored number of execution rights of the first game and the number of stored execution rights of the second game, the higher the expected execution time of the first game. The value is determined to be large (see FIG. 35).

(8) The gaming machine 10 exclusively plays the first game (for example, the special figure 1 game) and the second game (for example, the special figure 2 game) at a predetermined execution time (for example, a variable display time). An executable control unit (for example, game control device 100a, production control device 300) is provided. The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the stored number of execution rights of the first game and the stored number of execution rights of the second game, and determines the execution time of the second game. The determination is made based only on the number of stored execution rights for the second game, without depending on the number of stored execution rights for the first game (see FIG. 35).

(9) The maximum storage number of execution rights for the second game in (5) to (8) is smaller than the maximum storage number of execution rights for the first game (see FIG. 31).
(10) The maximum number of execution rights stored for the second game in (9) is 1 (see Figure 31)
.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to third embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine including a game board 800 (see FIG. 28), the game machine of the fourth embodiment is applicable to either. Note that configurations similar to those in the first to third embodiments may be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment makes the result of the variable display game known through the advance notice, thereby preventing the game performance after the notice from becoming redundant and reducing the decrease in interest.

First, among the variable display commands prepared by the gaming machine 10, three variable display commands (variable display commands A, B, and C) that can be notified in advance and have different variable display times will be described. First, a variable display command A that can derive a win in a relatively short time will be explained using FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command A of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command A is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the production control device 300. In addition, the gaming control device 100 may transmit a stop symbol command, a hold display command, etc. together with the fluctuation display command. The variable display command A is a command corresponding to the variable display performance of the variable time T0.

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command A, generates a variable display effect with a variable time T0, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. Although the variable display command A has the aspect that the variable time is short and therefore does not have enough time to perform various effects, it also has the aspect that the time to derive the results is quick.

The production control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation within the variation time T0. The first half variation is a presentation mode common to a plurality of variation display commands, and is responsible for, for example, a symbol that is stopped and displayed until it is displayed in a variation manner at a predetermined speed. The latter half variation is a presentation mode that differs depending on the variation display command, and includes, for example, a ready-to-reach presentation and the like until the symbol stops. The fluctuation display command A allocates time T01 of the fluctuation time T0 to the first half fluctuation, and time T02 to the second half fluctuation. Note that time T01 is shorter than time T02.

The latter half variation of the variation display command A includes a preview effect at time T021, a ready-to-reach effect at time T022, and a short SP (special) ready-to-reach effect at time T023. The preview performance is
This is an effect that foretells the result of a variable display game with a predetermined reliability. For example, the preview effects include a confirmed notice (probable notice) effect that announces a confirmed jackpot, a high-reliability notice effect that announces a jackpot with higher reliability than a low-reliability notice effect, and a high-reliability notice effect that announces a jackpot with higher reliability. There are low-reliability preview performances that notify you of a jackpot with lower reliability than other performances. Note that the preview performance may be one that gives advance notice of the value of the win and the performance mode of the process of deriving the win.

The reach effect is the effect of the variable display process of the variable display game, and includes, for example, a reach establishment process and a reach with a low expectation level that is a normal reach. Short SP reach performance is a form of developed reach that develops from normal reach, and produces a reach with medium expectations.

The variable display command A is for deriving a hit as a result of the short SP reach performance, and the gaming machine 10 separately prepares a command for deriving a loss as a result.

Next, the variable display command B, which can derive a win in a longer time than the variable display command A, will be explained using FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command B is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the production control device 300. The variable display command B is a command corresponding to a variable display effect of variable time T1 (>T0).

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command B, generates a variable display effect with a variable time T1, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. Fluctuation display command B has a longer fluctuation time than fluctuating display command A, so it has the aspect that it can perform more diverse effects than fluctuating display command A, but it takes less time to derive results than fluctuating display command A. It also has the aspect of being slow.

The production control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation within the variation time T1. The fluctuation display command B allocates time T11 (=T01) of the fluctuation time T1 to the first half fluctuation, and time T12 (>T02) to the second half fluctuation. Note that time T11 is shorter than time T12.

The second half of the variation display command B includes a preview effect at time T121, a reach effect at time T122, and a long SP reach effect at time T123 (effect pattern B01);
Preview performance at time T121, reach performance at time T122, and time T124 (=T023)
There is a case (performance pattern B02) including a short SP reach performance of , and a fluctuating hit performance of time T125.

Long SP reach performance is a form of developed reach that develops from normal reach, and produces a highly anticipated reach. The winning performance during fluctuation is a performance that shows that the winning is confirmed before the fluctuating display result is derived. The winning performance during the fluctuation may be, for example, a fanfare performance performed from the fluctuation, or a lottery performance such as a symbol, probability fluctuation, or public power support. Further, the fluctuating hit performance may be a freeze performance, a lively performance, or the like, and the remaining fluctuating time may also be displayed. It should be noted that the winning performance during fluctuation may be performed by displaying the symbols as a result of the fluctuation display, or may be performed with the symbols as the result of the fluctuation display facing down. Even if the fluctuating winning performance is performed with the symbols as a fluctuating display result facing down, the symbols as a fluctuating winning performance are displayed by the end of the fluctuating winning performance.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute the performance pattern B01 and the performance pattern B02 when receiving the variable display command B, and when performing the hit performance in the preview performance, the performance control device 300 executes the performance pattern B02 rather than the performance pattern B01. We make it easy to select.

The gaming machine 10 makes it easier to select the performance pattern B02, which can notify the result earlier than the performance pattern B01, because even if the performance after the execution of the confirmed preview performance stimulates expectations, it will not contribute much to improving the interest. . As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and improves interest by enabling the game performance after the result is determined even during variable display. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the game performance after the advance notice non-redundant by the extent that the time T124 of the short SP reach performance is shorter than the time T123 of the long SP reach performance. Further, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the time T125 of the winning performance during fluctuation to the performance after the winning is confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 guides the game result with a short SP reach effect similar to the variable display command A in the variable display command B which has a longer variation time than the variable display command A,
Non-redundant game progress can be realized by allocating a fluctuating hit performance to the surplus time.

Note that the variable display command B derives a win as a result of a short SP reach effect or as a result of a long SP reach effect, and the gaming machine 10 uses the command to derive a loss as a result as a variable display command B. Prepare separately.

Next, the variable display command C, which can derive a win in a longer time than the variable display command B, will be explained using FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command C of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command C is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the production control device 300. The variable display command C is a command corresponding to a variable display performance of variable time T2 (>T0, T1).

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command C, generates a variable display effect with a variable time T2, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. Fluctuation display command C has a longer fluctuation time than fluctuating display commands A and B, so it has the aspect that it can perform more diverse effects than fluctuating display commands A and B. Another aspect is that it takes a long time to derive results.

The production control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation within the variation time T2. The fluctuation display command C allocates time T21 (=T01, T11) of the fluctuation time T2 to the first half fluctuation, and time T22 (>T02, T12) to the second half fluctuation. In addition, time T21
is shorter than time T22.

The latter half of the variation display command C includes a preview performance at time T221, a reach performance at time T222, a long SP reach performance via short SP reach at time T223 (performance pattern C01), and a case where the preview performance at time T221 is included. There is a case (performance pattern C02) including a ready-to-win performance at time T222, a short SP reach performance at time T224 (=T023), and a fluctuating hit performance at time T225 (>T125).

The long SP reach performance via short SP reach is a form of developed reach that develops from the normal reach, and produces a highly anticipated reach that goes through the short SP reach and then the long SP reach.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute the performance pattern C01 and the performance pattern C02 when receiving the variable display command C, and when performing the hit performance in the preview performance, the performance control device 300 executes the performance pattern C02 rather than the performance pattern C01. We make it easy to select.

The gaming machine 10 makes it easier to select the performance pattern C02 that can notify the result earlier than the performance pattern C01, since even if it stimulates expectations in performances after the execution of the confirmed preview performance, there is little contribution to improving interest. . As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and improves interest by enabling the game performance after the result is determined even during variable display. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the game performance after the advance notice non-redundant by the extent that the time T224 of the short SP reach performance is shorter than the time T223 of the long SP reach performance via short SP reach. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a time T225 for the winning effect during fluctuation.
It can be assigned to the performance after the win is confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 guides the game result with a short SP reach effect similar to the variable display command A in the variable display command C which has a longer variation time than the variable display command A,
Non-redundant game progress can be realized by allocating a fluctuating hit performance to the surplus time.

Note that the variable display command C derives a win as a result of a short SP reach effect or as a result of a long SP reach effect via a short SP reach effect, and the gaming machine 10 changes the command to derive a loss as a result. Prepare separately from display command C.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 uses the variable display commands A, B, and C to determine the winning result as a result of the short SP reach effect by the variable display command A, and the long SP reach effect as a result of the variable display command B. , a hit as a result of a long SP reach effect via a short SP reach by the variable display command C, and a win as a result of a short SP reach effect with a fluctuating hit effect by the variable display commands B and C. .

The fluctuation pattern table explained using FIG. 2 is a table (such as a second-half fluctuation group table or a second-half fluctuation pattern selection table) for determining a second-half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern after reaching a reach state, a table for determining a second-half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern after reaching a reach state, It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining the first half variation pattern, which is the variation pattern before . The first-half variations in the variation display commands A, B, and C may correspond to the presentation content selected in the first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, or the like. Further, the second half fluctuations in the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C may correspond to the performance contents selected in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation pattern selection table, or the like.

In addition, in the variable display commands A, B, and C, the first half of the variation is a common performance mode in multiple variable display commands, and for example, it is assumed that the symbol that is stopped and displayed is responsible for the variable display at a predetermined speed. In addition, it may be in charge of handling up to a predetermined performance break.

Next, display screens during a game corresponding to variable display commands A, B, and C will be explained using FIGS. 54 to 58. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment (
Part 1). FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment (part 2).
). FIG. 56 is a diagram (Part 3) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 57 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram (part 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment.

The display screen 600 shown in FIG. 54 (1) is a display screen when the symbols are stopped, and after the variable display in the variable display game ends (before the start of the next variable display game), the symbol that is the result pattern of the variable display game is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is displayed for a period of time. The display screen 600 includes a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special pattern 1 pending number display 503, a special pattern 2 pending number display 504, a pending display (pending standby display) 505, and a pending consumption display 506. Display.

On the display screen 600, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol is
It shows that the symbol has stopped at "5", and the right symbol shows that the symbol has stopped at "7". That is, on the display screen 600, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped). On the display screen 600, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol constituting the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state.

The special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 600, the special figure 1 pending number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories for the special figure 1 game is "3".
The special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 600, the special figure 2 pending number display 504 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "0". The hold display 505 performs a hold display corresponding to the number of hold memories for the special figure 1 game or the hold memory number of the special figure 2 game according to the gaming state. On the display screen 600, the pending display 505 shows the special figure 1
Three pending icons 507 are displayed corresponding to the number of pending memories of the game.

Depending on its display mode, the pending consumption display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state, and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result. On the display screen 600, the pending consumption display 506 makes the frame blank (blank) to indicate that the special symbol fluctuation display game is in a stopped state. After that, the gaming machine 10 starts a variable display corresponding to the variable display command A, the variable display command B, or the variable display command C, for example.

A display screen 602 shown in FIG. 54(2) is a display screen after the start of variable display, and is a display screen corresponding to the first half variation common to variable display commands A, B, and C. The display screen 602 is
This is a screen after the display screen 600, and shows a screen in which variable display is being performed (three symbols are changing). On the display screen 602, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol fluctuating display game is being fluctuated. In addition, on the display screen 602, a small pattern group 502
The left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol fluctuating display game is being fluctuated.

On the display screen 602, the special figure 1 pending number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories for the special figure 1 game is "2".
The special figure 2 pending number display 504 indicates that the number of pending memories for the special figure 2 game is "0", and the pending display 505 indicates that the number of pending memories for the special figure 1 game is "2". . Further, on the display screen 602, the pending consumption display 506 displays a pending consumption icon 508 (suspended memory display being consumed), indicating that the special figure variable display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

The display screen 604 shown in FIG. 54 (3) is a display screen corresponding to the second half variation, and is a display screen (part 1) corresponding to the preview effect among the second half variations common to the variation display commands A, B, and C. .

The display screen 604 includes a prior suggestion effect display 520 in its display contents. The display screen 604 is a display screen in a state where the left symbol of the large symbol group 501 has temporarily stopped and a preliminary suggestion effect is being performed. The advance suggestion performance display 520 indicates that the push button operation performance will start (that the push button can be operated) by displaying an image imitating a push button (performance button 25) and the words "Ready?" It is hinted at (forewarned) in advance.

A display screen 606 shown in FIG. 55(1) is a display screen (part 2) corresponding to the preview performance following the display screen 604. The display screen 606 includes a suggestive performance acceptance display 523 in its display contents.
The suggestion production reception display 523 displays an image imitating a push button and the words "Press!" to inform the user that it is time to accept a push button operation. Further, the suggestion production reception display 523 displays a gauge of the time during which push button operations can be accepted.

Display screen 608 shown in FIG. 55(2), display screen 610 shown in FIG. 55(3), and FIG.
The display screen 612 shown in 6(1) is displayed when a push button operation is accepted.
This is a display screen that previews the results of a variable display game. Note that the gaming machine 10 may not notify the result of the variable display game if the push button operation is not accepted within the push button operation acceptable time, or may not notify the result of the variable display game when the push button operation acceptable time is up. The result of the variable display game may be announced after waiting. When the gaming machine 10 waits for the time limit for accepting push button operations to advance before announcing the result of the variable display game, the game machine 10 predicts the result of the variable display game by waiting for the push button operation to be accepted. The appearance rate of previews with high expectations may be reduced.

The display screen 608 is a display screen (part 3) corresponding to the preview performance following the display screen 606. The display screen 608 includes a preview notification display 609 in its display contents. The advance notice display 609 is
A cut-in display overlapping the large pattern group 501 includes a tiger-like character and the line "Chance!". The preview notification display 609 is a preview performance display that suggests that there is a possibility of winning even though expectations are low as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of non-confirmed preview performance that does not notify a confirmed win. Among them, it is a form of low-reliability preview performance.

The display screen 610 is a display screen (part 4) corresponding to the preview performance following the display screen 606. The display screen 610 includes a preview notification display 611 in its display contents. The advance notice display 611 is
A cut-in display that overlaps the large pattern group 501 includes a tiger-like character wearing sunglasses and the line "Hot!". The preview notification display 611 is a preview performance display that suggests that there is a high expectation of winning as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of non-confirmed preview performance that does not notify the confirmation of a win. It is a form of Note that the cut-in display of the advance notification display 611 is displayed larger than the cut-in display of the advance notice display 609, thereby suggesting a high degree of reliability.

The display screen 612 is a display screen (No. 5) corresponding to the preview performance following the display screen 606. The display screen 612 includes a preview notification display 613 in its display contents. The advance notice display 613 is
A cut-in display overlapping the large pattern group 501 includes a pig-like character and a message tape "Congratulations!". The preview notification display 613 is a preview performance display that suggests that a win has been confirmed as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of a confirmed preview performance that notifies the confirmation of a win. Note that the cut-in display of the advance notice display 613 is the same as that of the advance notice display 60.
By displaying it larger than the cut-in display of 9,611, it suggests a higher degree of reliability.

The display screen 614 shown in FIG. 56(2) is a display screen after the preview performance, and is a display screen corresponding to the common ready-to-win performance for variable display commands A, B, and C. The display screen 614 shows a screen during a variable display (three symbols are changing). The display screen 614 shows that the left and right symbols of the large symbol group 501 display symbol "3" and temporarily stop, indicating that the middle symbol is in a fluctuating reach state.
The display screen 614 produces a so-called normal reach. Normal reach rarely results in a hit as a result of a variable display game, but in many cases it results in a loss, and if it does not result in a result, it becomes a continuation performance of a developed reach. The reach corresponding to the variable display command A, the variable display command B, or the variable display command C is a connecting effect of the developed reach.

The display screen 616 shown in FIG. 56(3) is a display screen after the reach effect, and is a display screen of the short SP reach effect developed from the reach effect. The short SP reach performance is positioned as a so-called developed reach with low reliability, and produces a developed reach with low reliability in a relatively short performance time. For example, the short SP reach performance varies the medium symbol in a manner different from the normal reach to create a higher expectation than the normal reach. Note that the gaming machine 10 performs the first embodiment, the second embodiment,
An effect of changing the thickness of the outline as described in the third embodiment or an effect of missing a part of the pattern may be performed.

The display screen 618 shown in FIG. 57(1) is a display screen after the reach effect, and is a display screen of the long SP reach effect developed from the reach effect. The long SP reach performance is positioned as a so-called highly reliable developed reach, and produces a highly reliable developed reach with a relatively long performance time. For example, the long SP reach effect suggests the validity of the game result based on the success or failure of the battle effect, which is performed by hiding the large symbol group 501.
Create a sense of expectation that is higher than reach.

Although the gaming machine 10 is supposed to produce a short SP reach and a long SP reach via a normal reach, it also produces a two-stage developed reach that develops into a long SP reach via a short SP reach via a normal reach and a short SP reach. can.

The display screen 620 shown in FIG. 57(2) shows the short S corresponding to the variable display commands B and C.
This is a display screen of the fluctuating hit performance after the P reach performance. The display screen 620 shows a large pattern group 501
A set of three symbols "3", which is a winning pattern, is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the pattern “3” is a set of three.
is an example of a winning mode. In addition, the display screen 620 includes a winning effect display 621 in its display contents. The winning performance display 621 displays, at approximately the center of the display screen 620, a performance image including the characters "Congratulations!" in fireworks indicating a winning result, and a message "Jackpot!!". The display screen 620 moves and displays the large symbol group 501 to a corner to secure a display area for the winning performance display 621. Further, the display screen 620 displays the large symbol group 501 in a reduced size to secure a display area for the winning performance display 621. In addition, the display screen 620 hides the large symbol group 501 and displays the winning performance display 6.
21 display areas may be secured.

The display screen 624 shown in FIG. 58(1) is a display screen that displays symbol combinations as fluctuation results corresponding to any of the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C. The display screen 624 is the display screen after the short SP reach effect in the case of the variable display effect corresponding to the variable display command A, and the display screen after the long SP reach effect in the case of the variable display effect corresponding to the variable display command B. This is a display screen after a medium hit performance, and in the case of a variable display performance corresponding to the variable display command C, it is a display screen after a short SP reach via long SP reach performance or a fluctuating hit performance.

The display screen 624 stops displaying a set of three symbols "3" which are a win pattern in each of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502. On the display screen 624, the pending consumption display 506 makes the frame blank (blank) to indicate that the special figure fluctuation display game is in a stopped state.

The display screen 626 shown in FIG. 58(2) is a fanfare display screen. Display screen 62
6 includes a fanfare performance display 627 similar to the probability performance display 621 of the probability performance during fluctuation in the display contents. The fanfare performance display 627 displays a performance image containing the characters "Congratulations!" in fireworks indicating a win and a message "Jackpot!!" at approximately the center of the display screen 626. The display screen 626 hides the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502. Further, the display screen 626 hides the pending display 505 and the pending expiry display 506. After displaying the fanfare display screen, the gaming machine 10 displays a winning round display and an interval display.

Next, a preview effect pattern selection table common to variable display commands A, B, and C will be explained using FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the preview performance pattern selection table and the reliability of the preview performance pattern according to the fourth embodiment.

The preview performance pattern selection table (win) shown in FIG. 59(1) is referred to when the performance control device 300 selects a preview performance as the display performance corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C. Incidentally, the variable display commands A, B, and C are all variable display commands that are selected when deriving the win.

When the performance control device 300 receives the variable display commands A, B, and C and determines the preview performance, it selects the preview performance pattern YP1 corresponding to the confirmed preview performance with a selection probability YR01 to correspond to the highly reliable preview performance. A preview performance pattern YP2 corresponding to the low reliability preview performance is selected with a selection probability YR02, and a preview performance pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability preview performance is selected with a selection probability YR03. for example,
The selection probability YR01 is a probability of 10%, defining the confirmed preview performance as a performance with a low appearance frequency. The selection probability YR02 is a 70% probability, and the selection probability YR03 is a 20% probability.By setting the appearance rate of the preview effect pattern YP2 higher than that of the preview effect pattern YP3, the probability of the preview effect pattern YP2 is increased. Demonstrate reliability.

The preview performance pattern selection table (missing) shown in FIG. 59(2) is
When selecting a preview effect as a display effect corresponding to a variable display command (for example, variable display commands D, E, F) that derives "miss" while being assigned the same effect as variable display commands A, B, and C, Referenced.

When the performance control device 300 receives the variable display commands D, E, and F and determines the preview performance, it selects the preview performance pattern YP1 corresponding to the confirmed preview performance with a selection probability YR11, and supports the highly reliable preview performance. A preview performance pattern YP2 corresponding to the low reliability preview performance is selected with a selection probability YR12, and a preview performance pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability preview performance is selected with a selection probability YR13. for example,
The selection probability YR11 is a probability of 0% in order to produce a confirmed preview performance. Selection probability YR12
is a 10% probability, the selection probability YR13 is a 90% probability, and the preview production pattern YP
The low reliability of the preview performance pattern YP3 is produced by setting the appearance rate when the preview performance pattern YP3 misses higher than that of the preview performance pattern YP2.

The reliability of the preview performance pattern shown in FIG. 59 (3) includes the probability of winning, and the variable display commands A, B, C, D, in addition to the preview performance pattern selection table (hit) and the preview performance pattern selection table (miss). Determined by the distribution ratio of E and F. According to the preview performance pattern selection table (hit), the preview performance pattern selection table (miss), and other conditions, the reliability of the preview performance pattern is that the preview performance pattern YP1 corresponding to the confirmed preview performance has a reliability of YE1, The preview performance pattern YP2 corresponding to the highly reliable preview performance has a reliability level YE2, and the preview performance pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability preview performance has a reliability level YE3. For example, reliability YE1 is 100% reliable for producing a confirmed notice, reliability YE2 is 50% reliable for producing a high-reliability notice, and reliability YE3 is reliable for producing a low-reliability notice. The degree is 5%.

In addition, the preview performance pattern selection table (win) and the preview performance pattern selection table (
The deviation) is common to the variable display commands A, B, and C, but it may be provided for each. Furthermore, when the gaming machine 10 has a plurality of gaming modes and gaming states, the preview performance pattern selection table (win) and the preview performance pattern selection table (loss) may be common to all gaming modes and gaming states, It may be different. In addition, the reliability of the preview performance pattern includes the probability of winning, and the fluctuation of the variable display commands A, B, C, D, E, and F, in addition to the preview performance pattern selection table (hit) and the preview performance pattern selection table (miss). Although it is determined by the percentage, the reliability of the preview performance pattern may be set in advance for the preview performance pattern.What is the preview performance pattern selection table (hit) and the preview performance pattern selection table (miss)? , the selection probabilities corresponding to the reliability of each preview performance pattern are set.

Next, the selection probability of the specific effect pattern executed when the variable display commands A, B, and C are received will be explained using FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect pattern selection probability according to the fourth embodiment.

The specific performance pattern refers to a combination pattern of performances after the reach performance in the second half variation. The specific performance pattern regarding the variable display commands A, B, and C is the specific performance pattern TP1.
, TP2, and TP3. The specific performance pattern TP1 is a specific performance pattern in which a short SP reach performance is executed after a reach performance to derive a hit. The specific performance pattern TP2 is a specific performance pattern in which a long SP reach performance is executed after the reach performance to derive a win. Specific performance pattern TP3 is long SP via short SP reach after reach performance
This is a specific performance pattern in which a hit is derived by executing a reach performance.

In variable display commands A, B, and C, specific performance pattern TP1 is selected with selection probability TR1, specific performance pattern TP2 is selected with selection probability TR2, and specific performance pattern TP3 is selected.
is selected with a selection probability TR3. Also, in the variable display commands D, E, and F, the specific performance patterns TP1, TP2, and TP3 are each selected with a required probability.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 sets the reliability TE1 to the specific performance pattern TP1, sets the reliability TE2 to the specific performance pattern TP2, and sets the reliability TE3 to the specific performance pattern TP3. For example, reliability TE1 is 5%, reliability TE2 is 10%, and reliability T
E3 is 20%. As a result, the gaming machine 10 has short SP reach performance, long SP reach performance, and long SP reach performance.
Reliability can be set to increase in the order of reach effect, short SP reach via long SP reach effect. Note that the gaming machine 10 may be set so that the reliability increases in the order of short SP reach effect, long SP reach effect via short SP reach effect, and long SP reach effect.

Note that the reliability levels TE1, TE2, and TE3 are based on the selection probabilities for the variable display commands D, E, and F, as well as the selection probabilities for the variable display commands A, B, and C.
It may vary depending on other parameters such as the distribution ratio of B, C, D, E, and F.

Selection of such a specific performance pattern is classified in more detail according to the form of the preview performance. For example, the probability of selecting a specific presentation pattern can be determined depending on whether a fixed notice, a low reliability notice, or a high reliability notice has been executed in the notice performance. In addition, it is not limited to the two-stage lottery in which a preview performance pattern is drawn at a lottery in the preview performance and then a specific performance pattern is drawn according to the lottery result of the preview performance pattern. It may also be a lottery.

Here, the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview effect in the case of winning, ie, the variable display commands A, B, and C, will be explained using FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each preview effect according to the fourth embodiment.

In the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 70% when a fixed notice is executed in the advance notice effect,
The long SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 10%, and the long SP reach effect via short SP reach is executed at a rate of 20%. In addition, the production control device 300 includes variable display commands A,
In the variable display effects based on B and C, when a low reliability notice is executed in the preview effect, the short SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 20%, the long SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 60%, and the short SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 60%. Execute the via long SP reach effect at a rate of 20%. In addition, in the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 10% when a highly reliable preview is executed in the advance notice effect,
The long SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and the long SP reach effect via short SP reach is executed at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect (20× Execute at a rate of a+10×b)%, execute long SP reach effect at a rate of (60×a+30×b)%, and execute long SP reach effect via short SP reach at a rate of (20×a+60×b)%. Execute. In this case, a is the probability of selecting a low-reliability forecast in the non-confirmed forecast, and b is the probability of selecting a high-reliability forecast in the non-confirmed forecast. However, it is assumed that a, b<1 and a+b=1.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, when the confirmed preview performance is executed, the short SP reach performance is more likely to be executed than the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via short SP reach performance. Thereby, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notice from becoming redundant when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, thereby making it possible to reduce a decrease in interest. Also,
The gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notice from becoming redundant and reduces interest by performing the winning performance during the fluctuation during the surplus time in the latter half of the fluctuation display performance based on the fluctuation display commands B and C. This makes it possible to reduce

Specifically, when a fixed notice performance is executed, the game machine 10 reduces the chances of the appearance of a long SP reach performance or a long SP reach performance via short SP reach, so that the game performance after the notice is redundant. Prevent it from becoming a thing.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 calculates the probability that the short SP reach performance will be selected when a low reliability notice is executed as a preview performance, and the probability that the short SP reach performance will be selected when a high reliability notice is executed as a preview performance. It's bigger than the probability.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows players who have lost their expectations due to the low reliability notice to
Opportunities that feel redundant are suppressed by P reach performance and long SP reach performance via short SP reach. In addition, the gaming machine 10 prevents players who have lost their sense of expectation due to the low reliability preview from further losing their sense of expectation due to the short SP reach performance, and prevents the player who has lost the sense of expectation due to the low reliability preview and the short SP reach performance with a low sense of expectation. It is possible to improve the game's interest by creating a sense of surprise in which a winning result is obtained even though the numbers overlap. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 can expand opportunities for players who have high expectations due to the highly reliable preview to feel interested through the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via short SP reach.

Note that the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance in the variable display commands A, B, and C may be made changeable depending on the game mode and game state. A modified example of changing the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each preview effect in the modified example of the fourth embodiment (part 1).
). FIG. 63 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each preview effect in a modification of the fourth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 has, for example, modes A, B, and C as a plurality of production modes, and mode transitions occur at a predetermined event trigger (which may be a timer trigger). The gaming machine 10 produces the gaming experience for each mode by properly using the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview presentation.

FIG. 62(1) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (mode A) for each preview effect. The specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance (mode A) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance described using FIG. 61. In mode A, the game machine 10 suppresses an opportunity where a player who has lost his sense of expectation due to a low reliability notice feels redundant due to the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via short SP reach. In addition, in mode A, the gaming machine 10 prevents a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low-reliability notice from further losing his or her sense of expectation due to a short SP reach performance, It is possible to improve interest by creating a sense of surprise that leads to a win even though the short SP reach performance overlaps with the short SP reach performance. On the other hand, in mode A, the gaming machine 10 can expand the opportunity for players who have high expectations due to the highly reliable preview to feel interested through the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via short SP reach.

FIG. 62(2) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (mode B) for each preview effect. In the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 100% and the long SP reach effect at a rate of 0% when a fixed notice is executed in the advance notice effect. Executes at a rate of 0%, and executes a long SP reach effect via short SP reach at a rate of 0%. In addition, in the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 0% when a low reliability preview is executed in the preview effect, and the long SP reach effect. The effect is executed at a rate of 70%, and the effect of long SP reach via short SP reach is executed at a rate of 30%. In addition, in the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 0% and the long SP reach effect when a highly reliable preview is executed in the preview effect. The effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and the effect of long SP reach via short SP reach is executed at a rate of 70%.

In this way, when the confirmed preview performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 executes the short SP reach performance without executing the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via short SP reach performance. Thereby, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notice from becoming redundant when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, thereby making it possible to reduce a decrease in interest. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 prevents the game performance after the advance notice from becoming redundant and reduces the drop in interest by performing the winning performance during the fluctuation in the surplus time in the second half of the fluctuation display performance based on the fluctuation display commands B and C. It makes it possible.

Specifically, the game machine 10 eliminates the appearance opportunity of the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via short SP reach when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, so that the game performance after the advance notice is redundant. Prevent it from becoming a thing.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 prevents the short SP reach performance from being selected when a low reliability notice or a high reliability notice is executed in the preview performance, so that the player who has a sense of expectation from the preview performance can avoid the long SP reach performance. Opportunities to feel interested can be expanded through short SP reach and long SP reach effects.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a feature that when a high-reliability preview is executed than when a low-reliability preview is executed in the preview performance, players who have higher expectations from the preview performance are more likely to receive a long SP reach via a short SP reach. You can expand your chances of feeling interested through the production.

FIG. 62(3) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (mode C) for each preview effect. In the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 70% and the long SP reach effect at a rate of 10% when a fixed notice is executed in the advance notice effect. Executed at a ratio of 20% for long SP reach effect via short SP reach
Execute at a rate of Furthermore, in the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 10% when the low reliability preview is executed in the preview effect, and the long SP reach effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C. Execute the production at a rate of 30%, short S
Executes long SP reach effect via P reach at a rate of 60%. In addition, the production control device 30
0 means that in variable display effects based on variable display commands A, B, and C, when a highly reliable preview is executed in the preview effect, the short SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 20%, and the long SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 60%. Execute at a ratio of 20% for long SP reach effect via short SP reach
Execute at a rate of

The gaming machine 10 calculates the probability that the short SP reach performance will be selected when a low reliability notice is executed as a preview performance, compared to the probability that the short SP reach performance will be selected when a high reliability notice is executed as a preview performance. is also smaller.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows players who have lost their expectations due to the low reliability notice to
P reach performance and long SP reach performance via short SP reach increase the chances of feeling redundant. In addition, the gaming machine 10 increases the possibility that a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low-reliability notice will lose further sense of expectation due to a short SP reach performance.

Such a gaming machine 10 is suitable for a performance mode in which the player feels interested in a casual game performance. Furthermore, such a gaming machine 10 has the effect of highlighting the features of each mode in comparison between modes.

The gaming machine 10 has a plurality of gaming states, for example, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state A.
, B, and changes the gaming state based on a predetermined event trigger. The gaming machine 10 produces a gaming experience for each gaming state by properly using a specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice performance for each gaming state.

Note that the normal gaming state and the specific gaming states A and B only need to be distinguishable as different gaming states. For example, the normal gaming state has a low probability, mainly special drawing 1 game playing progress, and no general power support, The specific gaming state A has a high probability, mainly the special figure 2 game progress, and support for general electric power is provided, and the specific gaming state B has a low probability, mainly the progress of the special figure 2 game, and no general electric support. Note that the specific game state B may have other game characteristics such as high probability, mainly special figure 1 game progress, and no general power support.

FIG. 63(1) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (normal game state) for each preview performance. The specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance (normal game state) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance described using FIG. 61. The game machine 10 suppresses the chance that a player who has lost his sense of expectation due to a low reliability notice feels redundant due to a long SP reach performance or a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach in a normal game state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 prevents a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low-reliability notice in a normal gaming state from further losing a sense of expectation due to a short SP reach performance, and prevents a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low-reliability notice in a normal gaming state from further losing a sense of expectation due to a low-reliability notice with a low sense of expectation. Even though the short SP reach effect and the short SP reach effect overlap, it is possible to create a sense of surprise that leads to a win, thereby increasing interest. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 can expand the opportunity for a player who has a sense of expectation due to the highly reliable preview to feel interested in the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via short SP reach in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 63(2) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (specific game state A) for each preview effect. The specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance (specific game state A) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance described using FIG. 62(2).

In this way, when the confirmed preview performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 executes the short SP reach performance without executing the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via short SP reach performance. Thereby, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notice from becoming redundant when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, thereby making it possible to reduce a decrease in interest. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 prevents the game performance after the advance notice from becoming redundant and reduces the drop in interest by performing the winning performance during the fluctuation in the surplus time in the second half of the fluctuation display performance based on the fluctuation display commands B and C. It makes it possible.

Specifically, the game machine 10 eliminates the appearance opportunity of the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via short SP reach when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, so that the game performance after the advance notice is redundant. Prevent it from becoming a thing.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 prevents the short SP reach performance from being selected when a low reliability notice or a high reliability notice is executed in the preview performance, so that the player who has a sense of expectation from the preview performance can avoid the long SP reach performance. Opportunities to feel interested can be expanded through short SP reach and long SP reach effects.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a feature that when a high-reliability preview is executed than when a low-reliability preview is executed in the preview performance, players who have higher expectations from the preview performance are more likely to receive a long SP reach via a short SP reach. You can expand your chances of feeling interested through the production.

FIG. 63(3) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (specific game state B) for each preview performance. The specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance (specific game state B) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance described using FIG. 62(3).

The gaming machine 10 calculates the probability that the short SP reach performance will be selected when a low reliability notice is executed as a preview performance, compared to the probability that the short SP reach performance will be selected when a high reliability notice is executed as a preview performance. is also smaller.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows players who have lost their expectations due to the low reliability notice to
P reach performance and long SP reach performance via short SP reach increase the chances of feeling redundant. In addition, the gaming machine 10 increases the possibility that a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low-reliability notice will lose further sense of expectation due to a short SP reach performance.

Such a gaming machine 10 is suitable for a gaming state in which the player feels interested in a casual game performance. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 has the effect of highlighting the characteristics of each gaming state when comparing each gaming state. Further, such a gaming machine 10 assists the player in estimating the gaming state when the gaming state is made clear to the player.

It should be noted that the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance for each performance mode explained using FIG. 62 and the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance for each gaming state explained using FIG. 63 are only examples. The selection ratio may be as follows. Furthermore, although the production modes explained using FIG. 62 are modes A, B, and C, the division of production modes is not limited to three, but may be two, or four or more. There may be. Furthermore, although the gaming states explained using FIG. 63 are the normal gaming state and the specific gaming states A and B, the classification of the gaming states is not limited to three.
There may be two or four or more.

Further, the gaming state may be divided into two or more gaming states, which are normally treated as one, according to predetermined conditions. For example, even in the normal game state, the period from the end of general power support to the 20th variable display number may be classified as normal game state A, and the other normal game states as normal game state B. In addition, even if you are in the Fuden support gaming state, the first half of the first 50 out of 100 Fuden support fluctuation display times will be displayed in the Fuden support gaming state A.
, 51st and subsequent times may be classified as general power support gaming state B. Furthermore, even in a probability-variable (high-certainty) gaming state, the period after the probability variation until the detection of a predetermined trigger may be divided into a probability-variable gaming state A, and the period after the predetermined trigger is a probability-variable gaming state B. .

Furthermore, the transition of the classified gaming states may be unidirectional, such as from specific gaming state A to specific gaming state B, or from specific gaming state A to specific gaming state B, or from specific gaming state B to specific gaming state. It may be bidirectional as in A.

Next, a modification of the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B will be described using FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B1 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command B1 is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the production control device 300. The variable display command B1 is a command corresponding to a variable display performance of a variable time T1 (>T0).

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command B1, generates a variable display effect with a variable time T1, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. The fluctuation display command B1 is
Since the variation time is longer than that of the variable display command A, it has the aspect that it can perform more diverse effects than the variable display command A, but it also has the aspect that it takes longer to derive results than the variable display command A.

The production control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation within the variation time T1. The fluctuation display command B1 allocates time T11 (=T01) of the fluctuation time T1 to the first half fluctuation, and time T12 (>T02) to the second half fluctuation. Note that time T11 is equal to time T12.
shorter than

The second half of the variation display command B1 includes a case (performance pattern B01) that includes a preview performance at time T121, a reach performance at time T122, and a long SP reach performance at time T123 (performance pattern B01), a preview performance at time T121, and a time T122. There is a case (performance pattern B03) including a reach performance of , a fluctuating hit performance of time T125, and a short SP reach performance of time T124 (=T023).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 may perform a fluctuating winning performance prior to the short SP reach performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may divide the fluctuating winning performance into two, and sandwiching the short SP reach performance between the two halves of the fluctuating winning performance. Further, the gaming machine 10 may perform a winning effect during variation prior to the reach effect. Further, the gaming machine 10 may perform a winning performance during fluctuation prior to the preview performance. however,
When performing a fluctuating winning performance prior to the preview performance, the gaming machine 10 may replace the fluctuating winning performance with a freeze performance that does not guide the winning performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may insert subdivided winning effects during fluctuations at various locations in the second half fluctuations, such as before and after the reach effect.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute the performance pattern B01 and the performance pattern B03 when receiving the variable display command B1, and when the performance pattern B01 and the performance pattern B03 are executed in the advance notice performance, the performance control device 300 executes the performance pattern B03 rather than the performance pattern B01. We make it easy to select.

The gaming machine 10 makes it easier to select the performance pattern B03 that can notify the result before the performance pattern B01, since even if the performance after the execution of the confirmed preview performance stimulates expectations, it will not contribute much to improving the interest. . As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and improves interest by enabling the game performance after the result is determined even during variable display. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the game performance after the advance notice non-redundant by the extent that the time T124 of the short SP reach performance is shorter than the time T123 of the long SP reach performance. Further, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the time T125 of the winning performance during fluctuation to the performance after the winning is confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 uses a variable display command B1 whose variation time is longer than that of the variable display command A.
In this, the game result is guided by a short SP reach effect similar to the variable display command A, and a non-redundant game progress can be realized by allocating a fluctuating winning effect to the surplus time.

Note that the variable display command B1 is for deriving a hit as a result of a short SP reach effect or as a result of a long SP reach effect, and the gaming machine 10 uses the command for deriving a loss as a result as a variable display command B1. Prepare separately.

Next, another example of a modification of the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B is shown in FIG.
Explain using. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B2 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command B2 is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the production control device 300. The variable display command B2 is a command corresponding to the variable display performance of the variable time T1 (>T0).

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command B2, generates a variable display effect with a variable time T1, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. The fluctuation display command B2 is
Since the variation time is longer than that of the variable display command A, it has the aspect that it can perform more diverse effects than the variable display command A, but it also has the aspect that it takes longer to derive results than the variable display command A.

The production control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation within the variation time T1. The fluctuation display command B2 allocates time T11 (=T01) of the fluctuation time T1 to the first half fluctuation, and time T12 (>T02) to the second half fluctuation. Note that time T11 is equal to time T12.
shorter than

The second half of the variation display command B2 includes a case (performance pattern B01) that includes a preview performance at time T121, a reach performance at time T122, and a long SP reach performance at time T123 (performance pattern B01), a preview performance at time T121, and a time T122. A case that includes a reach performance of , a fluctuating hit performance of time T123 (performance pattern B04), a preview performance of time T121, and a time T126
(=T122+T123) There is a case (performance pattern B05) including a winning effect during fluctuation.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 may perform the winning effect during fluctuation without performing the short SP reach effect. Further, the gaming machine 10 may perform not only the short SP reach performance but also the winning performance during fluctuation without performing the reach performance.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute the performance pattern B01, the performance pattern B04, and the performance pattern B05 when receiving the variable display command B2, and when the hit performance is executed in the preview performance, the production pattern B01 can be executed. The effect patterns B04 and B05 are also made easier to select.

The gaming machine 10 selects the performance patterns B04 and B05 that can notify the result before the performance pattern B01, because even if the anticipation is stimulated in the performance after the execution of the confirmed preview performance, it will not contribute much to improving the interest. Make it easier. As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and improves interest by enabling the game performance after the result is determined even during variable display. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the game performance for the time T123 of the long SP reach performance or the game performance after the advance notification non-redundant. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the time T122 of the long SP reach performance plus the time T122 of the reach performance to the performance after the winning is confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 uses a variable display command B2 whose variation time is longer than that of the variable display command A.
In this case, a non-redundant game progress can be realized by guiding the game result using a confirmed preview performance. Note that the variable display command B2 is for deriving a win as a result, and the gaming machine 10 prepares a command for deriving a loss as a result separately from the variable display command B2.

Next, a modified example of the appearance timing of the confirmed preview performance will be described using FIG. 66. Figure 6
6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the appearance timing of a confirmed preview performance in a modification of the fourth embodiment.
When a confirmed character that foretells a confirmed win appears as a confirmed preview performance, the gaming machine 10:
Determined character appearance patterns 1 to 5 can be used. Note that the confirmed character may be displayed in a display format such as a message indicating the probability of winning, or in a display format such as a rainbow display that allows normal players to naturally sense that the winning is confirmed. It may be possible to guide the confirmation of a win by using a display format that is not shared with other effects so that a player with accumulated gaming experience can understand the confirmation of a win. . Further, the confirmed character does not necessarily have to be a character, but may be a cut-in, a message itself, or the like.

The confirmed character appearance pattern 1 is a performance mode in which a confirmed character appears only once during the performance period of the confirmed preview performance. At this time, the appearance period of the confirmed character can be arbitrarily set within the range of the confirmed preview performance period.

Confirmed character appearance patterns 2 and 3 are performance modes in which a confirmed character continues to appear beyond the performance period of the confirmed preview performance. The appearance period of the confirmed character in the confirmed character appearance pattern 2 can be arbitrarily set within the range of the reach effect period and the short SP reach effect period. The appearance period of the confirmed character in the confirmed character appearance pattern 3 can be arbitrarily set within the range of the variable display period that exceeds the short SP reach effect period and includes the variable medium hit effect period. Note that the confirmed character may change its display mode during its appearance, for example, the amount of potential value that the player can obtain by changing from a caterpillar to a butterfly (for example, the amount of potential value that the player can obtain by changing from a caterpillar to a butterfly) The presence or absence of the game, the size of the game value that can be acquired, etc.) may be provided.

The confirmed character appearance pattern 4 is a performance mode in which a confirmed character appears twice or more during the performance period of the confirmed preview performance. At this time, the appearance period of the confirmed character can be arbitrarily set within the range of the variable display period starting from the confirmed preview presentation period. In addition, the confirmed character may change its display mode in addition to its appearance frequency and appearance timing, and the magnitude of the expected value that the player can obtain is guided from the appearance frequency, appearance timing, and display mode. You can do it like this.

The confirmed character appearance pattern 5 is a performance mode in which two or more confirmed characters appear during the performance period of the confirmed preview performance. For example, in the confirmed character appearance pattern 5, the confirmed character A appears from the confirmed preview presentation period to the ready-to-reach presentation period, and the confirmed character B appears from the ready-to-reach presentation period that overlaps with the appearance of the confirmed character A to beyond the ready-to-reach presentation period.

Note that, like the confirmed character B, the confirmed character A may appear beyond the reach effect period, or may appear at the same timing. Further, when the confirmed character A is a character of a confirmed preview performance, when the character is made to appear in a reach performance, a short SP reach performance, or a long SP reach performance, the character may be changed to a probability mode. Although the confirmed character A and the confirmed character B are made to appear at overlapping timings, three or more confirmed characters may be made to appear at overlapping timings.

Note that it may be possible to change the combination of two or more confirmed characters or the overlap mode, or it may be possible to guide the size of the expected value that the player can obtain from the combination or overlap mode of the confirmed characters.

Next, FIG. 6 shows a modification example of the display screen during the game corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C.
This will be explained using 7. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game according to a modification of the fourth embodiment.

A display screen 628 shown in FIG. 67(1) is a display screen during freeze effect, and is a display screen corresponding to the second half variation common to variation display commands A, B, and C. The freeze effect can be executed not only as a fixed preview effect but also as a guaranteed effect during fluctuation. The display screen 628 includes a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special pattern 1 reservation number display 503, and a special pattern 2 reservation number display 504.
, pending display 505 , pending completion display 506 , pending icon 507 , pending completion icon 508
is included in the display content.

The display screen 628 displays a freeze display 629 superimposed on the large symbol group 501. The freeze display 629 displays the message "Freeze Warning" and the message "WARNING" in an area partitioned by yellow and black striped warning tape. In addition, the display screen 628 displays a small symbol group 502 overlapping the freeze display 629 in place of the large symbol group 501 to clearly indicate that the variable display is in progress.

A display screen 630 shown in FIG. 67(2) is a display screen following the display screen 628. On the display screen 630, a character 631 appearing from the left end of the display area pushes the freeze display 629 toward the right end to perform a release effect of the freeze effect. The characters 631 include, for example, a pig-like character and a message tape "Congratulations!".

A display screen 632 shown in FIG. 67(3) is a display screen following the display screen 630. On the display screen 632, the character 631 who has pushed the freeze display 629 to the right side exits to the right side while guiding the winning confirmation with a message tape "Congratulations!".
The display screen 632 has a large pattern group 501 in the display area where the freeze display 629 is pushed out to the right end.
Display with good visibility. Moreover, the pattern display mode of the large pattern group 501 can be changed before and after it overlaps with the freeze display 629. The display screen 632 displays a large symbol group 501 in a symbol combination that results in a winning pattern.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a freeze effect. The gaming machine 10 can execute the freeze performance as a winning performance during fluctuation. Such a freeze performance displays the large symbol group 501 in a symbol combination that becomes a winning mode as shown in the display screen 632 when the fluctuating winning performance is executed after the short SP reach performance. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, the large symbol group 501 may be displayed in a symbol combination that becomes a ready-to-win mode when a fluctuating hit performance is executed before a short SP reach performance.

Such a gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and improves interest by enabling game performance after the result is determined even during variable display. .

It should be noted that the game machine 10 is capable of giving a preview that the result of the game is a win; however,
It is not limited to winning, but may also be a preview effect that the result of the game is a special result.
The special results include, for example, a hit, a stop of a specific symbol, a stop of a special symbol (such as a zone entry symbol, etc.). The stopping of a specific symbol is not limited to a hit, and includes, for example, the stopping of a predetermined chance symbol. The chance symbols are predetermined symbol combinations, for example, permutation combinations such as left symbol "1", middle symbol "2", right symbol "3", etc. Further, the stoppage of special symbols includes the stoppage of symbols with special meanings. Note that the special symbol may not be displayed in normal times. For example, special symbols may be symbols that guide mode changes, symbols that guide entry into a predetermined zone (gaming state, performance state, etc.), or symbols that notify the occurrence or development of a reach, or the occurrence or occurrence of a hit. It may be a pattern to guide you.

The gaming machine 10 (including the modified example) of the fourth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 executes a preview performance (for example, a confirmed preview performance, a low reliability preview performance, a high reliability preview performance) that foretells the result of the game (for example, the special map 1 game, the special map 2 game). Possible advance notice production means (for example, game control device 100, production control device 300, display device 4
1) and specific presentation means (for example,
A game control device 100, a performance control device 300, and a display device 41). The preview performance means includes a confirmed preview performance (for example, a confirmed preview performance, Fig. 56 (1)) that provides a definite notice that the game result is a win, and a predetermined notice that the game result is a win with a predetermined reliability. It is possible to selectively execute unconfirmed preview performance (for example, low reliability preview performance, high reliability preview performance, FIGS. 55(2) and (3)). The specific performance means performs the derivation process at a first time (for example, time T1
24), and a second specific performance (for example, a short SP reach performance) in which the derivation process is performed in a second time period (for example, time T123), which is longer than the first time. , long SP reach performance) can be selectively executed, and when the preview performance means executes the confirmed preview performance, the second specific performance is selected (for example, 10%, Fig. 6
1) The ratio at which the first specific effect is selected (for example, 70%, FIG. 61) is increased.

(2) When executing an unconfirmed preview performance (for example, a low reliability preview performance, a high reliability preview performance), the preview performance means in (1) is configured to confirm that the result of the game is a win with a first reliability level. (For example, 5%, Figure 59 (3)) A first unconfirmed preview performance (for example, a low reliability preview performance) and a first non-determined preview performance (for example, a low reliability preview performance) that announces that the game result is a win with higher reliability than the first. It is possible to selectively execute a second non-determined preview performance (for example, a high-reliability preview performance) that gives a preview with a reliability level of 2 (for example, 50%, FIG. 59 (3)), and the specific performance means is a game When deriving the winning result as a result, when the preview performance means executes the second unconfirmed preview performance, the proportion of the first specific performance selected (for example, 10%, FIG. 61) is The proportion (for example, 20%, FIG. 61) of selecting the first specific performance when the first unconfirmed preview performance is executed is increased.

(3) The gaming machine 10 executes a preview performance (for example, a confirmed preview performance, a low reliability preview performance, a high reliability preview performance) that foretells the result of the game (for example, the special map 1 game, the special map 2 game). Possible advance notice production means (for example, game control device 100, production control device 300, display device 4
1) and specific presentation means (for example,
A game control device 100, a performance control device 300, and a display device 41). The preview presentation means is a fixed notice presentation (for example, a fixed notice presentation) that provides a definite notice that the result of the game is a special result (for example, a hit, a stop of a specific symbol (chance, etc.), a stop of a special symbol (such as a zone entry symbol, etc.)). ,
Confirmed preview performance (Figure 56 (1))) and non-confirmed preview performance (for example, low reliability preview performance, high reliability preview performance, Figure 55 (2
), (3)) can be selectively executed. The specific performance means includes a first specific performance (for example, short SP reach performance) that performs the derivation process in a first period (for example, time T124), and a second period (for example, short SP reach performance) that performs the derivation process in a second period different from the first period (time T124). For example, it is possible to selectively perform a second specific performance (for example, a long SP reach performance) performed at time T123), and when the preview performance means executes the confirmed preview performance, the second specific performance is performed at time T123). The proportion at which the first specific effect is selected (for example, 70%, Fig. 61) is higher than the proportion at which it is selected (for example, 10%, Fig. 61).
).

(4) When executing an undetermined preview performance (for example, a low reliability preview performance, a high reliability preview performance), the preview performance means in (3) is configured to first confirm that the result of the game is a special result. Every time(
For example, a first non-determined preview performance (for example, a low reliability preview performance) that announces at 5% (Figure 59 (3)), and a first unconfirmed preview performance that is different from the first reliability level to indicate that the result of the game is a special result. It is possible to selectively execute a second non-determined preview performance (for example, a high-reliability preview performance) that gives a preview with a reliability level of 2 (for example, 50%, FIG. 59 (3)), and the specific performance means is a game When deriving a special result as a result of The ratio of selecting the first specific effect (for example, 20%, FIG. 61) when the first unconfirmed preview effect is executed is increased.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to fourth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine including a game board 800 (see FIG. 28), the game machine of the fifth embodiment is applicable to either. Note that configurations similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments may be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 of the fifth embodiment creates a sense of expectation for further changes and maintains a further sense of expectation for the result of the game even if there is a preview notification effect due to the display mode of the starting memory that lacks the sense of expectation. First, the display screen of the gaming machine 10 during a game will be explained using FIG. 68.
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 650 is the display screen after the variable display starts. The display screen 650 shows large symbol group 5
01, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 pending number display 503, a special figure 2 pending number display 504, a pending display (pending standby display) 505, and a pending consumption display 506 are included in the display contents.

The hold display (hold standby display) 505 displays the number of hold icons (hold standby icons) 660 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold count display 503. The hold icon 660 has a double-structured display mode, with a colored sphere inside a transparent sphere. The pending consumption display 506 displays a pending consumption icon 655. Similarly to the pending icon 660, the pending extinguishing icon 655 is also
This display mode has a double structure in which a colored sphere is contained within a transparent sphere, but it is a display mode that can be distinguished from the hold icon 660 because it is larger than the hold icon 660.

Here, the display mode of the double structure of the hold icon 660 will be explained using FIG. 69.
FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a double structure of a hold icon according to the fifth embodiment.
The pending icon 660 includes an outer shell icon 661 and an inner core icon 662 as display elements. The pending icon 660 has a double structure display mode in which a transparent and spherical outer shell icon 661 encloses a colored and spherical inner core icon 662. The inner core icon 662 has a function (expectation level notification function) of notifying the degree of expectation for the result of the variable display game by its display mode. The outer shell icon 661 has a function of suggesting a possibility that the expectation level reported by the inner core icon 662 will change (an expectation level change suggestion function). In addition, the pending consumption icon 65
5 also has the same configuration as the hold icon 660.

Next, a display mode that clearly guides the expectation level of the inner core icon 662 will be described using FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the display mode of the inner core icon and the expectation level according to the fifth embodiment. The inner core icon 662 has inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 as display modes that clearly guide the expectation level.

The inner core icon display mode pt01 is a standard (default) display mode that does not provide any indication of the degree of expectation. The inner core icon display mode pt01 is, for example, a white spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt02 is a display mode that indicates a low expectation level (for example, a low expectation level of about 5%). The inner core icon display mode pt02 is, for example, a green spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt03 is a display mode that guides a medium level of expectation (for example, a medium level of expectation of about 20%). The inner core icon display mode pt03 is, for example, a blue spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt04 is a display mode that indicates a high expectation level (for example, a high expectation level of about 30%). The inner core icon display mode pt04 is, for example, a yellow spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt05 is a display mode that guides an extremely high expectation level (for example, an extremely high expectation level of about 80%). The inner core icon display mode pt05 is
For example, it is a red spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt06 is a display mode for guiding confirmation of winning (for example, confirmation of winning). The inner core icon display mode pt06 is, for example,
It has a spherical shape with rainbow colors and a pattern with the word ``to'' on it.

Next, a display mode that vaguely guides the expectation level of the inner core icon 662 will be described using FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode that vaguely guides the expectation level of the inner core icon according to the fifth embodiment. The inner core icon 662 has inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, pt0 as display modes that clearly guide expectations.
6 was previously explained. The inner core icon 662 is the inner core icon display mode pt01
, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 can be displayed at the same time to indicate which of the expectations indicated by the two color elements is to be shown.

The inner core icon 662 shown in FIG. 71(1) has an inner core icon display mode pt02, and clearly indicates the low expectation level with a green spherical shape. Inner core icon 66 shown in FIG. 71(2)
In 2a, the inner core icon display mode pt02 is set to 75%, and the inner core icon display mode pt03 is set to 25%.
It is a display mode including %. The inner core icon 662a uses a spherical shape with a gradation of 75% green and 25% blue to vaguely indicate whether the expectation is low or medium. The inner core icon 662b shown in FIG. 71(3) has an inner core icon display mode pt
This display mode includes 50% of the inner core icon display mode pt02 and 50% of the inner core icon display mode pt03. The inner core icon 662b uses a spherical shape with a gradation of 50% green and 50% blue to vaguely guide whether the level of expectation is low or medium. The inner core icon 662c shown in FIG. 71(4) has an inner core icon display mode pt02 of 25%, an inner core icon display mode pt02 of
This is a display mode containing 75% of 03. The inner core icon 662c uses a spherical shape with a gradation of 25% green and 75% blue to vaguely indicate whether the expectation is low or medium.

In this way, the inner core icon 662 has inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt
03, pt04, pt05, and pt06, it is possible to not only clarify and guide the level of expectation, but also to guide the user in an unclear manner while indicating the possibility of the level of expectation.

Note that the inner core icons 662a, 662b, and 662c show the mixture of two colors using a gradation, but they may also be shown using a mixture of two colors in a mosaic or stripe pattern, or the original color can be recreated by mixing colors. It may be shown in an unclear manner, or it may be shown by animation the colors that can be changed without uniquely indicating which color it is. Moreover, although the inner core icons 662a, 662b, and 662c have shown a mixture of two colors, they may also represent a mixture of three or more colors.

By using such an inner core icon 662 to give a notice of suspension, the gaming machine 10 can provide not only a clear notification of expectation level but also an unclear notification of expectation level.
In addition, even when the gaming machine 10 issues an unclear expectation level notification, it can provide guidance on candidates for the display mode to be changed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can suggest the possibility when guiding candidates of the display mode to be changed.

Next, the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 will be explained using FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the display mode and changeability of the outer shell icon according to the fifth embodiment. Although the outer shell icon 661 does not have a display mode that directly guides expectations, the inner core icon 66
It has a display mode that guides the change possibilities of 2. The outer shell icon 661 is the inner core icon 66
2 to produce the appearance of the inner core icon 662, and also provide a trigger for changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662 when the outer shell icon 661 disappears.

The outer shell icon 661 shown in FIG. 72(1) is a standard mode, and is a display mode in which the inner core icon 662 (not shown) contained therein is easily observed by transparent display. The outer shell icon 661a shown in FIG. 72(2) is the outer shell change notice mode a. The outer shell icon 661a is a display mode that shows a slight crack in the outer shell. The outer shell icon 661a indicates the possibility that the outer shell icon 661 may disappear, that is, the display mode of the inner core icon 662 may change, based on the appearance that the outer shell is cracked. Note that the outer shell icon 661a also provides guidance that the possibility of change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662 is not large because the cracks in the outer shell are small.

The outer shell icon 661b shown in FIG. 72(3) is the outer shell change notice mode b. The outer shell icon 661b is a display mode showing that the outer shell has many cracks. Outer shell icon 66
1b shows the possibility of the outer shell icon 661 disappearing, that is, the possibility of changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662, based on the appearance that the outer shell has many cracks. In addition, the outer shell icon 661
b also indicates that the display mode of the inner core icon 662 is highly likely to change because there are many cracks in the outer shell.

The outer shell icon 661c shown in FIG. 72(4) is the outer shell change notice mode c. The outer shell icon 661c is a display mode showing how the outer shell collapses and disappears. Outer shell icon 661c
From the appearance of the outer shell collapsing and disappearing, the outer shell icon 661 disappears, that is, the inner core icon 6
62. It guides you through changes in the display mode of 62. The pending icon 660 changes the display mode of the inner core icon 662 using the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661 as a trigger.

Note that the outer shell icons 661a, 661b, and 661c are broken due to cracks.
1, the possibility of the outer shell icon 661 disappearing, that is, the possibility of changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662, may be shown in other ways.

By suggesting the possibility of change of the inner core icon 662 using such an outer shell icon 661, the gaming machine 10 can display the inner core icon 66 even if there is no change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662.
It is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the change in the display mode of No. 2. Note that the game machine 10 has an outer shell icon 6.
The number, size, shape, etc. of the cracks 61 may indicate the magnitude of the change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662. For example, when the outer shell icon 661 generates many cracks and disappears, the gaming machine 10 raises the display mode of the inner core icon 662 by one rank (for example,
The inner core icon display mode pt01 changes to the inner core icon display mode pt02), and when the outer shell icon 661 disappears with only a slight crack, the display mode of the inner core icon 662 is upgraded by two ranks (for example, the inner core icon display mode changes by two ranks). From pt01 to inner core icon display mode p
(change to t03).

Next, the change pattern of the hold icon 660 will be explained using FIGS. 73 and 74.
FIG. 73 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a change pattern of the hold icon according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a change pattern of the hold icon according to the fifth embodiment.
It is.

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(1) shows how the inner core icon 662 changes the display mode while the outer shell icon 661 does not change the display mode, and the display mode of the pending icon 660 changes. The inner core icon 662 has a standard display mode (
For example, from the inner core icon display mode pt01), through the inner core change preview modes a, b, and c, to the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt02), which is one level higher in expectation than the initial mode.
) (successful pending change effect by the inner core icon 662). At this time, the inner core change preview modes a, b, and c become display modes in which the inner core icon display mode pt01 and the inner core icon display mode pt02 are mixed.

According to such a hold icon change pattern, the inner core icon 662 changes the display form even when the outer shell icon 661 does not change the display form, thereby determining the possibility of change in the hold display form and the destination of the change. can be produced.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(2) shows how the outer shell icon 661 and the inner core icon 662 change the display form, and the display form of the hold icon 660 changes. The inner core icon 662 changes from a standard display mode that is an initial mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt01) to a standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt01) that is one level higher in expectation than the initial mode through inner core change notice modes a, b, and c. The icon display mode changes to pt02). At this time, the inner core change preview modes a, b, and c are the inner core icon display mode pt01 and the inner core icon display mode p.
The display mode is a mixture of t02 and t02. Further, the outer shell icon 661 disappears from the standard mode, which is the initial mode, through the outer shell change notice modes a, b, and c. The gaming machine 10 has an inner core icon 66
2 is a standard display mode with one step higher expectation level than the initial mode (for example, inner core icon display mode p
By disappearing the outer shell icon 661 at the timing of the change to t02), the possibility of change in the pending display mode and the destination of the change can be determined from both the inner core icon 662 display mode change and the outer shell icon 661 display mode change. It is possible to perform a performance (a successful performance of pending change using the outer shell icon 661). In addition, since such a pending icon change pattern involves the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, the change destination of the inner core icon 662 may be set to a standard display mode with a high expectation level of two or more levels (for example, inner core icon display mode pt04). good.

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(3) shows how the inner core icon 662 changes the display mode while the outer shell icon 661 does not change the display mode, and the display mode of the pending icon 660 changes. The inner core icon 662 has a standard display mode (
For example, from the inner core icon display mode pt01), through the inner core change preview modes a, b, and c, to the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt02), which is one level higher in expectation than the initial mode.
) without changing to the standard display mode that becomes the initial mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt0
Return to 1) (pending change failure performance). The gaming machine 10 is designed to meet such expectations (for example,
By using a pending icon change pattern that does not involve promotion from the inner core icon display mode pt01 to the inner core icon display mode pt02, it is possible to secure frequent opportunities to perform the pending performance.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(4) shows how the outer shell icon 661 and the inner core icon 662 change the display form, and the display form of the hold icon 660 changes. The inner core icon 662 changes from a standard display mode that is an initial mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt01) to a standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt01) that is one level higher in expectation than the initial mode through inner core change notice modes a, b, and c. Although the icon display mode pt02) does not change and returns to the standard display mode that is the initial mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt01), the outer shell icon 661 changes from the standard mode that is the initial mode to the outer shell change notice mode a, By disappearing after going through b and c, the display mode changes to the display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt02) at a different timing (pending change relief effect). The gaming machine 10 changes the failure of the inner core icon 662 to the outer shell icon 6.
It can be rescued by changing 61. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 can correct a failure in changing the outer shell icon 661 by changing the inner core icon 662. Such a gaming machine 10 can create high expectations due to the presence of the pending change rescue performance even if the pending change performance fails.

In the pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 74(1), the outer shell icon 661 changes the display mode while the inner core icon 662 does not change the display mode.
60 shows that the display mode of No. 60 does not change. The inner core icon 662 remains unchanged in its initial standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt01). Outer shell icon 6
61 changes from the standard mode, which is the initial mode, to the outer shell change notice modes a and b, but returns to the standard mode without disappearing. The gaming machine 10 secures frequent opportunities to perform a pending performance by using a pending icon change pattern that does not involve such development of expectations (for example, promotion from the inner core icon display mode pt01 to the inner core icon display mode pt02). be able to. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can ensure frequent opportunities to perform a pending performance using a pending icon change pattern that does not involve a change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662.

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 74(2) shows how the outer shell icon 661 changes the display mode while the inner core icon 662 does not change the display mode, and the display mode of the pending icon 660 changes. The outer shell icon 661 remains unchanged in the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt01) that is the initial mode of the inner core icon 662.
disappears from the standard mode, which is the initial mode, through the outer shell change preview modes a, b, and c. As a result, the inner core icon display mode pt01 changes to a standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt02) that is one level higher in expectation than the initial mode without going through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c. The gaming machine 10 can perform a surprising suspension notice performance by changing the outer shell icon 661 even if the inner core icon 662 does not change.

Note that intermediate display modes of the inner core icon 662 (for example, inner core change preview modes a, b, c)
The intermediate display modes of the outer shell icon 661 (for example, outer shell change notice modes a, b, c) are as follows:
It can be initialized at any time. Furthermore, the initialization of the intermediate display mode of the inner core icon 662 and the initialization of the intermediate display mode of the outer shell icon 661 may be performed at the same time or at different timings. For example, the intermediate display mode of the inner core icon 662 and the intermediate display mode of the outer shell icon 661 may be initialized each time the variable display is performed, or the intermediate display mode may be initialized after two or more variable displays. , and may be initialized by a predetermined initialization trigger.

Although the pending icon change pattern has been described for the pending icon 660, the same can be applied to the pending extinguishing icon 655. The intermediate display mode of the pending icon 660 may be initialized when transitioning to the pending extinguishing icon 655, or may be maintained.

Such a gaming machine 10 can create a greater sense of anticipation for the outcome of the game even if there is a pending display mode that lacks anticipation. Further, the gaming machine 10 can secure opportunities to execute the suspended performance at various timings.

Here, a modification of the display mode of the double structure of the hold icon 660 will be described using FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a double structure of a hold icon according to a modification of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 75(1) shows a first modification of the hold icon 660. Hold icon 66 of modification 1
4 has an outer shell icon 661 similar to the hold icon 660, but the hold icon 660
The difference is that the inner core icon 665 has a different size than the inner core icon 662. The size of the inner core icon 665 of the pending icon 664 can be changed depending on the level of expectation for notification and the possibility of notification. This allows the gaming machine 10 to perform various suspension notice performances.

FIG. 75(2) shows a second modification of the hold icon 660. Hold icon 66 of modification 2
6 has an outer shell icon 661 similar to the hold icon 660, but the hold icon 660
The difference is that the inner core icon 667 has a different shape than the inner core icon 662 of the above. The shape of the inner core icon 667 of the pending icon 666 can be changed depending on the level of expectation to be notified and the possibility of notification. This allows the gaming machine 10 to perform various suspension notice performances.

Although the size and shape of the inner core icon 662 have been described as a modification of the pending icon 660, the size and shape of the outer shell icon 661 may also be changed. Further, although a modification of the hold icon 660 has been described, the same can be applied to the hold extinguish icon 655.

Next, as a modification of the hold icon 660 that has a double structure as its initial state, a hold icon that does not have a double structure as its initial state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending standby display, a pending completion display, and an inner core icon row in a modification of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 76(1) shows a pending display 505 and a pending completion display 506. The hold display 505 displays a hold icon 669 corresponding to the number of holds. The pending consumption display 506 displays a pending consumption icon 668 during the variable display. The initial state of the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669 is a state in which they have only an outer shell icon and no inner core icon. The pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669 have the same shape and size, but may have different display modes to be distinguishable. Pending consumption icon 668 and pending icon 66
9 are arranged in a line at equal intervals. The pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669 are made distinguishable because the pending consumption icon 668 has a pedestal display (an oval display indicated by a broken line in the figure).

FIG. 76(2) shows the inner core icon row. The inner core icon row does not indicate the right to execute the start memory, but by overlapping with the hold display 505 or hold extinguishment display 506, the hold display 50
5 or the expectation level corresponding to the pending consumption display 506. The inner core icon row includes, in order from the left end, eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, 670e,
670f, 670g, and 670h are lined up. Note that the number of inner core icons is not limited to eight, and may be five corresponding to the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669, an infinite number of inner core icons, or one inner core icon. good. The inner core icon row is arranged in accordance with the arrangement interval between the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669. The expectation level set for each inner core icon constituting the inner core icon row is determined each time a suspended performance is performed, and the number of inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, pt06 is determined depending on the expectation to be produced. and combinations are different. For example, inner core icons 670a, 670c, 670d, 670e,
670f and 670h are inner core icon display modes pt01, inner core icons 670b are inner core icon display modes pt02, and inner core icons 670g are inner core icon display modes pt03.

FIG. 76(3) shows another example of the inner core icon row. For example, the inner core icon 670a is the inner core icon display mode pt01, the inner core icons 670b and 670f are the inner core icon display mode pt02, and the inner core icons 670c and 670g are the inner core icon display mode p
t03, the inner core icons 670d and 670h are in the inner core icon display mode pt04, and the inner core icon 670e is in the inner core icon display mode pt05. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can create various expectations by changing the display manner of the inner core icons forming the inner core icon row.

Next, FIG.
Explain using. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending extinguishing icon and a pending change in the pending icon in a modified example of the fifth embodiment.

The pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669 change to pending status when the inner core icon row scrolls on the back side of the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669 and then stops (pending icon roulette effect).

The pending icon roulette (pending icon roulette effect) shown in FIG. 77(1) displays one pending extinguishing icon 668 and four pending icons 669, and shows how the inner core icon row scrolls to the left on the back thereof. In FIG. 77(1), the inner core icon 670b overlaps the pending consumption icon 668, indicating that the display mode corresponds to the expectation level (low expectation level) set in the inner core icon display mode pt02. Also, the first hold icon 66
The inner core icon 670c overlaps with 9, indicating that the display mode corresponds to the expectation level (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. In addition, the inner core icon 670d overlaps the second hold icon 669, indicating that the display mode corresponds to the expectation level (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. Further, the inner core icon 670e overlaps the third hold icon 669, and it is announced that the display mode corresponds to the expectation level (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. Further, the inner core icon 670f overlaps with the fourth pending icon 669, indicating that the display mode corresponds to the expectation level (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01.

The pending icon roulette shown in FIG. 77(2) displays one pending extinguishing icon 668 and four pending icons 669, and the inner core icon row scrolls to the left on the back thereof. Eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, 670e, 670f
, 670g, and 670h are at positions shifted from the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669. The gaming machine 10 shifts the display position of the inner core icon row and displays eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 6 for the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669.
70c, 670d, 670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h correspond to each other. Note that the inner core icon row includes eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c,
670d, 670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h are arranged in a loop, and the inner core icon that reaches outside the display area from the left end appears in the display area from the right end.

The pending icon roulette shown in FIG. 77(3) has eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d,
670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h are determined to correspond. By determining the inner core icons that correspond to the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669, only the inner core icons that have a corresponding relationship are displayed, and the inner core icons that have no corresponding relationship are hidden.

As a result, the pending consumption icon 668 and the first to third pending icons 6
69 is a display mode corresponding to the expectation level (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. Further, it is announced that the fourth pending icon 669 is in a display mode corresponding to the expectation level (medium expectation level) set in the inner core icon display mode pt03.

Next, the display mode of the hold icon after the hold icon roulette effect will be explained using FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of the hold icon after the hold icon roulette performance according to the modified example of the fifth embodiment.

The hold icons (including the hold icon 669 and hold extinguish icon 668) shown in FIG. 78(1) are the same as the hold icon 669 and hold extinguish icon 668 shown in FIG. 77(3).
Display the inner core icon overlaid on the outer shell icon. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to distinguish between the display modes of the pending icon 669 and the pending extinguishing icon 668 before and after the pending icon roulette performance.

The pending icons (including the pending icon 669 and pending digest icon 668) shown in FIG. 78(2) are attached to the inner core icon based on the display state of the pending icon 669 and pending digest icon 668 shown in FIG. 77(3). Add color to the outer shell icon and hide the inner core icon. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to distinguish between the display modes of the pending icon 669 and the pending extinguishing icon 668 before and after the pending icon roulette performance.

Next, as a modification of the fifth embodiment, display effects on the holding pedestal will be described using FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a reservation pedestal display according to a modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a reservation pedestal display according to a modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of a reservation pedestal display according to a modification of the fifth embodiment. The hold effects in the hold icons (including the hold icon 669 and the hold extinguish icon 668) are only effects of the hold, and even if there is a highly anticipated hold effect, the hold effect is limited to the hold and has no relation to the next hold effect. Conventionally, it is common not to do so. The gaming machine 10 of the modification of the fifth embodiment makes it possible to create a sense of continuity of anticipation by relating the result of a predetermined suspended performance to the next pending performance.

The holding pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79(1) includes four holding cumulative displays 671 and an operation trigger display 672 formed of round windows. The four pending cumulative displays 671 memorize and display the display modes of pending expiry icons 668 that have been used up in a predetermined period. For example, the pending cumulative display 671 displays the new history on the left and the old history on the right in chronological order. In addition, pending cumulative display 6
71 may be displayed not only in chronological order but also in a predetermined order such as in order of expectation. For example, the first pending cumulative display 671 from the left displays the expectation level (for example, green) corresponding to the pending expiration icon 673 on the pending pedestal 670, and the second and third pending cumulative displays 671 The expectation level (for example, green and blue) corresponding to the past pending completion icon 668 is displayed, and the fourth pending cumulative display 671 is blank because there is no display target. The operation trigger display 672 indicates that there is no operation trigger for the display effect on the hold pedestal (hold pedestal effect). The operation trigger display 672 is, for example, a message display “POWER
"ON" is displayed non-highlighted.

The hold pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79(2) stores and displays the display mode of the new hold extinguishment icon 673 in the hold accumulation display 671 that is the first from the left.
Shift the memory display in to the right. The reservation pedestal 670 uses the fact that all four reservation cumulative displays 671 are filled as an activation trigger for the reservation pedestal effect on the reservation pedestal. The gaming machine 10 obtains an activation trigger for the pending pedestal presentation and executes the pending pedestal presentation. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode of the operation trigger display 672 in reverse (displaying the message display "POWER ON" in reverse), informs that the operation trigger has been obtained, and displays the hold extinguishing icon on the hold pedestal 670. 6
73 is displayed as an effect.

The hold pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79(3) changes the display mode of the hold extinguishment icon 673 on the hold pedestal 670, for example, from green before the change to yellow, which has a higher expectation level, based on the four hold cumulative displays 671. and update it. The reservation pedestal 670 also has four reservation cumulative displays 67.
Reset the display mode of 1 and make it a blank display.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode of the pending expiry icon 668 on the pending pedestal 670 as a history, and changes the display mode of the pending extinguishing icon 668 based on the history display. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to create continuity of anticipation by relating the result of the predetermined suspended performance to the next and subsequent suspended performances.

Although the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the pending icon 673 on the pending pedestal 670 upon receiving the activation trigger, the gaming machine 10 maintains the operating state for a predetermined period and displays the pending icon 673 on the pending pedestal 670. Another pending consumption icon 668 that is pending consumption after the icon 673
The display mode may be changed.

In addition, the pending cumulative display 671 is assumed to memorize and display the display modes of the different pending extinguishing icons 668, but the pending extinguishing icon 673 on the suspending pedestal 670 is put on hold as the pending icon 669, and after the pending extinguishing icon 669 is put on hold through a pending shift. The display mode of the process leading to step 673 may be displayed.

The holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80(1) is a gas stove-shaped holding pedestal. Holding pedestal 68
0 includes four pending accumulation displays 681 in the shape of flames and an activation trigger display 682. The four pending cumulative displays 681 memorize and display the display mode of the pending expiration icons 668 that have been used up in a predetermined period. The four pending cumulative displays 681 each having a flame shape are displayed in a manner that corresponds to the expectation level of the pending consumption icon 668 that has been consumed within a predetermined period.For example, the higher the expectation level, the brighter the color.
It may turn into a large flame. The reservation pedestal 680 is different in that the retention pedestal 680 stores and displays the expectation level of the reservation expiration icon 668 that has expired in a predetermined period in the same display format, but stores and displays the expectation level by converting the display format. do. For example, the first pending cumulative display 681 from the left displays the expectation level (for example, a small red flame) corresponding to the pending extinguishment icon 683 on the pending pedestal 680, and the second and third pending cumulative displays 681 displays the expectation level (for example, a small red flame and a yellow flame) corresponding to the past pending consumption icon 668, and the fourth pending cumulative display 681 is blank because there is no display target. The operation trigger display 682 indicates that there is no operation trigger for the display effect on the hold pedestal (hold pedestal effect). The actuation trigger display 682 displays, for example, a message display "TURN ON" in a non-reverse image.

The hold pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80(2) stores and displays the display mode of the new hold extinguishment icon 683 in the hold accumulation display 681 that is the first from the left.
Shift the memory display in to the right. The reservation pedestal 680 uses the fact that all four reservation cumulative displays 681 are filled as an activation trigger for the reservation pedestal performance on the reservation pedestal. The gaming machine 10 obtains an activation trigger for the pending pedestal presentation and executes the pending pedestal presentation. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode of the operation trigger display 682 in reverse display (displays the message display "TURN ON" in reverse display).
The pending extinguishing icon 68 on the pending pedestal 680 indicates that the activation trigger has been obtained.
3 is displayed as an effect. For example, the display mode on the upper surface of the holding pedestal 680 is changed to create a scene in which heat generated from the flame acts on the holding extinguishing icon 683.

The hold pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80(3) changes the display mode of the hold extinguishment icon 683 on the hold pedestal 680, for example, from green before the change to yellow, which has a higher expectation level, based on the four hold cumulative displays 681. and update it. The reservation pedestal 680 also has four reservation cumulative displays 68.
Reset the display mode of 1 and make it a blank display.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode of the pending expiry icon 683 on the pending pedestal 680 as a history, and changes the display mode of the pending extinguishing icon 683 based on the history display. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to create continuity of anticipation by relating the result of a predetermined suspended performance to the next and subsequent suspended performances. In addition, the game machine 10 stores and displays the expectation level of the pending expiry icon 683 that the pending pedestal 680 has consumed in a predetermined period by changing the display mode, thereby making it possible to correspond to various production forms.

The retention pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 81(1) displays the retention extinguishing icon 684 on the gas stove-shaped retention pedestal in the shape of a raw egg. For example, the game machine 10 displays the hold icon 669 in an egg shape, and when the hold is extinguished, the contents are taken out from the shell and displayed as the hold extinguishment icon 684 on a gas stove-shaped hold base. That is, the gaming machine 10 can change the display mode in the process from the pending icon 669 to the pending extinguishing icon 684 in accordance with the pending pedestal 680. Such a gaming machine 10 can suitably produce the effect of the flame of a gas stove on the pending extinguishing icon 684.

In addition, the pending consumption icon 684 changes from a raw egg shape to a fried egg shape, so that the gaming machine 10
The pending accumulation display 681 can suitably guide the amount of action that acts on the pending consumption icon 684. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can make the expectation level indicated by the pending consumption icon 684 correspond to the doneness and color of the fried egg.

The holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 81(2) carries a holding extinguishing icon 685 smaller than the holding extinguishing icon 684 placed on the holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 81(1). The size of the pending extinguishing icon 685 gives the appearance of easy cooking, and changes from a raw egg-like shape to a fried egg-like shape with a smaller amount of heat than the pending extinguishing icon 684 placed on the retaining pedestal 680. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform the expectation effect not only in the display mode of the pending accumulation display 681 on the pending pedestal 680 but also in combination with the pending expiry icon 685.

The gaming machine 10 (including the modified example) of the fifth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores a starting memory as a right to execute a game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game), and displays a pending display of the starting memory in relation to the result of the game corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible to execute the pending notice performance by changing the mode, and the display means (for example, the display device 41
), and control means (for example, game control device 100, production control device 300). The display means is capable of displaying the starting memory. The control means provides a hold display that includes a first display element (for example, an inner core icon 662) that indicates the degree of expectation regarding the outcome of the game, and a second display element (an outer shell icon 661) that indicates the possibility of change of the first display element. The starting memory is displayed on the display means in the following manner (FIG. 69, FIG. 70, FIG. 72, FIG. 73).

[Sixth embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to fifth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine including a game board 800 (see FIG. 28), the game machine of the fifth embodiment is applicable to either. Note that configurations similar to those in the first to fifth embodiments may be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment provides advance notice of the execution of a predetermined performance (notice performance) regarding the game based on the success/failure performance (notices that the preview performance may be executed (develops into a preview performance)),
Depending on the success of the success/failure performance, a suggestive performance that suggests the execution of a preview performance (development into a preview performance) is performed. The preview performance is, for example, a performance that foretells the reliability, expectation level, etc. regarding the game.

First, the suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 10 will be explained using FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of suggestion production according to the sixth embodiment.
FIG. 82 shows an example of presentation contents and suggestion contents of a suggestion presentation (suggestion presentation that foretells the execution of a pseudo presentation presentation) whose preview content is a pseudo-continuation presentation (notice presentation presentation). The pseudo-continuous performance is a performance that allows the player to experience one fluctuation (one fluctuation display game) as if it were a plurality of fluctuation display games by causing temporarily stopped symbols to fluctuate again. As a suggestive production whose preview content is a pseudo-series production,
There is a suggestive performance 1 and a suggestive performance 2.

The content of the suggestive performance 1 is a pseudo-linked instigation performance. The pseudo-connection inciting performance determines whether the pseudo-connection pattern (special pattern) used to suggest the execution of the pseudo-connection temporarily stops (success or failure of the temporary stop of the pseudo-connection pattern).
is displayed to foretell the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and by temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous pattern (successful temporary stopping of the pseudo-continuous pattern), it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed.

There are three types of suggestion contents of suggestion performance 1: success, failure 1 (SP reach (reach performance with high expectations)), and failure 2 (no development). The suggested content (success) is the suggested content suggested by the success of the success/failure performance (the success of the temporary stop of the pseudo-connection pattern). Suggestions (Failure 1, Failure 2)
is the suggested content suggested by the failure of success/failure performance (failure to temporarily stop the pseudo-connection pattern).

Suggestive performance 1 derives a result pattern that suggests success (suggests that it will develop into a pseudo-connected performance) at a rate (probability) of 50%, and suggests failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a 50% rate (probability). We derive a result pattern that suggests that it does not develop into a pseudo-connected performance.

More specifically, we derive a result pattern (success) that suggests that Suggestive Performance 1 develops into a pseudo-connected performance 50% of the time, and a result that suggests that it develops into SP Reach at a 25% rate. A mode (failure 1) is derived, and a result mode (failure 2) that suggests that the performance does not develop at a rate of 25% (returning to the state before the start of the suggestive performance) is derived.

In this way, in suggestion performance 1, the gaming machine 10 selects three suggestion contents (success, success,
A result pattern suggesting either failure 1 or failure 2) is derived.
Note that the SP reach is an example of a performance (specific performance) that can be suggested when both the suggestion performance 1 and the suggestion performance 2 fail, and is a performance that depicts the process of deriving the result of the game.

The performance content of the suggestion performance 2 is a roulette performance. The roulette effect foretells the execution of the pseudo-connection effect by displaying whether or not an option suggesting a pseudo-connection (pseudo-connection option) is selected from among multiple options (success or failure of selection of the pseudo-connection option). , to select the pseudo-connected option (
(successful selection of a pseudo-connected option) suggests the execution of a pseudo-connected performance.

The suggested content of Suggestive Performance 2 is success, failure 1 (SP reach), failure 2 (no development),
There are four types: failure 3 (full rotation (a performance in which the symbols rotate with a winning combination));
The suggested content (success) is the suggested content suggested by the success of the success/failure production (success in selecting the pseudo-connected option). The suggestion contents (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3) are suggestion contents suggested by failure of success/failure production (failure to select pseudo-connected options).

Suggestion performance 2 derives suggestions of success at a rate of 30% and suggestions of failure (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3) at a rate of 70%.
More specifically, Suggestion Production 2 derives a suggestion that it will develop into a pseudo-connection production at a rate of 30%, a suggestion that it will develop into an SP reach at a rate of 30%, and a suggestion that it will develop into a SP reach at a rate of 30%. We derive a suggestion that the production will not develop, and a suggestion that it will develop into full rotation at a rate of 10%.

In this way, in the suggestion performance 2, the gaming machine 10 selects four suggestion contents (success, success,
Indicates one of failure 1, failure 2, failure 3).
Note that the full rotation is an example of a performance that can be suggested only when the suggestion performance 2 fails. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can further differentiate each suggestion performance by providing a performance (full rotation) that can be transferred (developed) only in one of the suggestion performances. As a result, the gaming machine 10
It is possible to enhance the performance effect of each suggestive performance and effectively improve interest.

Note that the presentation content, suggestion content, and derivation ratio described above are merely examples, and are not limited thereto.
For example, the gaming machine 10 can include, in the suggestion content when the first suggestion performance fails, a development to a performance that is not suggested in the second suggestion performance.

Next, the derivation ratio of each suggestion content will be explained in more detail using FIG. 83. Figure 83 is
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the derivation ratio of each suggestion content in the sixth embodiment.
In the suggestion performance 1, the gaming machine 10 derives a suggestion of success (development into a preview performance) at a rate of 50%, and a suggestion of failure at a rate of 50%. In addition, in suggestion performance 1, the gaming machine 10 derives a suggestion (failure 1) that will develop to SP reach at a rate of 50% (under the conditions of deriving failure) in the case of deriving failure. Derive the suggestion that it will not develop at a rate of % (Failure 2).

On the other hand, in the suggestion performance 2, the gaming machine 10 derives a suggestion of success (development into a preview performance) at a rate of 30%, and a suggestion of failure at a rate of 70%. In addition, in the suggestion performance 2, the gaming machine 10
is SP in 30×100/70% (approximately 42.857%) of the cases that lead to failure.
The suggestion of developing into reach (failure 1) was derived, and 30 × 100/70% (approximately 42.85
7%) of not developing (failure 2), and 10 x 100/70% (approximately 1
A suggestion (failure 3) is derived that the rotation will develop to full rotation at a rate of 4.286%).

That is, in Suggestive Performances 1 and 2, the rescue ratio at the time of failure (proportion other than Failure 2) is higher in Suggestive Performance 2.
Further, in suggestion performances 1 and 2, the derivation ratio for deriving suggestions of success is 50% in suggestion performance 1 and 30% in suggestion performance 2 (they are configured to have different ratios).
In this way, by differentiating the derivation ratio of success suggestions in a plurality of suggestion performances that suggest the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance (notice performance) depending on the success of the success/failure performance, the gaming machine 10 can further differentiate each suggestion performance. (It is possible to differentiate not only the contents of the performance but also the expectations), and it is possible to effectively improve interest.

In addition, in Suggestive Performances 1 and 2, the proportion of deriving the suggestion (Failure 1) of developing into a specific performance is 25% in Suggestive Performance 1 and 30% in Suggestive Performance 2 (different proportions). ). In addition, in Suggestive Directions 1 and 2, the ratio of deriving suggestions for developing to a specific direction under conditions that lead to failure was 50% in Suggestive Direction 1 and approximately 42.857% in Suggestive Direction 2. (configured to have different proportions).

In other words, at the beginning of the suggestive performance (when success or failure is unknown), the expectation that it will develop into a specific performance is higher for Suggestive Performance 2, and after the failure of the suggestive performance (after success or failure is known), the expectations for the development to a specific performance are higher. Expectations for development are higher in specific performance 1. In this way, the gaming machine 10
By changing suggestive performances that have a high expectation of developing into a specific performance as the performance progresses, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of each suggestive performance and effectively improve interest.

Next, the specific content (display screen example) of each suggestion production (suggestion production 1, 2) is shown in Figure 84.
This will be explained using FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the sixth embodiment.
It is. FIG. 87 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a diagram (part 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the sixth embodiment.

Here, the display screen (sometimes simply referred to as "screen") is a screen consisting of one or more images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and as a general rule, different symbols are used for different display contents. is attached. First, we will explain the flow of the suggestion performance 1 (pseudo-linked instigation performance).

The display screen 840 shown in FIG. 84(1) is a display screen when the symbols are stopped, and after the variable display in the variable display game ends (before the start of the next variable display game), the symbol that is the result of the variable display game is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is displayed for a period of time. The display screen 840 includes a large symbol group 841, a small symbol group 842, a special symbol 1 reservation number display 843, a special symbol 2 reservation number display 844, and a reservation display 845.
and a pending consumption display 846 are displayed.

The large symbol group 841 is in charge of game presentation for the purpose of increasing interest. Therefore, large pattern group 8
41 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area approximately in the center of the display device 41. The large symbol group 841 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

On the display screen 840, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol is
It shows that the symbol has stopped at "5", and the right symbol shows that the symbol has stopped at "7". That is, on the display screen 840, the large symbol group 841 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 842 is in charge of notifying the fluctuating display state for the purpose of making it easier for the player to grasp the game state. Therefore, the small symbol group 842 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large symbol group 841. The small pattern group 842 is
It includes a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern. On the display screen 840, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol constituting the small symbol group 842 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 841 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 842, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can greatly change its display mode. On the contrary, the small symbol group 842 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 841, and has a lower degree of freedom in display position (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 pending number display 843 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 840, the special figure 1 pending number display 843 indicates that the number of reserved memories for the special figure 1 game is "4".
The special figure 2 pending number display 844 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 840, the special figure 2 pending number display 844 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "0".

The hold display 845 shows how the number of hold icons 847 (hold memory display) corresponding to the number of hold of the special figure 1 game is displayed corresponding to the current gaming state (for example, normal game state). The hold icon 847 has, for example, a spherical shape, and the hold icon 847 can also be displayed with movement through animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.). In addition, the pending consumption display 846 is a pending consumption icon 84 corresponding to the pending consumption of the special figure game.
8 (see display screen 850) is shown. The pending consumption icon 848 has, for example, a spherical shape, and the pending consumption icon 848 can also be displayed with movement through animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.).

For example, as shown in the display screen 840, when the special drawing 1 reservation number display 843 displays "4" and the special drawing 2 reservation number display 844 displays "0", the reservation display 845 displays four reservation icons 847 indicates that the number of reserved memories is "4". In addition, the pending number or the pending memory number means the number of starting memories in which the special figure variable display game has not been executed.

The hold display 845 can clearly indicate the number of hold memories of the special figure fluctuation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold memory, depending on the display mode (hold icon 847 displayed on the hold display 845).

The pending consumption display 846 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state, depending on its display mode, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result. On the display screen 840, the pending consumption display 846 makes the frame blank (the pending consumption icon 848 is hidden) to indicate that the special symbol fluctuation display game is in a stopped state. After this, the gaming machine 10 starts variable display.

In addition, in the reservation display 845, the total number of reservations of the number of reservations of the special figure 1 game and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 game is displayed by the reservation icon 847 according to the gaming state, but the number of reservations of the special figure 1 game and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 game are displayed. One of the pending numbers of the games shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed using a pending icon 847.

It should be noted that it may include effect display elements such as a background display, a character display, and a text display (not shown), and the effect display elements may also be capable of producing a display accompanied by movement using animation or the like.

A display screen 850 shown in FIG. 84(2) is a display screen after the start of variable display. The display screen 850 is a screen after the display screen 840, and shows a screen in which a variable display is being performed (three symbols are changing). On the display screen 850, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the large symbol group 841 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol fluctuating display game is being fluctuated. In addition, on the display screen 850, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the small symbol group 842 are changing, indicating that the special symbol variable display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

On the display screen 850, the special figure 1 pending number display 843 indicates that the number of reserved memories for the special figure 1 game is "3".
The special figure 2 pending number display 844 indicates that the number of pending memories for the special figure 2 game is "0", and the pending display 845 indicates the game state that shows the pending number of the special figure 1 game. The hold icon 84 indicates that the number of hold memories for the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game) is "3".
Indicated by the number 7. Further, on the display screen 850, the pending consumption display 846 displays a pending consumption icon 848 (suspended memory display) that is being consumed, indicating that the special figure variable display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

A display screen 851 shown in FIG. 85(1) is a display screen after the display screen 850, and shows a state in which the suggestion effect 1 (pseudo-coupling effect) is being executed.
The display screen 851 includes a pseudo-coupling effect display 852 in its display contents. The pseudo-coupling incitement effect display 852 performs a display related to the pseudo-coupling incitement effect. On the display screen 851, a pseudo-coupling effect display 852 displays a tiger-like character and the words "Stop!" and tells the player whether or not the special symbol (pseudo-coupled symbol) will temporarily stop. This shows a state in which the user is inciting the situation, that is, a state in which the user is forewarned that there is a possibility that a pseudo-coupled performance will be performed.

On the display screen 851, the large symbol group 841 shows that the symbol "3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol and the symbol "5" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol. Also, on the display screen 851, large symbol group 8
41 operates the pseudo-continuous symbol in a mode different from fluctuating (the mode of the display screen 850) and the temporary stop state (for example, low-speed fluctuation) in the medium pattern, and asks the player whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol will temporarily stop. It shows that they are agitating against the situation.

A display screen 853 shown in FIG. 85(2) is a display screen after the display screen 851, and is in a state suggesting the success of the suggestion effect 1 (pseudo-association instigation effect) (indicating the execution of the pseudo-association effect). (suggested state).

On the display screen 853, the pseudo-coupling promotion display 852 displays a tiger-like character and the words "Success!!", and the pseudo-coupling promotion display (success or failure production of the temporary stop of the pseudo-coupling pattern) derives success. It suggests that this is what happened (developing into a pseudo-coupled performance).

In addition, on the display screen 853, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "5" on the right symbol, temporarily suspends the pseudo-connection symbol on the middle symbol, and temporarily stops the symbol "5" on the right symbol. This suggests that the inciting performance led to the success. After this, the gaming machine 10 ends the suggestion performance 1.

A display screen 854 shown in FIG. 85(3) is a display screen after the display screen 851, and is in a state indicating failure of suggestion effect 1 (pseudo-association provocation effect) (not to perform pseudo-association effect). (suggested state).

On the display screen 854, the pseudo-coupled promotion display 852 displays a tiger-like character and the words "Failure...", indicating that the pseudo-coupled promotion (success/failure production of the temporary stop of the pseudo-coupling pattern) has failed (failure 1). , failure 2) was derived.

In addition, on the display screen 854, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "5" on the right symbol, and displays the symbols in a fluctuating state on the middle symbol. The inciting performance failed (
This suggests that failure 1 and failure 2) were derived. After this, the gaming machine 10 suggests that the SP will develop into reach or that the performance will not develop (suggests whether it is failure 1 or failure 2), and ends the suggestion performance 1.

The above is an example of the display screen of the suggestive effect 1 (pseudo-linked inciting effect). Next, an example of a display screen for suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) will be explained.
A display screen 855 shown in FIG. 86(1) is a display screen after the display screen 850, and shows a state in which suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) is being executed.

The display screen 855 includes a roulette effect display 856 in its display contents. The roulette performance display 856 displays information regarding the roulette performance. On the display screen 855, the roulette effect display 856 includes option displays 856a to 856d corresponding to each suggestion content, and an operation display 85.
6e.

The option displays 856a to 856d display options that can be selected in the roulette effect. On the display screen 855, option display 856a is an option used to suggest the success of the roulette performance (success of the success/failure performance), and option displays 856b to 856d are options used to suggest the failure of the roulette performance (failure of the success/failure performance). It is. The option display 856a displays the word "pseudo" and suggests that, if selected, a pseudo-coupled performance will develop (suggesting a successful roulette performance).

The option displays 856b to 856d display the word "miss", suggesting that if selected, the result will not develop into a pseudo-connection performance (suggesting failure of the roulette performance). in particular,
For example, the option display 856b is an option corresponding to failure 2 (no development), the option display 856c is an option corresponding to failure 1 (SP reach), and the option display 856d is an option corresponding to failure 3 (full rotation). This is a corresponding option.

The operation display 856e guides operations in the roulette game. The operation display 856e is
An image showing the push button being pressed by hand and the text "Push the button to decide your destination!!" are displayed to inform the player that the roulette performance is a performance that involves push button operations. I'm guiding you.

On the display screen 855, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "3" on the right symbol, and displays the symbols in a fluctuating state on the middle symbol, so that a reach occurs. This indicates that the In addition, on the display screen 855, the large symbol group 841 is displayed in a smaller size than the state on the display screen 850 (reduced display in the lower left), whereby the gaming machine 10 secures a display range for the roulette effect.

A display screen 857 shown in FIG. 86(2) is a display screen after the display screen 855, and shows a state in which suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) is being executed.
On the display screen 857, the roulette effect display 856 is in a state where it is displaying whether or not a pseudo-connection option is selected from among a plurality of options (success or failure of selection of the pseudo-connection option), that is, when the pseudo-connection effect is executed. Indicates a situation where you are warned that something may happen. in particular,
The roulette effect display 856 sequentially moves the selection cursor among the option displays, and also moves the option display where the selection cursor is located in a manner that can distinguish it from other option displays (a manner that suggests that it has been temporarily selected). ) is displayed.

On the display screen 857, the roulette effect display 856 displays the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856c, displays the option display 856c in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, and temporarily displays the option display 856c. This shows that it is selected.

A display screen 858 shown in FIG. 86(3) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and is in a state suggesting the success of the suggestive effect 2 (roulette effect) (suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed). state).

On the display screen 858, the roulette effect display 856 stops and displays the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856a, and displays the option display 856a in a manner that allows it to be distinguished from other option displays (a manner that suggests that it has been selected). This indicates that the option display 856a has been selected, that is, that the roulette effect has been successful (successful selection of the pseudo-connection options) (development into a pseudo-connection effect).

In addition, on the display screen 858, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "3" on the right symbol, temporarily suspends the pseudo continuous symbol on the middle symbol, and creates a roulette effect. suggests that it was successful. After this, the gaming machine 10 ends the suggestion performance 2.

A display screen 859 shown in FIG. 87(1) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and is in a state suggesting failure of suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) (suggesting not to execute pseudo-connection effect). state).

On the display screen 859, the roulette effect display 856 stops and displays the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856b, and also displays the option display 856b in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, so that the option display 856b is selected. In other words, this suggests that the roulette performance resulted in a failure (failure to select the pseudo-connection options) (that it did not develop into a pseudo-connection performance).

In addition, on the display screen 859, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "3" on the right symbol, displays the symbols in a fluctuating state on the middle symbol, and produces a roulette effect. This suggests that the result was a failure.

A display screen 860 shown in FIG. 87(2) is a display screen after the display screen 859, and shows a state in which the failure suggested on the display screen 859 is failure 2 (“no development”). show.

On the display screen 860, the roulette performance display 856 changes the display content of the option display 856b selected by the roulette performance from "miss" displayed on the display screen 859 to "unfortunate".
This suggests that the failure derived by the roulette performance is failure 2 (“no development”) (the performance does not develop). After this, the gaming machine 10 ends the suggestion performance 2.

A display screen 861 shown in FIG. 87(3) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and is in a state suggesting failure of the suggestive effect 2 (roulette effect) (suggesting not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect). state).

On the display screen 861, the roulette effect display 856 stops and displays the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856c, and displays the option display 856c in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, so that the option display 856c is selected. In other words, this suggests that the roulette performance resulted in a failure (failure to select the pseudo-connection options) (that it did not develop into a pseudo-connection performance).

In addition, on the display screen 861, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "3" on the right symbol, displays the symbol in a fluctuating state on the middle symbol, and produces a roulette effect. This suggests that the result was a failure.

A display screen 862 shown in FIG. 88(1) is a display screen after the display screen 861, and shows a state in which the failure suggested on the display screen 861 is failure 1 ("SP reach"). show.

On the display screen 862, the roulette performance display 856 changes the display content of the option display 856c selected by the roulette performance from "miss" displayed on the display screen 861 to "battle" (display indicating SP reach), The failure derived from the roulette performance is failure 1 (“S
This suggests that it is "P reach") (developing into SP reach). After this, the gaming machine 10 ends the suggestion performance 2.

A display screen 863 shown in FIG. 88(2) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and is in a state indicating failure of the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) (suggesting not to execute the pseudo-connection effect). state).

On the display screen 863, the roulette effect display 856 stops and displays the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856d, and displays the option display 856d in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, so that the option display 856d is selected. In other words, this suggests that the roulette performance resulted in a failure (failure to select the pseudo-connection options) (that it did not develop into a pseudo-connection performance).

In addition, on the display screen 863, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "3" on the right symbol, displays the symbol in a fluctuating state on the middle symbol, and produces a roulette effect. This suggests that the result was a failure.

A display screen 864 shown in FIG. 88(3) is a display screen after the display screen 863, and shows a state in which the failure suggested on the display screen 863 is failure 3 (“full rotation”). show.

On the display screen 864, the roulette performance display 856 changes the display content of the option display 856d selected by the roulette performance from "miss" displayed on the display screen 863 to "full rotation", and the failure derived from the roulette performance is changed. This suggests that this is failure 3 (“full rotation”) (developing into full rotation). After this, the gaming machine 10 ends the suggestion performance 2.

The above is an example of the display screen of the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect). In the above example of the display screen, the roulette effect is performed in such a manner that one option is displayed according to each suggestion, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 provides a roulette performance in a mode that provides one option display suggesting success (options corresponding to success) and one option display suggesting loss (options corresponding to failures 1, 2, and 3). Alternatively, you can display two options suggesting success (options corresponding to success) and one option indicating failure (failure 1, 2).
, 3) may be provided.

In addition, when displaying options that indicate failure, "miss" is displayed in common, and "missed" is displayed after selection.
It was configured to display "Unfortunate", "Battle", and "Full rotation" (multi-stage display of suggested contents), but it is not limited to this, but it can also display the options "Unfortunate" from the beginning, "Battle" options, It may be configured to display an option display of "full rotation". Further, it is also possible to display the option indicating success so that "hit" is displayed and "pseudo" is displayed after selection (multi-level display of suggestion contents).

By the way, even if the game machine 10 suggests the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance (notice performance) in the suggested performance, it is not necessarily limited to executing the pseudo-continuous performance. For example, the gaming machine 10 does not have to execute pseudo-continuous effects at a fixed rate. That is, the gaming machine 10 can include falsehoods in the success of the suggestion performance.

Here, an example of the execution ratio of the pseudo-continuous performance after each suggestion performance is successful in the gaming machine 10 will be explained using FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution rate of preview effects according to the sixth embodiment.

Suggestion performance 1 includes 5% falsehood in success (assuming the execution expectation level is 95%). That is, after the suggestion performance 1 is successful, the gaming machine 10 actually executes the preview performance (pseudo-continuous performance) at a rate of 95%, and does not actually execute the preview performance at a rate of 5%. In other words, the suggestive performance 1 is a performance that suggests a 95% expectation for execution of the pseudo-continuous performance based on the success of the success/failure performance.

Suggestion performance 2 includes 20% falsehood in success (assuming the execution expectation level is 80%). That is,
After the success of the suggestion performance 2, the gaming machine 10 actually executes the preview performance at a rate of 80%, and executes the preview performance at a rate of 20%.
The preview performance is not actually executed at a rate of . In other words, the suggestion performance 2 is a performance that suggests an 80% expectation for execution of the pseudo-continuation performance based on the success of the success/failure performance.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can differentiate each suggestion performance by varying the proportion of falsehoods (contradictory patterns) included in the success for each suggestion performance, thereby effectively increasing the interest. can be improved.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may include false information only in the success of one of the suggestion performances, or may include false information in the same ratio in the success of both suggestion performances.
For example, even if the execution rate of the actual preview performance is the same between the suggestion performance 1 and the suggestion performance 2, the gaming machine 10 can change the execution ratio of false announcements included in the success of the prediction performance to be different. The success derivation ratio can be made different between the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance. According to this, the gaming machine 10 is able to differentiate the expectations held by the player in each suggestion performance, while keeping the execution ratio of the actual preview performance the same between suggestion performance 1 and suggestion performance 2. , can effectively improve interest.

By the way, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to performing the suggestion performance only once within one variation (one variation display game), but can also perform the suggestion production multiple times. Here, an example of a presentation configuration in the case where a plurality of suggestion presentations are performed within one change will be described using FIG. 90.

Note that the gaming machine 10 can also include contradictory patterns at a certain rate for the suggestions of failure 1, failure 2, and failure 3.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a contradictory pattern that is not only non-execution, but also a contradictory pattern that develops into an unexpected performance that is different from the suggested content (for example, when SP reach (failure 1) is suggested, it is actually a pseudo-connection (success). ) may also include contradictory patterns that develop into ).

FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation configuration in the case where a plurality of suggestion presentations are performed within one change in the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 90(1), the gaming machine 10 performs the presentation structure within one change by performing the suggestion presentation 1 (success), performing the preview presentation suggested by the suggestion presentation 1 (success), and performing the suggestion presentation. 1(
The present invention has a performance configuration in which a specific performance is performed after a performance (success) is performed and a preview performance suggested by suggestion performance 1 (success) is performed. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can produce multiple suggestive effects 1 within one change.
(Suggestive performance with the same content) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90(2), the gaming machine 10 changes the performance structure within one change to the suggestion performance 1.
(success), perform the preview performance suggested by suggestion performance 1 (success), perform suggestion performance 2 (success), perform the preview performance suggested by suggestion performance 2 (success), and then perform the specific performance. The performance is structured to perform the following. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the suggestion performance 1 within one fluctuation.
Then, a suggestive performance 2 (suggestive performance with different content) may be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 90(3), the gaming machine 10 changes the presentation structure within one change to the suggestion presentation 1.
The performance structure is such that a performance of (failure 2) is performed, a performance of suggestive performance 2 (success) is performed, and a specific performance is performed after the preview performance suggested by the suggestive performance 2 (success) is performed. In this way, the gaming machine 10 may perform suggestion performance 1 and suggestion performance 2 (suggestion performance with different performance contents) within one change.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90(4), the gaming machine 10 changes the presentation structure within one change to the suggestion presentation 1.
(Failure 2), Suggestion 2 (Success), Suggestion 2 (Success), the preview suggested, Suggestion 1 (Success), Suggestion 1 (Success).
The production structure is such that a specific production is performed after the preview production suggested in (Success) is performed. In this way, the gaming machine 10 may perform a plurality of suggestion performances 1 and 2 within one change.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 90(5), the gaming machine 10 changes the presentation structure within one change to the suggestion presentation 1.
(Failure 2), perform Suggestive Performance 2 (Success), perform the preview performance suggested by Suggestive Performance 2 (Success), perform a specific performance, perform the specific performance after performing the preview performance. composition. In this way, the gaming machine 10 may perform suggestion performance 1 and suggestion performance 2 (suggestion performance with different performance contents) within one change. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may perform the preview performance without going through the suggestion performances 1 and 2 as described above. In addition,
Instead of performing a specific production, performing a preview production, and then performing a specific production,
The gaming machine 10 can also perform a preview performance during the specific performance (as part of the specific performance). Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may be configured to perform the suggestion performance 1 or the suggestion performance 2 during the specific performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 90(6), the gaming machine 10 changes the presentation structure within one change to the suggestion presentation 1.
(success), perform the preview performance suggested by suggestion performance 1 (success), perform suggestion performance 2 (failure 1), and perform the specific performance suggested by suggestion performance 2 (failure 1). shall be. In this way, the gaming machine 10 may perform suggestion performance 1 and suggestion performance 2 (suggestion performance with different performance contents) within one change.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 90 (7), the gaming machine 10 changes the presentation structure within one change to the suggestion presentation 2.
(Failure 1), perform the specific performance suggested by Suggestive performance 2 (Failure 1), perform a preview performance, perform Suggestive performance 1 (Success), perform the preview suggested by Suggestive performance 1 (Success). The performance structure is such that a specific performance is performed after the performance is performed. In this way, the gaming machine 10
Alternatively, Suggestive Performance 1 and Suggestive Performance 2 (suggestive performances with different performance contents) may be performed within one change. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may perform the preview performance without going through the suggestion performances 1 and 2 as described above.

Although the above embodiment has been described using an example in which the gaming machine 10 can execute suggestion performances with two presentation contents, the number of suggestion performances that the gaming machine 10 can execute is not limited to two, but can include three or more suggestions. The performance can be configured to be executable.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may be configured to be able to execute one suggestion performance in parallel with another suggestion performance. For example, the game machine 10 can make the suggestion of the advance notice effect clearer by simultaneously performing a plurality of suggestion effects, thereby making the game easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in one aspect, the above-mentioned suggestive performance can also be regarded as a suggestive performance that suggests a change in the degree of expectation for execution of the pseudo series (notice performance). In other words, the suggestion performance is the result of an increase in the execution expectation of the pseudo-coupled occurrence due to the success of the success/failure performance (for example, from 0% execution expectation to 90 execution expectation).
% (success rate excluding hoaxes)), and the execution expectation of the pseudo-coupled occurrence does not increase due to the failure of the success/failure production (for example, the execution expectation remains 0% and does not change).
It can be seen as a performance that suggests. In this case, the initial execution expectation is set to 0%.
It may be set to a value other than that (for example, 20%).

[Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is configured to include a plurality of success patterns in the suggestion content of each suggestion performance. Figure 91 is
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 91 shows an example of the presentation contents and suggestion contents of a suggestion presentation whose preview content is a pseudo-continuation presentation (notice presentation presentation). Suggestive performances whose preview content is pseudo-continuous performances are Suggestive Performance 1 and Suggestive Performance 2.
There is.

The content of the suggestive performance 1 is a pseudo-linked instigation performance. There are four suggested contents of Suggestive Performance 1: Success 1 (normal), Success 2 (revival), Failure 1 (SP reach), and Failure 2 (no development). The suggestion content (success 1, success 2) is the suggestion content suggested by the success of the success/failure performance (success of the temporary stop of the pseudo-connection pattern). The suggested content (Failure 1, Failure 2) is suggested by the failure of the success/failure performance (failure to temporarily stop the pseudo-connection pattern). In addition, success 1 (normal) is
This is a mode that suggests that the mode shown in the sixth embodiment will develop into a pseudo-coupled effect, and Success 2 (resurrection) is a mode that once displays the mode of failure and then succeeds (succeeds after performing the same mode as failure). ) (resurrection mode).

Suggestion performance 1 derives suggestions for success (success 1, success 2) at a rate of 50%, and suggestions for failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 50%. More specifically, suggestion performance 1 derives the suggestion of success 1 at a rate of 45%, the suggestion of success 2 at a rate of 5%, the suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 25%, A suggestion of failure 2 is derived at a rate of 25%.

In this way, in suggestion performance 1, the gaming machine 10 selects four suggestion contents (success 1) according to the derivation ratio.
, Success 2, Failure 1, Failure 2).
The performance content of the suggestion performance 2 is a roulette performance. The suggested content of Suggestion Production 2 is Success 1 (Normal), Success 2 (Resurrection), Failure 1 (SP reach), Failure 2 (No development), Failure 3 (
There are five types (full rotation). The suggested content (success 1, success 2) is suggested by the success of the success/failure presentation (success in selecting the pseudo-connected option). Suggestions (Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3
) is the content suggested by the failure of the success/failure production (failure to select the pseudo-connected option). Note that success 1 (normal) is a mode that suggests that the mode will develop into a pseudo-coupling performance according to the mode shown in the sixth embodiment, and success 2 (resurrection) is a mode that indicates success after once displaying a failure mode. This is a suggested mode (revival mode).

Suggestion performance 2 derives suggestions for success (success 1, success 2) at a rate of 30%, and suggestions for failure (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3) at a rate of 70%. More specifically, suggestive performance 2 is
At a rate of 25%, suggestions for success 1 are derived, at a rate of 5%, suggestions for success 2 are derived, at a rate of 30%, suggestions for failure 1 are derived, and at a rate of 30%, suggestions for failure 2 are derived. Then, a suggestion of failure 3 is derived at a rate of 10%.

In this way, in suggestion performance 2, the gaming machine 10 selects five suggestion contents (success 1) according to the derivation ratio.
, Success 2, Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3).
In this way, by including a plurality of success patterns in the suggestion content of the suggestion performance, the gaming machine 10 can increase the variation of the performance and improve the interest of the game. Note that the gaming machine 10 can also include in the suggestion content a failure pattern in a manner that suggests failure after once displaying success.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may be configured such that only one of the suggestion performance 1 and the suggestion performance 2 includes content suggesting success (revival).

[Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is configured to include two or more performance modes (plurality of patterns) in the suggested performance of each performance content. In addition, although the following explanation uses suggestion effect 1 as a representative, the suggestion effect 2 can be similarly applied. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating an example of a suggestive effect according to modification 2 of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 92 shows suggestive performance 1 in which the preview content is a pseudo-related performance and the production content is a pseudo-related inciting performance.
An example of the derivation ratio of each suggestion content for each presentation mode is shown.
There are two different presentation modes, pattern 1 and pattern 2, of the suggestive presentation 1 (presentation mode). For example, pattern 1 is a pattern in which a weak character (a character like a pig) appears, and pattern 2 is a pattern in which a strong character (a character like a tiger) appears.

Suggestion performance 1 in the form of pattern 1 derives suggestions of success at a rate of 50%, and suggestions of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 50%. More specifically, Suggestion Performance 1 of Pattern 1 derives suggestions of success at a rate of 50%, suggestions of Failure 1 at a rate of 25%,
A suggestion of failure 2 is derived at a rate of 25%.

Suggestion performance 1 in the form of pattern 2 derives suggestions of success at a rate of 70%, and suggestions of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 30%. More specifically, Suggestion Performance 1 of Pattern 2 derives suggestions of success at a rate of 70%, suggestions of Failure 1 at a rate of 20%,
Derive a failure 2 suggestion at a rate of 10%.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 increases the variation of the performance by making it possible to execute the suggestion performance of one performance content in a plurality of modes, and by making the derivation ratio of the suggestion content different in each mode,
It can improve the interest of playing games. Note that the gaming machine 10 may also vary the suggestion content that can be derived in each mode of suggestion performance. Note that the two different aspects are just examples, and are not limited thereto. There may be three or more different embodiments.

Next, an example of the proportion of falsehoods included in the success of each aspect will be explained using FIG. 93. Figure 9
3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution rate of the preview performance of Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment.
Suggestion performance 1 in the form of pattern 1 includes 5% falsehood in success (assuming the execution expectation level is 95%). That is, after the suggestion performance 1 of the aspect of pattern 1 is successful, the gaming machine 10 actually executes the preview performance (pseudo-continuous performance) 95% of the time, and does not actually execute the preview performance 5% of the time. . In other words, the suggestive performance 1 in the form of pattern 1 is a performance that suggests a 95% execution expectation of the pseudo-connected performance based on the success of the success/failure performance.

Suggestion performance 1 in the form of pattern 2 includes 10% falsehood in success (assuming the execution expectation level is 90%). That is, after the suggestion performance 1 of the aspect of pattern 2 is successful, the gaming machine 10 actually executes the preview performance (pseudo continuous performance) 90% of the time, and does not actually execute the preview performance 10% of the time. . In other words, the suggestive performance 1 in the form of pattern 2 is a performance that suggests a 90% expectation for execution of the pseudo-connected performance based on the success of the success/failure performance.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can vary the proportion of falsehoods (contradictory patterns) included in successes depending on the mode. As a result, the gaming machine 10 increases the variation of performances,
It can improve the interest of playing games.

[Variation 3 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the third modification of the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 changes the derivation ratio of each suggestion content depending on the number of executions within one change. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating an example of the suggestion effect of the third modification of the sixth embodiment. In addition, although the following explanation uses suggestion effect 1 as a representative, the suggestion effect 2 can be similarly applied.

FIG. 94 shows an example of the derivation ratio of each suggestion content for each number of executions of suggestion production 1 whose preview content is a pseudo-connection production.
Suggestion performance 1 is configured such that the derivation ratio of each suggestion content differs depending on the number of executions within one variation. The first suggestion performance 1 derives suggestions of success at a rate of 50%, and suggestions of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 50%. More specifically, the first suggestion performance 1 derives a suggestion of success at a rate of 50%, a suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 25%, and a suggestion of failure 2 at a rate of 25%. do.

The second suggestion performance 1 derives suggestions of success at a rate of 40%, and suggestions of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 60%. More specifically, the second suggestion performance 1 derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 40%, the suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 30%, and the suggestion of failure 2 at a rate of 30%.
Derive the implications.

In this way, by varying the derivation ratio depending on the number of executions within one fluctuation, the gaming machine 1
0 can increase the variation of performances and improve the interest of the game. Note that the gaming machine 10 may also vary the suggestion content that can be derived in the suggestion presentation for each number of executions. Note that the success rate of the first suggestion performance 1 is not limited to being higher than the success rate of the second suggestion performance 1, but the success rate of the first suggestion performance 1 is higher than the success rate of the second suggestion performance 1. may also be lower.

Next, an example of the proportion of fakes included in the success of the suggestion effect for each number of executions will be explained using FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution rate of the preview performance of the third modification of the sixth embodiment.

The first suggestion performance 1 includes a 5% falsehood in success (assuming the execution expectation level is 95%). That is, after the first suggestion performance 1 is successful, the gaming machine 10 actually executes the preview performance (pseudo-continuous performance) at a rate of 95%, and does not actually execute the preview performance at a rate of 5%. In other words, the first suggestion performance 1 is a performance that suggests a 95% expectation for execution of the pseudo-connection performance based on the success of the success/failure performance.

The second suggestion performance 1 includes a 10% falsehood in success (assuming the execution expectation level is 90%). That is, after the second suggestion performance 1 is successful, the gaming machine 10 actually executes the preview performance (pseudo-continuous performance) at a rate of 90%, and does not actually execute the preview performance at a rate of 10%. In other words, the second suggestion performance 1 is a performance that suggests a 90% expectation for execution of the pseudo-connection performance based on the success of the success/failure performance.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can vary the proportion of false patterns (contradictory patterns) to be included in successes depending on the number of executions. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the variation of effects and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is not limited to making the proportion of falsehoods in the first suggestion performance 1 lower than the proportion of falsehoods in the second suggestion production 1; It may be set higher than the false rate. Further, only one of the two may include false information.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may vary the derivation ratio of each suggestion content of the second suggestion performance 1 and the proportion of falsehoods included in success depending on whether the first suggestion performance is successful or unsuccessful. . In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines the derivation ratio of each suggestion content of the second suggestion performance 1 only when the first suggestion performance is successful or only when the first suggestion performance fails, and the proportion of false information included in the success. may be made different from the derivation ratio of each suggestion content in the first suggestion performance 1 or the ratio of falsehoods included in success.

[Modification 4 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a fourth modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In a fourth modification of the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is capable of executing a suggestion performance (suggestion performance that foretells the execution of the advance notice performance) whose preview content is a pre-read notice performance (notice performance). FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating an example of a suggestion effect of modification 4 of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 96 shows an example of suggestion content of a suggestion performance (a suggestion performance that foretells the execution of a pre-read preview performance) whose preview content is a pre-read preview performance (notice performance). The pre-read preview performance is a performance that changes the display mode of a pending icon or a pending consumption icon in accordance with a result derived by a variable display game corresponding to the icon (the pending icon or pending consumption icon). Suggestive performances whose preview contents are pre-read preview performances include a suggestive performance 1 and a suggestive performance 2, which have different presentation contents.

There are two types of suggestion contents of the suggestion performance 1: success suggested by the success of the success/failure performance, and failure suggested by the failure of the success/failure performance. Suggestive performance 1 derives a suggestion of success (suggesting that it will develop into a pre-reading preview performance) at a rate (probability) of 50%, and a suggestion of failure (suggesting that it will develop into a pre-reading preview performance) at a 50% rate (probability). ).

There are two possible contents of suggestion performance 2: success and failure. Suggestive performance 2 derives a suggestion of success (suggesting that it will develop into a pre-reading preview performance) at a rate (probability) of 60%, and a suggestion of failure (suggesting that it will develop into a pre-reading preview performance) at a rate (probability) of 40% (probability). ).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform suggestive performances of a plurality of performance contents not only in the pseudo-continuous performance but also in the pre-read preview performance. Note that the above-mentioned suggested content, derived ratio, etc. are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, the gaming machine 10 can execute the suggestion presentation of each presentation content in a plurality of presentation modes even in the pre-read preview presentation, and can also include multiple success patterns and multiple failure patterns in the suggestion content. can.

Further, the preview content of the suggestive performance is not limited to a pre-read preview performance or a pseudo-continuous performance, but may be a suggestive performance whose preview content is another performance.
The gaming machine 10 (including the modified example) of the sixth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.

(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a preview performance means (performance control device 300) capable of executing a preview performance (for example, a pseudo-continuous performance, a pre-read preview performance, etc.), and suggests execution of the preview performance based on the success of the success/failure performance. Suggestive performance means (performance control device 300) that can perform suggestive performances (for example, pseudo-coupling performance, roulette performance, etc.) and specific performances that can perform the process of deriving the result of the game (for example, SP reach). Specific performance means (performance control device 300). The suggestive performance means performs a first success/failure performance (for example, a success/failure performance of a temporary stop of a pseudo-continuous pattern in a pseudo-continuation inciting performance) or a second success/failure performance (for example, a success/failure performance of selecting a pseudo-continuation option in a roulette performance). The first probability is executable and is the success probability (deriving ratio) of the first success/failure performance, and the second probability is the success probability (derivation ratio) of the second success/failure performance.

(2) The specific performance means in (1) is a method for executing the specific performance when the second success/failure performance fails, which is a third probability that is the execution probability of executing the specific performance when the first success/failure performance fails. Increase the fourth probability.

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes a preview performance means (performance control device 300) capable of executing a preview performance (for example, a pseudo-sequence performance, a pre-read preview performance, etc.) that foretells the result of the game, and a preview performance device 300 that provides advance notice based on the success or failure of the success/failure performance. Suggestion production means (for example, execution expectation of 90% (excluding hoaxes) in the case of success, 0% in the case of failure) that can carry out a suggestion production that suggests the execution expectation of the production For example, a specific performance means (performance control device 3
00). The suggestive performance means performs a first success/failure performance (for example, a success/failure performance of a temporary stop of a pseudo-continuous pattern in a pseudo-continuation inciting performance) or a second success/failure performance (for example, a success/failure performance of selecting a pseudo-continuation option in a roulette performance). It is feasible and the success probability of the first success/failure performance (
The first probability, which is the derived ratio), is different from the second probability, which is the success probability (derived ratio) of the second success/failure performance.

(4) The specific performance means in (3) is a method for executing the specific performance when the second success/failure performance fails, which is a third probability that is an execution probability of executing the specific performance when the first success/failure performance fails. Increase the fourth probability.

(5) The suggestion performance means of (3) changes the execution expectation level of the preview performance before and after the success/failure performance depending on the success of the success/failure performance, and does not change the execution expectation level of the preview performance before and after the success/failure performance due to the failure of the success/failure performance.

(6) The gaming machine 10 includes a preview performance means (performance control device 300) that can execute a preview performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance, a pre-read preview performance, etc.), and a suggestive performance that suggests the execution of the preview performance (for example, The present invention includes a suggestive performance means (performance control device 300) capable of executing a pseudo-coupling performance, a roulette performance, etc.). The suggestion production means can suggest the execution of a preview production depending on the success or failure of the suggestion production, and can also suggest the execution of a preview production as a suggestion production (for example, the success or failure production of a temporary stop of a pseudo-coupled pattern in a pseudo-coupling promotion production) or the first suggestion production. It is possible to perform two suggestion performances (for example, a success or failure performance of selecting a pseudo-connection option in a roulette performance), and the first probability is the success probability (derivation ratio) of the first suggestion performance, and the success probability of the second suggestion performance. (deriving ratio) is different from the second probability.

(7) The gaming machine 10 of (6) is equipped with a specific performance means (performance control device 300) capable of executing a specific performance (for example, SP reach) that produces the process of deriving the result of the game, and the specific performance means: The second probability is higher than the third probability, which is the execution probability of executing the specific performance when the first suggested performance fails.
The fourth probability, which is the execution probability of executing a specific performance when the suggestion performance fails, is increased.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to sixth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a gaming machine including a gaming board 800 (see FIG. 28), the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is applicable to either. Note that configurations similar to those in the first to sixth embodiments may be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment aims to further improve the interest of suggestive performances that suggest the execution of preview performances such as pseudo-continuous performances and pending change performances. The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment realizes diversification of expectations for suggestive effects that players with gaming experience have, and aims to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 10 is capable of executing a preview performance in a variable display game. The preview performance is a performance mode that foretells the result derived by the variable display game and the process of deriving the result. For example, the preview performance includes a pseudo continuous performance, a pending change performance, and other performances such as a character performance, a background performance, etc. It can take on a variety of presentation modes.

The results derived from the variable display game include hits, misses, and the magnitude of the value at the time of a win. Winning includes jackpot and small jackpot. The size of the value at the time of winning is, in one aspect, the size of the gaming value that the player can acquire, including the number of prize balls that can be acquired, the number of winning rounds, and the large winning opening (large winning opening 1 or This includes the big prize opening 2), the presence or absence of probability fluctuations, the presence or absence of Fuden support, and the presence or absence of probability fluctuations and opportunities to obtain Fuden support. The process of deriving the results of the variable display game is as follows:
These include the size of the fluctuation time, the presence or absence of reach and its type, the presence or absence of reach development, and the type of developed reach.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can execute a suggestive performance prior to the preview performance. The suggestive performance is a performance that suggests the presence or absence of a preview performance, and may be one that suggests the presence or absence of a preview performance,
It may also be something that suggests the possibility of carrying out a preview performance. The suggestion performance includes a predetermined success/failure performance, and suggests the possibility of executing the preview performance based on the success or failure result derived from the success/failure performance. For example, the suggestive performance suggests the execution of the preview performance when the success/failure performance derives a successful result, and suggests the non-execution of the preview performance when the success/failure performance derives a failure result. Note that the suggestion performance may suggest the possibility of executing the preview performance by preparing a plurality of forms of success/failure performance or failure performance. For example, a suggestive performance suggests the sure execution of a preview performance by deriving a success result in which a success/failure performance becomes a huge success, and suggests a near-certain execution of a preview performance by deriving a success result in which a success/failure performance becomes a mere success. It may also be something that suggests execution.
In addition, the suggestion effect suggests the definite non-execution of the preview effect by deriving a failure result in which the pass/fail effect becomes a major failure, and the non-execution of the preview effect by deriving the failure result in which the success/fail effect results in a regrettable failure. It may also be something that suggests the execution of a slight preview effect. Note that the suggestion performance may suggest not only the possibility of executing the preview performance but also the result of the preview performance by preparing a plurality of modes of success/failure performance or failure performance. For example, the suggestion effect suggests the reliable execution of the preview effect by deriving a success result in which the success/failure effect is a great success, and the result and process of the variable display game that the preview effect foretells is preceded by the preview effect. You may also suggest it by doing so. In addition, the success pattern of the suggestion performance (success performance that derives the success of the success/failure performance) and the failure pattern (failure performance that derives the failure of the success/failure performance) are based on the same performance (the derivation process) until the result is derived. It may be a production) or a different production. Also, it is possible to prepare multiple success patterns (same for failure patterns) of the suggestion performance, and make one success pattern and the other success patterns the same performance.
It may be performed in a different manner. Alternatively, the first success pattern and the other success patterns may be rendered the same up to the middle, but the results derived portion may be rendered differently.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can execute a specific performance in parallel with the suggestive performance. Executing the suggestion performance and the specific performance in parallel means that the execution period of the suggestion performance and the execution period of the specific performance overlap.

The specific performance is a performance that can be executed in parallel with the suggestion performance. Further, the specific performance can be executed regardless of whether or not the preview performance is executed. For example, the specific effects include a timer effect, an SP reach effect, and the like.

First, the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command will be explained using FIGS. 97 to 100. FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the seventh embodiment (Part 1). FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the seventh embodiment (Part 2). FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the seventh embodiment (Part 3). FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the seventh embodiment (No. 4).

The gaming machine 10 can execute a combination of a suggestive performance, a preview performance, and a specific performance as a performance pattern. First, typical performance patterns will be explained. The effect pattern A1 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, in one variable display game called the nth variation. Performance pattern A1 executes a suggestion performance without concurrently executing a specific performance, derives a success result in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance, and executes a preview performance. The game machine 10 can perform a game performance in which the suggestion performance and the preview performance are coordinated by performing the preview performance after the suggestion performance is successful. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the game more than if the preview performance were executed alone.

The effect pattern A2 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, in one variable display game called the nth variation. Performance pattern A2 executes a suggestion performance without concurrently executing a specific performance, and executes a preview performance even though a failure result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance. Performance pattern A2 can give a great sense of surprise to the player, but it is not desirable for it to appear frequently from the viewpoint of consistency of game performance. Therefore, the performance pattern A2 may be a rare performance that is almost never selected, or may be a performance that is not selected in the first place, including that it is not prepared in advance. The game machine 10 can perform a game performance in which the suggestion performance and the preview performance cooperate by performing the preview performance after the suggestion performance fails. As a result, the gaming machine 10
It is possible to improve the interest compared to executing the preview performance alone.

The effect pattern A3 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, in one variable display game called the nth variation. Performance pattern A3 executes a suggestion performance without concurrently executing a specific performance, derives a failure result in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance, and does not perform a preview performance. Performance pattern A3 gives a feeling of disappointment to the player, but is prepared from the viewpoint of consistency of game performance. The gaming machine 10 is
Although the preview performance is not performed due to the failure of the suggestion performance, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the execution of the preview performance after the success of the suggestion performance.

The effect pattern B1 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, in one variable display game called the nth variation. Performance pattern B1 executes a suggestion performance while simultaneously executing a specific performance, derives a success result in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance, and executes a preview performance. The game machine 10 can perform a game performance in which the suggestion performance and the preview performance are coordinated by performing the preview performance after the suggestion performance is successful. Furthermore, by executing the suggestion performance and the specific performance in parallel, the gaming machine 10 can change the suggestion by the suggestion performance and diversify the content of the suggestion that the player perceives.
Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve interest through the suggestive performance depending on whether or not it is executed in parallel with the specific performance.

The effect pattern B2 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, in one variable display game called the nth variation. Performance pattern B2 executes a suggestion performance while simultaneously executing a specific performance, and executes a preview performance even though a failure result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance. Performance pattern B2 can give a great sense of surprise to the player, but from the viewpoint of consistency of game performance, it is not desirable for it to appear frequently. Therefore, the performance pattern B2 may be a rare performance that is almost never selected, or may be a performance that is not selected in the first place, including that it is not prepared in advance. The game machine 10 can perform a game performance in which the suggestion performance and the preview performance cooperate by performing the preview performance after the suggestion performance fails. Furthermore, by executing the suggestion performance and the specific performance in parallel, the gaming machine 10 can change the suggestion by the suggestion performance and diversify the content of the suggestion that the player perceives. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve interest through the suggestive performance depending on whether or not it is executed in parallel with the specific performance.

The effect pattern B3 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, in one variable display game called the nth variation. Performance pattern B3 executes a suggestion performance while simultaneously executing a specific performance, derives a failure result in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance, and does not perform a preview performance. Performance pattern B3 gives a feeling of disappointment to the player, but is prepared from the viewpoint of consistency of game performance. Although the game machine 10 does not perform the preview performance due to the failure of the suggestion performance, it can create a sense of expectation for the execution of the preview performance after the suggestion performance has been successful. Furthermore, by executing the suggestion performance and the specific performance in parallel, the gaming machine 10 can change the suggestion by the suggestion performance and diversify the content of the suggestion that the player perceives. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve interest through the suggestive performance depending on whether or not it is executed in parallel with the specific performance.

Further, the gaming machine 10 does not limit the specific performance to just one mode, but can select and execute one mode from two or more modes. For example, the gaming machine 10 has a specific performance A and a specific performance B.
It is possible to select and execute. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 can execute a timer performance (long) with a large timer value as the specific performance A, and a timer performance (short) with a small timer value as the specific performance B.

Effect patterns B10, B11, B20, B21, B30, and B31 shown in FIG. 98 are executed based on predetermined fluctuation display commands, and for example, one
A variable display of times will be performed out of the game. Performance pattern B10 executes a suggestion performance while executing the specific performance A in parallel, derives a success result in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance, and executes a preview performance. In the performance pattern B11, a suggestion performance is executed while specific performance B is executed in parallel, a success result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance, and a preview performance is executed. Performance pattern B20 executes the suggestion performance while executing the specific performance A in parallel, and executes the preview performance even though a failure result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance. Performance pattern B21 executes the suggestion performance while executing the specific performance B in parallel, and executes the preview performance even though a failure result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance. Performance pattern B30 executes the suggestion performance while executing the specific performance A in parallel, derives a failure result in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance, and does not execute the preview performance. The production pattern B31 is
Suggestion performance is executed while specific performance B is executed in parallel, a failure result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestion performance, and the preview performance is not executed.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 determines the success or failure of the suggestion performance based not only on the presence or absence of a specific performance parallel to the suggestion performance, but also on whether the specific performance parallel to the suggestion performance is specific performance A or specific performance B. , to display whether or not the preview performance will be executed based on the result of the success/failure performance. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve interest through suggestive performances based not only on the presence or absence of parallel execution with specific performances, but also on the type of specific performances.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may prepare a performance pattern in which a preview performance is performed without a specific performance or a suggested performance, such as a performance pattern C shown in FIG. 99. Note that the effect pattern C is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, in one variable display game called the nth variation. By preparing a performance pattern in which a preview performance is performed without specific performance or suggestive performance, the gaming machine 10 changes the expectation and reliability of the preview performance and diversifies the preview content that the player perceives. I can do it.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may prepare a performance pattern such as performance pattern D shown in FIG. 99, in which a preview performance is performed in parallel with a specific performance without a suggestive performance. Note that the production pattern D is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, for example,
This is executed in one variation display game called the nth variation. By preparing a performance pattern in which a preview performance is performed in parallel with a specific performance without a suggestive performance, the gaming machine 10 changes the expectation and reliability of the preview performance and diversifies the preview content that the player perceives. can do.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the suggestion effect in parallel while executing the specific effect, and executes the preview effect in response to the result derived from the suggestion effect, as shown in effect patterns E and F shown in FIG. It may be something. In addition, when the suggestion performance and the preview performance are executed in one variation display game called the nth variation, the specific production is performed from n times before the nth variation.
It may also be executed over multiple variations. Further, the specific performance may be executed in parallel with the suggestion performance in the n-th variation, as in the performance pattern E, but may not be executed in parallel with the preview performance. Further, the specific performance may be executed in parallel with the suggestion performance in the n-th variation, and may be executed in parallel with at least a part of the preview performance, as in performance pattern F. Note that the effect patterns E and F are executed based on predetermined variable display commands, but they may be unrelated to the start of the specific effect. Also,
The variable display commands related to the execution of the effect patterns E and F may be related to the end of the specific effect. The gaming machine 10 can create a sense of anticipation for the preview performance even when the specific performance is executed, by making it possible to execute the specific performance even before receiving the variable display command regarding the execution of the suggested performance, and the game machine 10 can create a feeling of anticipation for the preview performance even when the specific performance is executed. Can be diversified.

Further, the gaming machine 10 executes a suggestion effect in parallel while executing a specific effect, and executes a preview effect in response to the result derived from the suggestion effect, as shown in the effect pattern G shown in FIG. There may be. In addition, when the suggestion performance and the preview performance are executed in one variation display game called the nth variation, the specific production is performed after the nth variation (n+1
) may be executed over the (n+1)th variation and may continue after the (n+1)th variation. Note that the production pattern G is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, but may be related to the start of a specific production, or may be unrelated to the start of a specific production. . If the performance pattern G is not related to the start time of the specific performance, the gaming machine 10 can determine the start time of the specific performance using RTC or other event triggers. By making it possible to execute the specific effect even after receiving the variable display command regarding the execution of the suggestive effect, the gaming machine 10 can create a sense of anticipation for further preview effects upon execution of the specific effect, and improve the preview content that the player can sense. can be diversified.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has production patterns B4, B5, B6, and B7 shown in FIG.
Various starting and ending times may be set in relation to the suggestive performance and the preview performance. For example, the specific performance in performance pattern B4 sets the start and end times within the same variable display game when the suggestion performance and the preview performance are executed in one variable display game called the nth variation. Further, the specific performance in performance pattern B5 is set to start before the (n-1)th variation when the suggestion performance and the preview performance are executed in one variation display game called the nth variation. , the end period is set at the n-th variation. In addition, the specific performance in performance pattern B6 is such that when the suggestion performance and the preview performance are executed in one variation display game called the nth variation, the start period is set at the nth variation, and the (n+1)th variation is performed. Set the end period after the change. Further, the specific performance in performance pattern B7 is set to start before the (n-1)th variation when the suggestion performance and the preview performance are executed in one variation display game called the nth variation. , the end period is set after the (n+1)th variation.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 enables the execution of a specific performance by setting the start and end times at timings that are not related to the reception of the variable display command related to the execution of the suggested performance, thereby making it possible to execute a specific performance with a further preview performance. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation and to diversify the preview contents that players get.

Next, an example of the execution ratio of the preview performance depending on the presence or absence of the specific performance and the success or failure of the suggestion performance will be explained using FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution rate of a preview performance pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of a specific performance according to the seventh embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 101(1) will be explained. The gaming machine 10 is
A pseudo-continuation performance (preliminary performance) after a successful performance in a suggestive performance without parallel execution with a specific performance is executed at a rate (probability) of 25%. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 0% a pseudo-continuous performance that has undergone a failure performance in the suggested performance without parallel execution with the specific performance. Also,
The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 25% a pseudo continuous performance that has passed through a failure performance in a suggested performance without parallel execution with a specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 45% the pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through the successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with the specific performance. Also,
The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 0% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a failure performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with a specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo consecutive performance without the failed performance in the suggested performance with parallel execution with the specific performance at a rate of 5%.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 passes through a successful performance in the suggestion performance at an execution rate of 50% when there is no parallel execution with a specific performance such as the advance notice execution rate (no specific performance) shown in FIG. 101(2). A pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a pseudo-continuous performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance at a rate of 0%, and a pseudo-continuation performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance is executed at a 50% execution rate.

Then, in the case where there is parallel execution with a specific performance, such as the advance notice execution rate (with specific performance) shown in FIG. The performance is executed, and at a rate of 0%, a pseudo-connection performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance, and at an execution rate of 10%, a pseudo-continuation performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate to 50% for the pseudo-continuous performance after the successful performance in the suggestion performance when the suggestion performance and the specific performance are not executed in parallel, and when the suggestion performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel. The implementation rate will be 90%. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes the success rate of the suggestion performance that has a period overlapping with the specific performance larger than the success rate of the suggestion performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance. In other words, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate of the preview performance after a suggestive performance that has a period that overlaps with a specific performance to be higher than the execution ratio of the preview performance when a suggestive performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance. Also make it bigger.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 changes the anticipation and reliability of the preview performance depending on whether the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, thereby diversifying the preview content that the player perceives. I can do it.

Next, another example of the execution rate of the preview performance depending on the presence or absence of the specific performance and the success or failure of the suggestion performance will be explained using FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating another example (part 1) of the execution rate of the preview performance pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific performance according to the seventh embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 102(1) will be explained. The gaming machine 10 is
A pseudo-continuation performance (preliminary performance) after a successful performance in a suggestive performance without parallel execution with a specific performance is executed at a rate (probability) of 25%. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 0% a pseudo-continuous performance that has undergone a failure performance in the suggested performance without parallel execution with the specific performance. Also,
The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 25% a pseudo continuous performance that has passed through a failure performance in a suggested performance without parallel execution with a specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 50% the pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through the successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with the specific performance. Also,
The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 0% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a failure performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with a specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 0%, no pseudo-continuous performance after a failure performance in the suggested performance with parallel execution with the specific performance.

In this way, the game machine 10 passes through a successful performance in the suggestion performance at an execution rate of 50% when there is no parallel execution with a specific performance such as the advance notice execution rate (no specific performance) shown in FIG. 102(2). A pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a pseudo-continuous performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance at a rate of 0%, and a pseudo-continuation performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance is executed at a 50% execution rate.

Then, as shown in the preview execution ratio (with specific performance) shown in FIG. A continuous performance is executed, a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a failed performance in the suggestion performance at a rate of 0%, and a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a failed performance in the suggestion performance is executed at a 0% execution rate.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate to 50% for the pseudo-continuous performance after the successful performance in the suggestion performance when the suggestion performance and the specific performance are not executed in parallel, and when the suggestion performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel. The execution rate will be 100%. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes the success rate of the suggestion performance that has a period overlapping with the specific performance larger than the success rate of the suggestion performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance. In other words, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate of the preview performance after a suggestive performance that has a period that overlaps with a specific performance to be higher than the execution ratio of the preview performance when a suggestive performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance. Also make it bigger. In particular, the gaming machine 10
This ensures that the preview performance is executed for the suggestive performance that has a period that overlaps with the specific performance.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 changes the anticipation and reliability of the preview performance depending on whether the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, thereby diversifying the preview content that the player perceives. I can do it.

Next, another example of the execution rate of the preview performance depending on the presence or absence of the specific performance and the success or failure of the suggestion performance will be explained using FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating another example (part 2) of the execution rate of the preview effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect according to the seventh embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 103(1) will be explained. The gaming machine 10 is
A pseudo-continuous performance (preliminary performance) after a successful performance in a suggestive performance without parallel execution with a specific performance is executed at a rate (probability) of 29%. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 1% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a failed performance in the suggested performance without being executed in parallel with the specific performance. Also,
The gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo consecutive performance without parallel performance with the specific performance after the failure performance in the suggested performance at a rate of 35%. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 20% the pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through the successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with the specific performance. Also,
The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 5% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a failed performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with a specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous performance without the failed performance in the suggested performance with parallel execution with the specific performance at a rate of 10%.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs a successful performance in the suggestion performance at an execution rate of about 45% when there is no parallel execution with a specific performance such as the advance notice execution rate (no specific performance) shown in FIG. 103(2). At a rate of about 1%, a pseudo-continuous performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance, and at an execution rate of about 54%, a pseudo-continuation performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance.

Then, as shown in the preview execution ratio (with specific performance) shown in FIG. 103 (3), when there is parallel execution with the specific performance, the gaming machine 10 has passed the successful performance in the suggestion performance at an execution rate of approximately 57%. A pseudo-continuation performance is executed, a pseudo-continuation performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance at a rate of about 14%, and a pseudo-continuation performance is executed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance is executed at an execution rate of about 29%.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate to approximately 45% for the pseudo-continuous performance after the successful performance in the suggestion performance when the suggestion performance and the specific performance are not executed in parallel, and the suggestion performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel. In this case, the execution rate is approximately 57%. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes the success rate of the suggestion performance that has a period overlapping with the specific performance larger than the success rate of the suggestion performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance. In other words, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate of the preview performance after a suggestive performance that has a period that overlaps with a specific performance to be higher than the execution ratio of the preview performance when a suggestive performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance. Also make it bigger. In particular, gaming machine 1
0 allows the preview performance to be executed at a low frequency even if a failure performance is executed in the suggestion performance.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 changes the anticipation and reliability of the preview performance depending on whether the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, thereby diversifying the preview content that the player perceives. I can do it.

Next, an example of the execution ratio of the preview performance depending on the presence or absence of the specific performance, the type thereof, and the success or failure of the suggestion performance will be explained using FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing another example (No. 3) of the execution rate of the preview performance pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific performance according to the seventh embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 104(1) will be explained. The gaming machine 10 is
A pseudo-continuation performance (preliminary performance) after a successful performance in a suggestive performance without parallel execution with a specific performance is executed at a rate (probability) of 20%. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 0% a pseudo-continuous performance that has undergone a failure performance in the suggested performance without parallel execution with the specific performance. Also,
The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 30% a pseudo continuous performance that has passed through a failure performance in a suggested performance without parallel execution with a specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 15% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with a timer performance (short), which is a form of specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 0% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a failure performance in the suggestion performance in parallel execution with the timer performance (short).
Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo continuous performance without the failed performance in the suggestion performance with parallel execution with the timer performance (short) at a rate of 15%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 15% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with a timer performance (long), which is a form of specific performance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 also has a timer performance (
A pseudo-continuous performance that has gone through a failure performance in a suggestive performance with parallel execution with (Long) is executed at a rate of 0%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo continuous performance without the failed performance in the suggestion performance with parallel execution with the timer performance (long) at a rate of 5%. Note that the timer effect (short) and timer effect (long) will be explained in detail later.

In this way, the game machine 10 passes through a successful performance in the suggestion performance at an execution rate of 40% when there is no parallel execution with a specific performance such as the advance notice execution rate (no specific performance) shown in FIG. 104(2). A pseudo-continuous performance is executed, and at an execution rate of 60%, no pseudo-continuous performance is performed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance. Note that the execution at a rate of 0% of the pseudo-continuation performance after the failure performance in the suggestion performance is omitted from the illustration.

Then, the gaming machine 10 determines the notice execution rate (timer effect (short)) shown in FIG. 104(3).
If there is parallel execution with a specific performance, as in (Yes), a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a successful performance in the suggestion performance at a 50% execution rate, and a pseudo continuous performance after a failure performance in the suggestion performance is executed at a 50% execution rate. Executes no continuous performance. In addition, 0 of the pseudo-connection performance after the failure performance in the suggestion performance.
Execution at a percentage rate is omitted from illustration.

Then, as shown in the advance notice execution rate (with timer effect (long)) shown in FIG. A pseudo-connection performance is executed after passing through , and a pseudo-connection performance without a failure performance in the suggestion performance is executed at an execution rate of 25%. In addition, 0% of the pseudo-connection performance after the failure performance in the suggestive performance.
The illustration of the execution at the rate of is omitted.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate to 40% for the pseudo-continuous performance after the successful performance in the suggestion performance when the suggestion performance and the specific performance are not executed in parallel, and the suggestion performance and the timer performance (short) are executed in parallel. When the suggestion performance and the timer performance (long) are executed in parallel, the execution ratio is 50%. In this way, the gaming machine 10
makes the success rate of a suggestive performance that has a period overlapping with the specific performance larger than the success rate of a suggestive performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 makes the success rate of the suggestion performance having a period overlapping with the timer performance (long) larger than the success rate of the suggestion performance having a period overlapping with the timer performance (short). In other words, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate of the preview performance after a suggestive performance that has a period that overlaps with a specific performance to be higher than the execution ratio of the preview performance when a suggestive performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance. Also make it bigger. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 determines the execution rate of the preview performance after passing through the suggestion performance that has a period that overlaps with the timer performance (long), and the execution rate of the preview performance when passing through the suggestion performance that has a period that overlaps with the timer performance (short). be larger than the execution rate.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only changes whether or not the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectations and reliability of the preview performance according to the form of the specific performance, so that the player can feel It is possible to diversify the content of notices that can be obtained.

Next, another example of the execution rate of the preview performance depending on the type of specific performance and the success or failure of the suggestion performance will be explained using FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating another example (No. 4) of the execution rate of the preview effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect according to the seventh embodiment. Figure 106 shows the seventh
It is a figure which shows another example (part 5) of the execution rate of the preview effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 105(1) will be explained. It should be noted that although the suggestion performance without being executed in parallel with the specific performance is omitted from the options to simplify the illustration, it may be included in the options.

The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 35% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with a timer performance (white), which is a form of specific performance. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 executes at a rate of 35% without the pseudo-continuous performance after the failure performance in the suggestion performance with parallel execution with the timer performance (white). Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 20% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with a timer performance (red), which is a form of specific performance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo continuous performance without the failed performance in the suggestion performance with parallel execution with the timer performance (red) at a rate of 5%. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 5% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with a timer performance (golden color), which is a form of specific performance. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 executes at a rate of 0% without the pseudo-continuous performance after the failure performance in the suggestion performance with parallel execution with the timer performance (golden color). In addition, timer effect (white) and timer effect (red)
and the timer effect (gold) will be explained in detail later.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 determines the execution rate of the preview performance when the timer performance (white) or the suggestion performance has a period that overlaps with the timer performance (red). The execution rate of the preview performance is set to be larger than the execution rate of the preview performance when the In addition, the gaming machine 10
is the execution rate of the preview effect when a suggestion effect that has a period that overlaps with the timer effect (red) is higher than the execution rate of the notice effect when a suggestion effect that has a period that overlaps with the timer effect (gold). It is made smaller than the execution rate of the preview performance when the suggestion performance has a period that overlaps with the timer performance (white).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only changes whether or not the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectations and reliability of the preview performance according to the form of the specific performance, so that the player can feel It is possible to diversify the content of notices that can be obtained.

Next, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 105(2) will be explained. It should be noted that although the suggestion performance without being executed in parallel with the specific performance is omitted from the options to simplify the illustration, it may be included in the options.

The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 30% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in a suggested performance with parallel execution with an even number reach, which is a form of a specific performance (a reach-constituting symbol performance).
Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 30%, no pseudo-continuous performance after a failure performance in the suggestion performance with parallel execution with even number reach. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs a pseudo-continuous performance after a successful performance in a suggestive performance with parallel execution with an odd number reach (excluding 7 reach), which is a form of specific performance (reach composition pattern performance), at a rate of 20%. Execute. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 is executed at a rate of 10% without pseudo-connection performance after failure performance in suggestion performance with parallel execution with odd reach (excluding 7 reach). In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 9% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggestion performance in parallel execution with 7-reach, which is a form of specific performance (ready-to-reach component design performance). Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous performance without the failure performance in the suggestion performance with parallel execution with 7 reach at a rate of 1%. Note that the even number reach, odd number reach (excluding 7 reach), and 7 reach will be explained later.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 changes the execution rate of the preview performance when a suggestive performance has a period that overlaps with 7 reaches, compared to when a suggestive performance has a period that overlaps with an even number reach or an odd number reach (excluding 7 reaches). Increase the execution rate of the preview performance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines the execution rate of the preview performance after a suggestive performance that has a period that overlaps with an odd reach (excluding 7 reaches), and the execution rate of a preview performance when a suggestive performance that has a period that overlaps with a 7 reach. The execution rate is set to be smaller than the execution rate of , and the execution rate is set to be larger than the execution rate of the preview performance when the suggestive performance has a period overlapping with the even number reach.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only changes whether or not the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectations and reliability of the preview performance according to the form of the specific performance, so that the player can feel It is possible to diversify the content of notices that can be obtained.

Next, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 106(1) will be explained. It should be noted that although the suggestion performance without being executed in parallel with the specific performance is omitted from the options to simplify the illustration, it may be included in the options.

The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 10% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in a suggested performance in parallel execution with short SP reach, which is a form of specific performance. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 executes at a rate of 60% without pseudo-continuous performance after failure performance in suggestion performance with parallel execution with short SP reach. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 10% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with a long SP reach, which is a form of specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 20%, no pseudo-continuous performance after a failure performance in the suggestion performance with parallel execution with the long SP reach. Note that short SP reach and long SP reach may be distinguished by comparing the size of production time, or long SP reach may be a developed reach that is executed after short SP reach. . Further, short SP reach and long SP reach are two forms of reach with different expectations, and do not necessarily require different performance times. Instead of the short SP reach and long SP reach, there may be SP reach A and SP reach B, which have the same performance time but different performance modes and expectations. Note that the expectation level may be an expectation level for deriving a win, or may be an expectation level for the amount of value that can be acquired at the time of a win.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 determines the execution rate of the preview performance when a suggestion performance that has a period that overlaps with the long SP reach is greater than the execution ratio of the preview performance when the suggestion performance has a period that overlaps with the short SP reach. Also make it bigger.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only changes whether or not the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectations and reliability of the preview performance according to the form of the specific performance, so that the player can feel It is possible to diversify the content of notices that can be obtained.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 106(2) will be explained. It should be noted that although the suggestion performance without being executed in parallel with the specific performance is omitted from the options to simplify the illustration, it may be included in the options.

The gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 2% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with the performance stock display "0", which is a form of specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo consecutive performance without the failed performance in the suggested performance with parallel execution with the performance stock display "0" at a rate of 18%. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 10% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with the performance stock display "1", which is a form of specific performance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has an effect stock display of “1”.
10% of the time, no pseudo-connection performance is performed after a failure performance in the suggestion performance with parallel execution with . In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 14% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with performance stock display "2", which is a form of specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 6%, no pseudo-continuous performance after a failed performance in the suggested performance with parallel execution with the performance stock display "2". In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 18% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with the performance stock display "3", which is a form of specific performance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 2%, no pseudo-continuous performance after a failed performance in the suggested performance with parallel execution with the performance stock display "3". Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes at a rate of 20% a pseudo-continuous performance that has passed through a successful performance in the suggested performance in parallel execution with the performance stock display "4", which is a form of specific performance. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 0%, a pseudo-continuous performance without a failed performance in the suggested performance with parallel execution with the performance stock display "4". Note that the performance stock displays "0", "1", [2], "3", and "4" will be explained in detail later.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate of the preview performance when the suggestion performance has a period overlapping with the performance stock display "4" to the performance stock display "0", "1", [2], "3". The ratio of execution of the preview performance is set to be higher than the execution rate of the preview performance when the suggestive performance has a period that overlaps with the previous performance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the execution rate of the preview performance after a suggestive performance that has a period that overlaps with the performance stock display "3" to the execution rate of the preview performance that has a period that overlaps with the performance stock display "4". It is set smaller than the execution rate of the preview performance and larger than the execution rate of the preview performance when the suggestion performance having a period overlapping with the performance stock display "0", "1", [2] is passed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a suggestive performance having a period overlapping with the performance stock display "2", and a suggestive performance having a period overlapping with the performance stock displays "4" and "3". The execution ratio of the preview performance is made smaller than the execution rate of the preview performance when the performance stock displays ``0'' and ``1'' are passed, and the execution rate of the preview performance is made larger than the execution rate of the preview performance when the suggestive performance having a period overlapping with the performance stock display ``0'' and ``1'' is passed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a suggestion performance having a period overlapping with the performance stock display "1" to a period overlapping with the performance stock display "4", "3", [2]. The execution ratio of the preview performance is made smaller than the execution rate of the preview performance when the suggestive performance has been performed, and is made larger than the execution ratio of the preview performance when the suggestive performance has a period overlapping with the performance stock display "0".

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only changes whether or not the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectations and reliability of the preview performance according to the form of the specific performance, so that the player can feel It is possible to diversify the content of notices that can be obtained.

Next, pseudo-continuous performance, which is a form of preview performance, will be described using FIG. 107 as a display example following the variable display example described using FIG. 84. FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a pseudo-connection effect according to the seventh embodiment.

The display screen 870 shown in FIG. 107(1) is a display screen following the display screen 850, and temporarily stops displaying the large symbol group 841 (for example, left symbol "1", middle symbol "3", right symbol "1"). )do. At this time, the display screen 870 guides the continuation of the pseudo series by displaying a pseudo series count display 872. For example, the display screen 870 shows the first temporary stop display, but displays "2" on the pseudo continuous number display 872 to foretell the second pseudo continuous change.

A display screen 871 shown in FIG. 107(2) is a display screen following the display screen 870, and displays the large symbol group 841 in a variable manner again. At this time, the display screen 871 displays the number of pseudo series display 872 to guide the number of pseudo series being continued. For example, although the display screen 871 indicates the second pseudo continuous variation, "2" is displayed in the pseudo continuous number display 872 to guide the number of times the second pseudo continuous variation continues.

The display screen 873 shown in FIG. 107(3) is a display screen following the display screen 871, and temporarily stops displaying the large symbol group 841 (for example, left symbol "2", middle symbol "3", right symbol "2"). )do. At this time, the display screen 873 displays "3" on the pseudo consecutive number display 872 to display 3
Foretells the second pseudo-connection change.

Thereafter, in the same way, the gaming machine 10 can continue the pseudo-sequence effect while giving notice and guidance of the number of pseudo-sequences. It should be noted that the number of times the pseudo-sequence performance can be continued can be set to an arbitrary number of times depending on the performance pattern.

In addition, although pseudo-continuation performance has been described as a form of preview performance, the preview performance may be any type that has a preview performance function, and is not limited to pseudo-continuation performance, such as pending changes as described in the fifth embodiment. It may be a production, a freeze production as described in the fourth embodiment, other background changes, a cut-in, a production using characters, or the like.

Here, the suggestion performance that is parallel to the timer performance (specific performance) before the pseudo-continuation performance (notice performance) will be explained using FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a display example (part 1) of the timer effect according to the seventh embodiment.

A display screen 874 shown in FIG. 108(1) is a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and shows a state in which a pseudo-coupling effect is being executed as a suggestive effect. The display screen 874 is
The display contents include a large symbol group 841, a pseudo-continuation effect display 852, and a timer effect display 875. The pseudo-coupling incitement effect display 852 performs a display related to the pseudo-coupling incitement effect. The timer effect display 875 is a display that guides the start or end of a predetermined effect using a timer display. For example, the timer effect display 875 indicates that the time until the result is derived in the variable display game is 8.
Provide guidance while displaying a decrement indicating that the time is 0 seconds. The display screen 874 displays a tiger-like character and the words "Stop!" as the pseudo-coupling effect display 852.
The pseudo-continuation promotion display 852 is a state in which the special symbol (pseudo-continuation symbol) is inciting the player to decide whether or not to temporarily stop, that is, it foretells that the pseudo-continuation production may be executed. This indicates the state in which the The large symbol group 841 indicates a state in which symbol "3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol and symbol "5" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol. In addition, the large symbol group 841 operates the pseudo-continuous symbols in a manner different from the fluctuating (the mode of the display screen 850) and the temporary stop state (for example, low-speed fluctuation) in the medium symbol, and determines whether the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop or not. This shows that the player is being provoked by the player.

A display screen 876 shown in FIG. 108 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 874, and is in a state suggesting the success of the suggestive effect (pseudo-associative instigation effect) (suggesting that the pseudo-associative effect is to be executed). state).

The pseudo-coupling promotion display 852 on the display screen 876 displays a tiger-like character and the words "Success!!", indicating that the pseudo-coupling production (success or failure production of the temporary stop of the pseudo-coupling pattern) has led to success. This suggests that it will develop into a pseudo-connection performance. The timer effect display 875 on the display screen 876 indicates that the time until the result derivation in the variable display game has progressed to 75.5 seconds. Note that the value displayed by the timer effect display 875 does not necessarily have to correspond to an accurate time value, and may be a simple counter. Further, the timer effect display 875 does not need to update the value at a constant rate, but may update at an unconstant rate. In addition, the timer effect display 875 does not require updating the value one by one,
It may be updated with a variable value. Further, the timer effect display 875 is not limited to updating the value in the direction of subtraction, but may be updated in the direction of addition, or may be updated while subtracting and adding.

In addition, the large symbol group 841 on the display screen 876 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "5" on the right symbol, temporarily suspends the pseudo consecutive symbol on the middle symbol, and temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "5" on the right symbol, and temporarily suspends the pseudo consecutive symbol on the middle symbol. This suggests that the production led to the success. After this, the gaming machine 10 ends the suggestion performance, and executes a pseudo-continuation performance as a preview performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 107.

A display screen 877 shown in FIG. 108(3) is a display screen after the display screen 874, and is in a state indicating failure of the suggestive effect (pseudo-associative effect) (suggesting not to perform the pseudo-associative effect). state).

On the display screen 877, the pseudo-continuation inciting effect display 852 displays a tiger-like character and the words "Failure...", indicating that the pseudo-inciting effect (success or failure of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern) has failed (
This suggests that failure 1 and failure 2) were derived. The timer effect display 875 on the display screen 877 indicates that the time until the result derivation in the variable display game has progressed to 75.5 seconds.

In addition, on the display screen 877, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops at symbol "3" in the left symbol, temporarily stops at symbol "5" in the right symbol, and displays the symbol in a fluctuating state in the middle symbol. This suggests that the production leads to failure and does not develop into a pseudo-coupled production. Incidentally, the failure of the pseudo-coupling performance may also suggest other developments, such as a suggestion that the SP reach will develop or a suggestion that the performance will not develop.

Next, another example of the display mode of the timer effect (specific effect) will be explained using FIG. 109.
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a display example (part 2) of the timer effect according to the seventh embodiment. The display mode of the timer effect allows the timer value as the initial display mode and the background as the constant display mode to be changed.

The timer effect display 875 shown in FIG. 109(1) has a timer value of “6” as an initial display mode.
0:00'' and the background as a constant display mode is white. The timer effect display 875 produces a timer effect as a form of specific effect. Further, the timer effect display 875 produces a timer effect (white color) as a form of specific effect by setting the background as a constant display mode to white.

Further, the timer effect display 875a shown in FIG. 109(2) has a timer value of "30:00" as an initial display mode, that is, a timer effect (short), and a white background as a constant display mode. The timer effect display 875a produces a timer effect (short) as a form of specific effect by displaying a small value as a timer value as an initial display mode.

Further, the timer effect display 875b shown in FIG. 109(3) has a timer value of "90:00" as an initial display mode, that is, a timer effect (long), and a white background as a constant display mode. The timer effect display 875b produces a timer effect (long) as a form of specific effect by displaying a large value as a timer value as an initial display mode.

Further, the timer effect display 875c shown in FIG. 109(4) has a timer value of "60:00" as an initial display mode, and a red background as a constant display mode. Timer performance display 87
5c produces a timer effect (red color) as a form of specific effect by setting the background as a constant display mode to red.

Further, the timer effect display 875d shown in FIG. 109(5) has a timer value of "60:00" as an initial display mode, and a gold background as a constant display mode. Timer performance display 87
5d produces a timer effect (gold color) as a form of specific effect by setting the background as a constant display mode to gold.

Although the execution ratio of the preview performance is made to differ between the timer performance (short) and the timer performance (long), and the timer performance (red) and timer performance (gold), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the length of the waiting time from setting the timer to the start of the countdown (for example, the period during which the state displayed in the "Waiting" section continues) (timer effect (shorter waiting time) and timer effect (waiting time The execution rate of the preview performance may be varied depending on the length of the preview performance. Also, the process by which the timer is set (for example, whether the count-up speed that counts up from 00:00 to the number of seconds set as a timer (for example, 60 seconds) is fast or slow) (timer effect) (Count-up speed is slow) and timer effect (Count-up speed is high)) The execution rate of the preview effect may be made different. Further, the execution rate of the preview performance may be varied depending on whether there are many or few timers (timer performance (few timers) or timer performance (large number of timers)). Further, the execution rate of the preview effect may be varied depending on the size of the timer (timer effect (large timer) and timer effect (small timer)). Furthermore, the execution rate of the preview effect may be varied depending on whether the additional time (number of replenishment seconds) that occurs during the timer countdown is large or small (timer effect (more additional time) or timer effect (less additional time)). .

Next, the display mode of the reach composition symbol performance (specific performance) will be explained using FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a display example of temporary stop at reach time according to the seventh embodiment. The reach-constituting symbol performance is a performance based on a combination of symbols that constitute a reach among the large symbol group 841, for example, a left symbol and a right symbol. It should be noted that other symbols that are not related to the ready-to-win structure of the large symbol group 841, such as medium symbols, may be temporarily stopped or may be changing with symbol switching.

A display screen 878 shown in FIG. 110(1) is, for example, a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and is a display screen on which a reach composition symbol effect is performed as a form of specific effect. On the display screen 878, the left and right symbols constituting the reach of the large symbol group 841 each display "2", and the middle symbols not related to the reach configuration display "3". Display screen 87
8 is an example of an even number reach where the left symbol and the right symbol each display an even number.

A display screen 879 shown in FIG. 110(2) is, for example, a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and is a display screen on which a reach composition symbol effect is performed as a form of specific effect. On the display screen 879, the left and right symbols constituting the reach of the large symbol group 841 each display "5", and the middle symbols not related to the reach configuration display "3". Display screen 87
9 is an example of an odd number reach (excluding 7 reach) in which the left symbol and the right symbol each display an odd number.

A display screen 880 shown in FIG. 110(3) is, for example, a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and is a display screen on which a reach composition symbol effect is performed as a form of specific effect. On the display screen 880, the left and right symbols constituting a reach in the large symbol group 841 each display "7", and the middle symbols not related to the reach configuration display "3". Display screen 88
0 is an example of 7 reach where the left and right symbols each display an odd number.

Note that the divisions of even number reach, odd number reach (excluding 7 reach), and 7 reach in the reach composition symbol performance are examples of divisions in the reach composition symbol performance. The division in the reach composition symbol presentation can be any division. Naturally, even if the patterns constituting the large pattern group 841 are not based on numbers or include letters, they can be classified based on characters, backgrounds, colors, etc.

Next, a pending change inciting performance (suggestion performance) that is parallel to the SP reach performance (specific performance) before the pending change performance (notice performance) will be explained using FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a display example of the SP reach effect according to the seventh embodiment.

A display screen 881 shown in FIG. 111(1) is a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and shows a state in which a pending change provocation performance is being executed as a suggestion performance. The display screen 881 includes a large symbol group 882, a ready-to-reach effect display 883, and a pending change inciting effect display 884 as display contents. The large symbol group 882 is the large symbol group 84 that was displayed in the center of the display screen 850.
This is a symbol group display in which the size of 1 is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner. In the large symbol group 882, the left and right symbols constituting the reach temporarily stop displaying "7", respectively, and the middle symbols not related to the reach structure are displayed in a variable manner while switching symbols.

The reach effect display 883 is a form of specific effect. While the large symbol group 882 constitutes and displays a reach, the reach effect display 883 produces a reach by displaying characters and the like. For example, the reach effect display 883 produces a process of deriving a win through a match between a character like a lion and a character like a tiger.

The pending change provocation display 884 is a form of suggestive production. Pending change provocation display 88
4 displays an effect in which a pig-like character acts on the pending consumption display 846.
For example, a pig-like character prompts the pending consumption icon to change by tapping the pending consumption icon displayed by the pending consumption display 846.

A display screen 885 shown in FIG. 111(2) is a display screen after the display screen 881, and shows a state in which the execution result of a pending change inciting performance is displayed as a suggestion performance. The pending change promotion effect display 884 on the display screen 885 shows that the pig-like character has successfully acted on the pending extinguishment display 846 and the pending extinguishment icon has changed. For example, the pending consumption icon changes from white to red to indicate that the expectation level of winning is changed (increased). The hold change excitement effect display 884 on the display screen 885 shows a pig-like character being happy in response to a change in the hold extinguishment icon.

A display screen 886 shown in FIG. 111(3) is a display screen after the display screen 881, and shows a state in which the execution result of a pending change inciting performance is displayed as a suggestion performance. The pending change promotion effect display 884 on the display screen 886 shows that the action by the pig-like character on the pending extinguishment display 846 has failed and the pending extinguishment icon has not changed. For example, the pending consumption icon remains white, indicating that there is no change in the expected degree of winning. Display screen 8
A pending change promotion display 884 in 86 shows a pig-like character exiting in response to the pending extinguishing icon not changing.

Note that the suspension change inciting effect may be performed instead of the suspension expiry display 846 or on the suspension expiry display 84.
In addition to 6, the hold display 845 may be designed to stimulate a hold change.
In addition, the pending consumption icon displayed by the pending consumption display 846 and the pending waiting icon displayed by the pending display 845 are not limited to white and red, but can also be displayed in blue, yellow, rainbow colors, etc. according to expectations and reliability. can do. Further, the display mode of the pending extinguishing icon or the pending standby icon is not limited to color, but can be changed to shape, motion, size, or a combination thereof depending on the expectation level and reliability level.

In addition, the hold change arousing effect not only creates expectations and reliability through changes in the display format of the hold extinguishment icon and hold standby icon, but also displays effects that influence the hold extinguishment icon and hold standby icon (for example, a pig-like display). It may also be possible to create expectations and trustworthiness by displaying character movements. For example, the suspension change promotion effect can create expectations and reliability by displaying the action of a pig-like character that is displayed together with a change in the display mode of the suspension extinguishing icon or the suspension standby icon. More specifically, the degree of expectation and reliability may be expressed by the size of the happy gestures of a character such as a pig. Further, the hold change promotion effect may be one that creates expectations and reliability by displaying the action of a character such as a pig, which is displayed without changing the display mode of the hold extinguishing icon or the hold standby icon.

Next, Figure 11 shows the performance stock (performance stock display performance), which is a form of specific performance.
2 to 114 will be explained. FIG. 112 is a diagram (part 1) showing a display example of performance stock according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram (part 2) showing a display example of the production stock according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 114 is a diagram (part 3) showing a display example of the production stock according to the seventh embodiment.

A display screen 891 shown in FIG. 112(1) shows a display screen during symbol variation (during execution of a variation display game). The display screen 891 includes two sets of decorative symbols (a large symbol group 841 and a small symbol group 842), a pending display 845, and a pending extinguishment display 846 as display contents.

On the display screen 891, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in the large symbol group 841 are fluctuating at high speed, indicating that the corresponding special symbol fluctuating display game is in a fluctuating display state. Display screen 89
In 1, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in the small symbol group 842 are fluctuating at high speed, indicating that the corresponding special symbol fluctuating display game is in a fluctuating display state.

On the display screen 891, the pending display 845 shows that the number of pending memories is "4" by four pending memory displays (icon displays).
On the display screen 891, the pending consumption display 846 is a pending memory display (icon display) within the frame.
is displayed, indicating that the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state.

A display screen 893 shown in FIG. 112(2) is a display screen after the display screen 891. The large symbol group 841 on the display screen 893 shows a state in which the left symbol and the right symbol have temporarily stopped and a reach has occurred. In the large symbol group 841 on the display screen 893, the medium symbol changes at high speed, and the left symbol and right symbol temporarily stop with the symbol "7" swinging. That is, the display screen 893
The large symbol group 841 in shows a state in which a reach with a winning number of symbol "7" has occurred. Furthermore, the display screen 893 includes a pending change provocation display 884 as a form of suggestive production.
The pending change promotion effect display 884 displays an effect in which a pig-like character acts on the pending extinguishment display 846. For example, a pig-like character prompts the pending consumption icon to change by tapping the pending consumption icon displayed by the pending consumption display 846.

A display screen 894 shown in FIG. 112(3) is a display screen after the display screen 893, and shows a state in which a stock release effect, which is a form of specific effect, is being performed (a state immediately after the start).

The display screen 894 displays a performance opportunity stock display 896, a stock release performance display 895,
The display contents include a performance mode stock display 897. The performance opportunity stock display 896 displays four fire extinguisher images (images representing performance opportunity stock) showing items in the form of a fire extinguisher, and thereby provides four opportunities for a predetermined performance (performance to extinguish a flame). It shows that there are times.
The four fire extinguisher image displays correspond to the effect stock display "4". In addition, if there are three fire extinguisher image displays, it corresponds to the production stock display "3", if there are two, it corresponds to the production stock display "2", and if there is one, it corresponds to the production stock display "1". However, if there is no performance stock display, "
0”.

On the display screen 894, a pending change inciting performance display 884 as a form of suggestion performance and a stock release performance (performance stock display "0" to "4") as a form of specific performance are executed in parallel. Show the situation. The pending change promotion effect display 884 on the display screen 894 shows a state in which a pig-like character has successfully influenced the pending extinguishment display 846 and the pending extinguishment icon has changed. In addition, the pending change inciting performance display 884 is the performance opportunity stock display 89
6, the stock release effect display 895, and the display mode of the effect mode stock display 897, the success/failure probability of the success/failure performance in the suggestion performance can be changed. Furthermore, the pending change inciting performance display 884 can change the notification content of the preview performance after the success of the suggestion performance according to the display mode of the performance opportunity stock display 896, the stock release performance display 895, and the performance mode stock display 897.

Up to this point, the suggestion performance and the preview performance have ended, but we will continue to explain the performance stock display performance after the suggestion performance and the preview performance have ended. The performance opportunity stock display 896 holds a number of performance opportunity stocks corresponding to the number of performances, which indicates (clarifies) the opportunity (number of times) for a predetermined performance (flame extinguishing performance) to be performed at the start of the stock release performance. (displayed). The stock release effect display 895 on the display screen 894 displays the words "Extinguish the flame!!" and provides the player with an overview of the stock release effect.
The production mode stock display 897 on the display screen 894 includes three flame images (images indicating production mode stock) indicating items in the flame mode and push button images (production mode stock) indicating items in the mode of the push button 25. indicate.

For example, an item in the shape of a push button 25 suggests that a push button operation effect will be performed, and an item in the form of a flame suggests that a push button operation effect will not be performed (the push button operation effect is canceled). do. In other words, for items in the form of flames, the push button operation effect will no longer be executed (although there is a scene in which the push button operation effect will be executed later, there is a possibility that the push button operation effect will not be executed in that scene). ). That is, the item in the form of flame is a presentation form stock that suggests negative content.

That is, the performance mode stock display 897 on the display screen 894 indicates that if the stock release performance ends as it is, the push button operation performance will not be performed as the stock consumption performance (will not develop into a push button operation performance). There is.

The performance mode stock display 897 starts to be displayed with the performance mode stock indicating the performance mode of the stock consumption performance being held (displayed) at the start of the stock release performance.
A display screen 898 shown in FIG. 113(1) is a display screen after the display screen 894, and shows a state where a stock release effect is being performed.

The display screen 898 displays an image showing the push button being pressed by hand, the words "Press!", and a timer, and the stock release effect display 895 displays the push button 25 to the player. It will guide you that it is time to perform the operation, and press push button 2.
5 is recommended. In addition, the stock release effect display 895 on the display screen 898 is
The words ``Four more chances!!'' are displayed to inform you of the remaining number of stock releases in the stock release performance.

In addition, on the display screen 898, the performance opportunity stock display 896 displays one of the four fire extinguisher images (images indicating the performance opportunity stock) translucently, and currently the fire extinguisher image (
This indicates that a predetermined performance corresponding to the performance opportunity stock) is in progress.

A display screen 899 shown in FIG. 113(2) is a display screen after the display screen 898, and shows a state where a stock release effect is being performed.
On the display screen 899, the stock release performance display 895 displays the words "You have 3 more chances!" to guide the remaining number of stock releases in the stock release performance. In addition, on the display screen 899, the performance opportunity stock display 896 is displaying three fire extinguisher images (the fire extinguisher image that was displayed semitransparently has disappeared), and the performance opportunity stock display 896 corresponds to the first performance opportunity stock. This indicates that stock release (predetermined effect) has ended.

In addition, on the display screen 899, the performance opportunity stock display 896 has the part where the fire extinguisher image was displayed semitransparently displayed as a blank space, and the display area (size) has not been changed. In this way, by maintaining the display area, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a sense of expectation that additional performance opportunity stock will be provided during the stock release performance.

In addition, on the display screen 899, the production mode stock display 897 displays two flame images (images indicating production mode stock) and one push button image (image indicating production mode stock). Removal of images (production style stock that suggests negative content) (
This indicates that if the extinguishing of the flame is successful (extinguishing the flame), that is, if the remaining three stocks are opened and the two flame images are successfully removed, a push button operation performance will be performed as a stock consumption performance.

A display screen 900 shown in FIG. 113(3) is a display screen after the display screen 899, and shows a state where a stock release effect is being performed. More specifically, the display screen 900 shows a state in which the last stock release in the stock release effect is being performed.

On the display screen 900, the stock release effect display 895 displays an image showing a push button being pressed by hand, the words "Press!", and a timer, and prompts the player to push the push button 25. The system guides the user that it is time to operate the push button 25 and prompts the user to operate the push button 25. In addition, on the display screen 900, the stock release effect display 895 is
The words "Last chance!!" are displayed to inform you of the remaining number of stock releases in the stock release performance. In addition, on the display screen 900, the performance opportunity stock display 896 displays only one semi-transparent fire extinguisher image, indicating that a predetermined performance corresponding to the fire extinguisher image is currently in progress. ing.

A display screen 901 shown in FIG. 114(1) is a display screen after the display screen 900, and is a state in which the flame image (presentation mode stock suggesting negative content) cannot be completely removed by the stock release effect. shows.

On the display screen 901, the stock release effect display 895 displays the words "Extinguishing failed!!" to inform that the flame image (presentation mode stock suggesting negative content) could not be removed by the stock release effect. ing. Furthermore, on the display screen 901, the performance mode stock display 897 displays a translucent push button image and a flame image, indicating that the push button is extinguished by the flame. In other words, the performance mode stock display 897 indicates that a push button operation performance is not performed as a stock consumption performance (that it does not develop into a push button operation performance).

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 starts a stock consumption performance and performs a performance based on the display mode of the performance mode stock display 897 (for example, displays normal symbol fluctuations (display screen 89
After moving to step 3, the medium pattern stops fluctuating)).

A display screen 902 shown in FIG. 114(2) is a display screen after the display screen 900, and shows a state when all the flame images (production style stock suggesting negative content) can be removed by the stock release production. show.

On the display screen 902, the stock release effect display 895 displays the words "Extinguishing Success!!" to inform that the flame image (presentation mode stock suggesting negative content) has been removed by the stock release effect. There is. Further, on the display screen 902, the performance mode stock display 897 displays only the push button image, and shows that the flame image has been removed. That is, the performance mode stock display 897 indicates that a push button operation performance is performed as a stock consumption performance (development into a push button operation performance).

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 starts the stock consumption performance and performs a push button operation performance as a stock consumption performance based on the display mode of the performance mode stock display 897.
The above is the stock performance in the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. In this way, gaming machine 1
0 can perform a stock performance (preliminary notification) in which the performance mode stock is reduced instead of adding the performance mode stock in the stock release performance.

Furthermore, in the above performance, the performance opportunity stock was not performed by the stock grant performance (although the performance opportunity stock was provided without any performance), but the gaming machine 10 is not limited to this.
A stock grant performance may be performed to provide performance opportunity stock.

In this case, for example, the gaming machine 10 may perform a stock deprivation performance in which performance opportunity stock is stripped away in conjunction with the performance instead of a stock grant performance in which performance opportunity stock is provided in conjunction with the performance. good.

For example, the gaming machine 10 starts the stock stripping performance from a state where a predetermined number (for example, five) of performance opportunity stocks have been assigned, and as the stock stripping performance progresses, the performance opportunity stocks are stripped away, and the stock stripping The stock release performance may be performed as many times as the performance opportunity stock remaining at the end of the performance.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may perform both a stock giving performance and a stock stripping performance, or, for example, when a push button image is formed as a result of a reel performance, it is given, and when a skull image is formed, it is given. You may perform a performance that deprives you. According to this,
The gaming machine 10 can improve the variety of presentations, prevent the game from becoming stale, and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 10 (including the modified example) of the seventh embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a preview performance means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) capable of executing a preview performance (for example, a pseudo-continuous performance), and a system that executes the preview performance in relation to the success or failure of the performance. Suggestive presentation means (gaming control device 100, presentation control device 300) capable of executing a suggestive presentation (for example, a pseudo-coupling presentation), and a specific device that performs the derivation process of a game result in a period that overlaps with the suggestion presentation. It includes specific performance means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) that can execute a performance (for example, timer performance). The suggestive performance means is a first success/failure performance that has a period that overlaps with the specific performance (for example, a pseudo-success/failure performance that is executed in parallel with the timer performance), or a second success/failure performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance. The first probability (for example, 90%) that it is possible to execute a production (for example, a pseudo-coupling production that is not executed in parallel with a timer production) and to execute a suggestion production after the success of the first success/failure production is set as follows: The second probability (for example, 50%) of executing the suggestion performance after the success of the second success/failure performance is set (see FIG. 101).

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a preview performance means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) capable of executing a preview performance (for example, pseudo-continuous performance), and a system that executes the preview performance in relation to the success or failure of the performance. Suggestive presentation means (gaming control device 100, presentation control device 300) capable of executing a suggestive presentation (for example, a pseudo-coupling presentation), and a specific device that performs the derivation process of a game result in a period that overlaps with the suggestion presentation. It includes specific performance means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) that can execute a performance (for example, timer performance). The specific presentation means is a first specific presentation (for example, timer presentation (long)) of the first presentation mode, or a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode.
It is possible to execute a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance (short)) in the performance mode. The suggestive performance means is a first success/failure performance that has a period that overlaps with the first specific performance (for example, a pseudo-continuation promotion performance that is executed in parallel with a timer performance (long)), or a period that overlaps with the second specific performance. It is possible to execute a second success/failure performance (for example, a pseudo-coupling performance executed in parallel with a timer performance (short)), and a first success/failure performance that executes a suggestion performance after the success of the first success/failure performance. The probability (for example, 75%) and the second to execute the suggestion performance after the success of the second success/failure performance.
(for example, 50%) (see FIG. 104).

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes a preview performance means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) capable of executing a preview performance (for example, pseudo-continuous performance), and a system that executes the preview performance in relation to the success or failure of the performance. Suggestive presentation means (gaming control device 100, presentation control device 300) capable of executing a suggestive presentation (for example, a pseudo-coupling presentation), and a specific device that performs the derivation process of a game result in a period that overlaps with the suggestion presentation. It includes specific performance means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) that can execute a performance (for example, timer performance). The specific presentation means is a first specific presentation (for example, timer presentation (long)) of the first presentation mode, or a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode.
It is possible to execute a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance (short)) in the performance mode. The suggestive performance means is a first success/failure performance that has a period that overlaps with the specific performance (for example, a pseudo-coupling performance that is executed in parallel with the timer performance), or a second performance that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific performance.
It is possible to execute a success/failure performance (for example, a pseudo-association performance that is not executed in parallel with a timer performance), and a first probability (for example, 60%) of executing a suggestion performance after the success of the first success/failure performance.
(=(15+15)/(15+15+15+5))) is made larger than the second probability (for example, 40%) of executing the suggestion effect after the success of the second success/failure effect, and A third success/failure performance that has a period that overlaps with the first specific performance (for example, a pseudo-coupling performance that is executed in parallel with the timer performance (long)), or a fourth performance that has a period that overlaps with the second specific performance. A success/failure performance (for example, a timer performance (short)) can be executed, and a third probability (for example, 75%) of executing a suggestion performance after the success of the third success/failure performance;
The fourth probability (for example, 50%) of executing the suggestion performance after the success or failure of the success/failure performance is different (see FIG. 104).

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes a preview performance means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) capable of executing a preview performance (for example, a pseudo-continuous performance), and a suggestive performance that suggests execution of the preview performance (
For example, a suggestive performance means (gaming control device 100, performance control device 300) that can execute a pseudo-continuation inciting performance), and a specific performance means (for example, a timer performance) that can execute a specific performance (for example, a timer performance) in a period that overlaps with the suggestive performance. A game control device 100, a performance control device 300), and a game control device 100). The suggestive performance means can suggest the execution of the preview performance by the suggestive performance being in a specific performance mode, and the suggestive performance that is executed overlappingly with the specific performance (for example, a pseudo-continuation provocation that is executed in parallel with the timer performance). The first probability (e.g., 90%) that the production (production) is a specific production mode is that a suggestive production (for example, a pseudo-coupling production that is not executed in parallel with a timer production) that is executed without overlapping with the specific production is a specific production. (See FIG. 101).

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a preview performance means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) capable of executing a preview performance (for example, a pseudo-continuous performance), and a suggestive performance (for example, a suggestive performance that suggests execution of the preview performance).
For example, a suggestive performance means (gaming control device 100, performance control device 300) that can execute a pseudo-continuous inciting performance) and a specific performance means that can execute a specific performance (for example, a timer performance) in a period that overlaps with the suggestive performance. (Game control device 100, production control device 300). The specific presentation means is a first specific presentation (for example, timer presentation (long)) of the first presentation mode, or a second specific presentation (for example, timer presentation (short)) of a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode. )) is executable. The suggestion performance means is capable of suggesting the execution of the preview performance by making the suggestion performance in a specific performance mode, and is also capable of executing the suggestion performance overlapped with the first specific performance or the second specific performance, The first stage in which the suggested performance that is executed overlappingly with the performance is a specific performance mode.
(for example, 75%) is different from the second probability (for example, 50%) that the suggested performance that is executed overlappingly with the second specific performance is the specific performance mode (see FIG. 104).

(6) The gaming machine 10 includes a preview performance means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) capable of executing a preview performance (for example, a pseudo-continuous performance), and a suggestive performance (for example, a suggestive performance that suggests execution of the preview performance).
For example, a suggestive performance means (gaming control device 100, performance control device 300) that can execute a pseudo-continuation inciting performance), and a specific performance means (for example, a timer performance) that can execute a specific performance (for example, a timer performance) in a period that overlaps with the suggestive performance. A game control device 100, a performance control device 300), and a game control device 100). The suggestive performance means can suggest the execution of the preview performance by the suggestive performance being in a specific performance mode, and the suggestive performance that is executed overlappingly with the specific performance (for example, a pseudo-continuation provocation that is executed in parallel with the timer performance). A first probability (e.g., 90%) that the production (production) is a specific production mode, and a suggestive production that is executed without overlapping with the specific production (for example, a pseudo-coupling production that is not executed in parallel with the timer production) is the specific production. The second probability (for example, 50%) is different from the second probability (for example, 50%) (see FIG. 101).

Note that the above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program is provided that describes the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have. By executing the program on the computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. A program that describes processing contents can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
Examples include optical disks, magneto-optical recording media, and semiconductor memories. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk drives (HDDs), flexible disks (FDs), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical disks include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk)-RO
There are M/RW (ReWritable), etc. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as a magneto-optical recording medium.
etc.

When distributing a program, for example, a DVD or C
Portable recording media such as D-ROM are on sale. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via a network.

A computer that executes a program stores, for example, a program recorded on a portable recording medium or a program transferred from a server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. Note that a computer can also directly read a program from a portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Furthermore, each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program.

In addition, at least a part of the above processing functions may be performed by a DSP (Digital Signal Processor),
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De
It can also be realized with an electronic circuit such as a vice).

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment, but can be used, for example, with other pachinko gaming machines, arranged ball gaming machines, mahjong ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use game balls, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

Further, the disclosed embodiments should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. Furthermore, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description,
It is intended that all changes within the meaning and range of equivalence of the claims be included.

10 Game machine 41,830 Display device 100,100a Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

a preview performance means capable of executing a first preview performance that foretells the progress of the game and a second preview performance that previews the result of the game;
Suggestive performance means capable of executing a suggestive performance that suggests execution of the first preview performance;
a specific performance means capable of executing a specific performance for presenting a process of deriving the result of the game after execution of the second preview performance;
including;
The suggestion performance means is capable of suggesting execution of the first preview performance depending on the success or failure of the suggestion performance, and the suggestion performance includes a first probability of success or failure in the success or failure of the suggestion performance. It is possible to execute a suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance in which the success probability is a second probability, and a specific failure performance among the failure performances that produce failure in the success or failure of the suggestion performance is included in the first suggestion performance. Included in the second suggestion,
The preview performance means includes, in the second preview performance, a final preview performance that definitively foretells that the result of the game is a special result, and a predetermined reliability that predicts that the result of the game is a special result. It is possible to perform unconfirmed preview performances,
The specific performance means performs a first specific performance in which the derivation process is performed in a first period, and a second specific performance in which the derivation process is performed in a second period that is larger than the first period. a first rate at which the second specific performance is selected from the first specific performance and the second specific performance when the preview performance means executes the confirmed preview performance; , increasing a second ratio at which the second specific performance is selected from the first specific performance and the second specific performance when the unconfirmed preview performance is executed;
Game machine.

Images